0% found this document useful (0 votes)

60 views

Vector Release Notes

Uploaded by

mircea marina

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

60 views

Vector Release Notes

Uploaded by

mircea marina

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 503

Vect

orRel
eas
eNot
es4.
0.R04
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es4.
0.R02
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es4.
0.R01
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
20.R05
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
20.R04
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
20.R03
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
20.R02
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
20.R01
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
19.R02
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
19.R01
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
18.Rxx
Vect
orRel
eas
eNot
es3.
17.Rxx
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 26/11/2019

Real time version: 4.0.R04
Windows version: 4.0.R04
RT interface version: 4.0.R04
NOTE: This version does not support Single Core
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

Copyright © 2019 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

This guide is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This product or document is protected by copyright and distributed under
licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution and decompilation. No part of
this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without
the prior express written authorization of Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. and its
licensors (if any). Information contained herein is subject to change without
notice.

1|
Table of Contents

|2
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

2 Version Highlights
Version 4.0.R04 brings a new and updated feature.

Feature / Improvement Description

General

▪ Vector Black and Ultra Black This version supports the Vector Black and
Vector Ultra Black.
Support

▪ Vector PC Outputs The number of outputs for Vector PC has

changed in case PC Wing is connected.

▪ New Device Builder There is a new version of Device Builder that is

supported in this Vector version.

System Settings

▪ Option to Change Status Bar Size Status bar size can be changed between 3 sizes
now.

▪ Ethernet Ascii Messages Vector now supports receiving of Ascii

messages via Ethernet.

3|
Bug Fixes V4.0.R04

3 Bug Fixes V4.0.R04

▪ Softkey views are not maintaining the last scrolled position when loading
the layout or restarting the console (Reported by Stephen Plotkin).
▪ Color picker default saturation value for fixtures with no dimmer was 0
and it shouldn't (Reported by Stephen Plotkin).
▪ @+ and @- are not working as they should (Reported by Stephen
Plotkin).
▪ Selecting range of [Dim] using +/- is not working (Reported by Stephen
Plotkin).
▪ Sequence is invalid when using + to select Cues/Qlists (Reported by
Compulite team).
▪ After pressing +/- dimmer values are released from the editor for
selected fixtures (Reported by Compulite team).
▪ Eport 8 is only opening 4 ports instead of 8 (Reported by Matteo Boffi).
▪ When connecting a Wing with faders it applies the fader values to the
console instead of matching the console's position (Reported by Lorenzo
Pagella).
▪ When a second PB Wing 20 is connecting to the console, the pages are
not synced (Reported by Lorenzo Pagella).
▪ Stability improvements on Master-Slave and Master-Node connections.
▪ Sync improvements on Master-Slave and Master-Node.

|4
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS are
in BOLD CAPS.
The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen
BUTTONS are BOLD ITALICIZED CAPS.
Dialog boxes, Window titles and field names appear in this font.
Sequences appear like this; [SEQUENCE, SEQUENCE].

The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends on whether you are using
the mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

5|
Vector Black and Ultra Black Support

5 Vector Black and Ultra Black Support

This version supports the brand-new models of the Vector family:
• Vector Ultra Black -
http://www.compulite.com/products/consoles/vector-family/vector-ultra-
black
• Vector Black - http://www.compulite.com/products/consoles/vector-
family/vector-black

|6
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

6 Vector PC Outputs
Vector PC will now open 16 universes in case a PC Wing is connected to it.
The universes will be opened for all protocols.

7|
New Device Builder

7 New Device Builder

We are happy to announce a new Device Builder coming with this version.

The new Device Builder supports newer operating systems as well as fixing
many issues and adding more possibilities to build devices easily.
We kept the original design to make no difference to users knowing it.

Added features:
• Support up to 256 parameters per device (instead of 128 before this
version). This is also supported in version 4.0.R04 of Vector.
• Support up to 52 layers of wheel assignment per bank (instead of 6
before this version). This is also supported in version 4.0.R04 of Vector.
• Option to duplicate a device easily by only giving it a new id.
• Show how many devices we have in the current folder (manufacturer).
• Resize the tree view window to see the device list better.
• And more…

|8
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

8 Option to Change Status Bar Size

Status Bar size can now be changed between 3 different sizes.
The original Status Bar size is now called "Small".
The 2 new size names are "Medium" and "Large".
The default option is "Small".

To change Status Bar size

1. From the Menu bar select Window ► Status Bar Size ► Choose the desired
size.

The selected size will be saved in the layout.

9|
Ethernet Ascii Messages

9 Ethernet Ascii Messages

Vector series now supports receiving Ascii messages over ethernet (UDP) to
trigger Macros.
There is also an option to send an echo message back to the sender with the
same text and addition of " OK" at the end.
Allowed message format is "macroXXXX" where XXX can be a number from 1 to
9999.
Any other message will be ignored.

To enable receive of Ethernet Ascii Messages

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Setting.
2. Go to Network tab.

3. Enable Receive Ascii Data

4. Enter the IP and Port of the sender in order to make the Vector listen to it.
5. Click OK or Apply to apply the changes.

| 10
Vector Release Notes 4.0.R04

To enable echo sending

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Setting.
2. Go to Network tab.

3. Enable Send Echo

4. Enter the IP and Port of the machine you want the Vector to send echo to.
5. Click OK or Apply to apply the changes.

11 |
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 02/07/2017

Real time version: 4.02
Windows version: 4.02
RT interface version: 4.02
NOTE: This version does not support Single Core
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 4.R02

Copyright © 2017 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

|2
Vector Release Notes 4.R02

2 Version Highlights
Version 4.R02 brings a new and updated feature.

Feature / Improvement Description

System Settings

 Increased Ports Violet and Ultra Violet have been increased to

32 DMX universes

3|
Bug Fixes V4.R02

3 Bug Fixes V4.R02

 The Park function made the system freeze for a few seconds (Reported
first by Alessandro Soster)
 The color picker switched the values to Magenta and Yellow while
working on a CMYK color system (Reported first by Matthias Kern)
 The color picker did not remember the state of the "All Layers" or
"Selected Layer" from the previous entry (Reported by Ronen Ben
Harosh)
 The color picker was not synced with color parameter values of 16 bit
parameters.
 There was a problem on the wheels that could cause a movement of a
wrong parameter when using the "All Param Layers" flag.
 Disabling "All Param Layers" did not disable it if the parameter page was
not changed.
 Changing the bank did not reset the "All Param Layers" flag (Reported by
Ronen Ben Harosh)
 A new column has been added for "enabled" in the timeline spread sheet
(Reported by Jerry Romani)
 When the timeline had many frequent events, disabling/enabling/deleting
the lines did not work properly (Reported by Jerry Romani)
 Disable and Enable timeline events did not ask the user for confirmation,
possibly causing unwanted results.
 The timeline did not start from 0 after loading (Reported by Lorenzo
Pagella)
 Editor Flash (SHIFT-/SHIFT+) – fixtures did not go back to their previous
state (Reported by Andrew Stone)
 Editor Flash (SHIFT-/SHIFT+) – fixtures did not release the values while
releasing the shift button before the + or -.
 [GOTO, CUE, #, (TIME, #), HERE] – turned off the sequence of the
playback (Reported by Ronen Ben Harosh)
 When "Go For Multifade" is disabled, hitting [HOLD] and then [GO] would
not GO the playback (Reported by Ronen Ben Harosh)
 Changing the name of a Temp Cue did not store on the snap even if the
snap behavior was configured to save "On Any Change" (Reported by
Panteley Mishchenko)

|4
Vector Release Notes 4.R02

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS are
in BOLD CAPS.

The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen
BUTTONS are BOLD ITALICIZED CAPS.
Dialog boxes, Window titles and field names appear in this font.
Sequences appear like this; [SEQUENCE, SEQUENCE].

The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends on whether you are using
the mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

5|
Increased Ports

5 Increased Ports
The amount of DMX ports transmitted from the Violet and Ultra-Violet consoles
has been increased to 32.
All other consoles remained the same.
The following table provides details on increased ports for each console:

Protocol VC Art-Net Streaming ACN

E-Ports 0 1 2 3 4 8 0 1 2 3 4 8
Red-Blue-Green 32 32 32
Violet 32 32 32
Orange 16 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16
Node 32 32 32
PC 32 1 4 8 12 16 32 1 4 8 12 16 32

|6
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 18/01/2017

Real time version: 4.0
Windows version: 4.0
RT interface version: 4.0
NOTE: This version does not support Single core
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 4

Copyright © 2017 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents
1 Table of Contents ........................................................................... 2
2 Version Highlights .......................................................................... 3
3 Bug Fixes V4.0................................................................................ 4
4 Text Conventions............................................................................ 5
5 Group Softkeys Highlight ................................................................ 6
6 Fixtures Flash ................................................................................. 8
7 DMX Rate Range ............................................................................. 9
8 Color Picker Enhancement ............................................................ 10
9 Timeline Enhancements ................................................................ 11
Delete Line Of Events .............................................................................. 11
Disable Line Of Events ............................................................................. 12
Enable Line Of Events .............................................................................. 13
Add Time To All Events In A Line ............................................................... 13
Subtract Time From All Events In A Line .................................................... 14

10 All Param Layers Button ............................................................... 15

11 Active For Current Editor Only ...................................................... 16

|2
Vector Release Notes 4

2 Version Highlights
Version 4.0 brings a range of new and updated features.

Feature / Improvements Description

Display

 Group Softkeys HighlightError! Group SKs will now be highlighted according to

the fixture selection
Reference source not found.

Editing

 Fixtures Flash You can now flash Fixtures from the editor to
FL or ZR

 Color Picker Enhancement The Color Picker is now able to select a specific
layer of color or to control all layers of color
together

 Timeline Enhancements There are now 5 new Timeline features for

faster and easy editing.

 All Param Layers Button There is now an option to choose a parameter

and move all of its layers together

 Active For Current Editor Only It is now possible to select active fixtures not
just from all editors but from the current editor
only (also applies on the Blind editor)

System Settings

 DMX Rate Range Minimum DMX Rate can be now reduced to

15HZ

3|
Bug Fixes V4.0

3 Bug Fixes V4.0

 Overwriting a snap changes its label back to default (Reported by Bradly
Wagg).
 ACN protocol properties used the old method and did not work with some
devices (Reported by a few users).
 Wing 20 pages were not synced correctly on connection (Reported by a few
users).
 When selecting multiple parameters from different wheel pages and moving
them together (with @ and then wheel) then sometimes, when reaching the
ZR or FL the values are not synced (Reported by a few users).
 [Dim, #, Exam] caused significant delay (Reported by a few users).
 Double click on a row in Macro editing grid should allow you to change
functionality (Requested by a few users).
 On Qlist Exam view, if a value was entered to the wait time, then it got
divided by 100 (Reported by Ei Osawa).
 PC Wing was not synced correctly when loaded a snap that was saved on a
different page (Reported by a few users).
 Creating a Matrix out of a gif file caused wrong data in cues (Reported by
RSI).
 New stored Macro with no commands could not be edited from the Macro
Editing window (Reported by a few users).
 Master-Slave stability fixes
 Minor bug fixes
 E-Port 8 recognition to support opening more universes on the PC version.
 Performance enhancements

|4
Vector Release Notes 4

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS
are in BOLD CAPS.

 The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen
BUTTONS are BOLD ITALICIZED CAPS.
 Dialog boxes, Window titles and field names appear in this font.
 Sequences appear like this; [SEQUENCE, SEQUENCE].

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the
mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

5|
Group Softkeys Highlight

5 Group Softkeys Highlight

Group Softkeys are now highlighted according to the Fixture selection, same as
for libraries.
The Highlight can be one of 3 states:

Fully Highlighted
Means that the current fixture selection in the editor is fully included by the
fixtures in the group.
For example:
1. Group 1 has Channels 1-20, From the editor you press [CHANNEL, 1, ,
20] then the group will be fully highlighted.
2. Group 1 has Channels 1-20. From the editor you press [CHANNEL, 1, ,
10] then the group will be fully highlighted. This is because the fixture
selection is fully included in this group, although there are more fixtures
in the group but the notification is from the editor fixture selection point
of view.

Half Highlighted
Means that the current fixture selection in the editor is partially included by the
fixtures list in the group.
For example:
1. Group 1 has Channels 1-20. From the editor you press [CHANNEL, 1, ,
100] then the group will be half highlighted. This is because the group
fits to the selection but the selection have more fixtures that the group
doesn’t have.

|6
Vector Release Notes 4

Not Highlighted / Grayed out

Means that the current fixture selection in the editor is not included by the
fixtures in the group.
For example:
Group 1 has Channels 1-20. From the editor you press [CHANNEL, 21] then the
group will be grayed out. This is because none of the fixtures selected in the
editor exists in this group.

7|
Fixtures Flash

6 Fixtures Flash
Fixtures Flash is a feature to quickly flash selected fixtures to FL or ZR.
Sequences:
By using some selection and then pressing [SHIFT (HOLD DOWN), +/-], the
fixtures will go into the editor and their values will be FL/ZR, respectively. When
releasing the [SHIFT, +] the values will be kept in the editor but will go back to
their previous level.

|8
Vector Release Notes 4

7 DMX Rate Range

The previous DMX rate range for the Vector series was 20-40 Hz.
Some fixtures have a problem with higher DMX rates so they need the consoles
to transmit on lower DMX rate than 20 Hz.
Now the DMX transmitting rate range for the Vector series is 15-40 Hz.

To change the DMX Rate Range

1. From the Menu bar click on Tools ► Settings.

The System Settings dialog opens.

2. Click on the DMX Protocols tab:

3. Insert a value between 15 and 40 into the box:

9|
Color Picker Enhancement

8 Color Picker Enhancement

The Color Picker now supports multiple color layer fixtures.
The Color Picker can now pick whether to change the color to the selected layer
only or to set the color to all of the fixture's layers.
This is done via the new radio button from the Color Picker Popup.
When SELECTED LAYER is selected the color picker will apply the color only to
the Layer index that the picker was opened with.
When ALL LAYERS is selected, the Color Picker will apply the color to all of the
Fixture’s color layers.
Sequence:
Assume we have a fixture with 3 layers of color:

Now double click Red 2 parameter and the color picker window will pop. You will
be able to see the new section APPLY COLOR TO:

When ALL LAYERS is selected, the color picker will apply the color to all of the
Fixture’s layers. In this example, all 3 layers are affected.
When SELECTED LAYER is selected, the color picker will apply the color only to
the current Fixture’s layer. In this example, we opened the picker using “Red 2”
thus, the color will be applied to the fixture’s 2nd layer.

| 10
Vector Release Notes 4

9 Timeline Enhancements
Some new functions have been added to the Timeline editing window. These
functions are meant to give the user faster access to change/edit timeline
events.
The new functions give the ability to:
Delete a whole line of events – Instead of having to go event by event and
remove it manually, this function will delete all the events that are in the
selected line.
Disable\Enable a whole line of events – This feature will disable/enable all
the events in the selected line.
Add\Subtract offset time to\from a line of events – This function will
move all of the events of a certain PB. This allows you to fix timecode sync
problem. Instead of moving the events one by one.

The new buttons added to

the Timeline editing toolbar

Delete Line of Events

This function allows the user to delete a whole line of an event by highlighting
the line and then pressing the Delete Line button. This is done via the Timeline
graphic editor.

Highlight the line by touching

it and then press the Delete 11 |
Line button
Timeline Enhancements

Disable Line of Events

This function allows the user to Disable a whole line of an event by highlighting
the line and then pressing the Disable Line button. The disabled events will be
shown grayed out.

Highlight the line by touching

it and then press the Disable
Line button.

| 12
Vector Release Notes 4

Enable Line of Events

This function allows the user to Enable a whole line of an event by highlighting
the line and then pressing the Enable Line button.

Highlight the line by touching

it and then press the Disable
Line button.

Add Time to All Events in a Line

This function allows the user to add time to the whole line of events by
highlighting the line, filling the time offset and then pressing the Add Time to
Line button.

13 |
Timeline Enhancements

Subtract Time from All Events in a Line

This function allows the user to subtract time from the whole line of events by
highlighting the line, filling the time offset and then pressing the Subtract Time
to Line button.

| 14
Vector Release Notes 4

10 All Param Layers

All Param Layers is a new feature in the Editor Toolbar in states of fixture
selection or parameter manipulation.
This function is an "On the fly" function and cannot be stored as a system
setting.
Each Reset will clear this flag and will go back to the default behavior with this
function off.
This flag, when turned on is used to control multiple layers of color (or any
other parameter type that have more than one layer) simultaneously using only
one wheel.
Sequence:
Assume we have a fixture with 3 layers of color and we select it.
On the wheel display, under color bank we will have:

Now if we want to move all Reds at once we will turn on the flag in the editor
toolbar:

And then start moving the wheel of one of the Reds (i.e. Wheel 1, 2 or 3), now
all of the Red parameters values will change.
Note: It will behave the same if the settings flag "@ For Intensity Only" is
turned off when selecting all Reds and then hitting @ and turning a wheel. This
function is helpful when there are many layers or when the layers are not
organized on the same wheel layout.

15 |
Active for Current Editor Only

11 Active for Current Editor Only

Active function now has another source filter – Current Editor.
The previous [Active, Editor] has changed to [Active, All Editors]. This is a
function that used to take all active fixtures from all editors, excluding the Blind
editor. The behavior of the function was preserved.

The new function is [Active, Current Editor]. This function will select all active
fixtures from the current editor only. This function is also valid for Blind editor.

Note: All other filters keeping the same functionality.

| 16
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 24/06/2014

Real time version: 3.20R05
Windows version: 3.20R05
RT interface version: 3.20R05
NOTE: This version does not support Single Core
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

Copyright © 2014 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents
1 Table of Contents ........................................................................... 2
2 Version Highlights .......................................................................... 3
3 Bug Fixes V3.20R05........................................................................ 4
4 Text Conventions............................................................................ 6
5 Midi Notes Editor ............................................................................ 7
6 Store Options For Libraries ............................................................. 8
7 Editor Cell Source Notification ........................................................ 9
8 Shift + Group Deselect ................................................................. 10
9 Playback Wing 20 Text ................................................................. 11
10 Playback Wing 20 Paging ............................................................. 15
11 Load Layout On Load Show .......................................................... 17
12 Import Desktop In Load Partial Show ........................................... 19

|2
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

2 Version Highlights
Version 3.20R05 brings a range of new and updated features together with
many critical bug fixes.
Note: from this version, devices will not be a part of the installation. You can
download the device package from our website.

Feature / Improvements Description

Editing

 Midi Notes Editor You can now edit Midi notes commands.

 Store Options for Libraries You can now use "Red only" option for storing a
library.

Playback

 Editor Cell Source Notification You can now see in the live display which editor
is controlling a certain cell.

 Shift + Group Deselect Shift + Group Deselect will do Group Select and
the other way around.

 Playback Wing 20 Text Playback Wing 20 will now show the page
number.

 Playback Wing 20 Paging Playback Wing 20 will now page according to

the connected console.

Load\Save Show

 Load Layout on Load Show You can now load your layout when you load
your show.

 Import Desktop in Load Partial You can now load a desktop in the import
partial show menu.
Show

3|
Bug Fixes V3.20R05

3 Bug Fixes V3.20R05

 RT crash when using bank keys on effect. Reported by Isias Garcia (Spain)
and Moshiko Peer (Israel).
 Parameter wheels did not respond after pressing FL and then bank keys.
Reported by David Bishop (England).
 Faders matching issues on PC Wing when moving between pages. Reported
by Matthias Kern (Switzerland).
 Deletion of a parked fixture, remained its dimmer with the park. Reported by
David Bishop (England).
 Trackball was controlling the dimmer value of a moving light after pressing
the bank keys. Reported by Ronen Ben-Harosh (Israel).
 Look ahead did not work after loading a show that had "Main Master Qlist".
Reported by Christian Leisch (Austria).
 Using flash key when button set to "Flash To Black" still flashed the PB to FL.
Reported by Compulite team.
 ACN did not have a unique CID on the network. Reported by Ernst Taubinger
(Austria).
 External wing view was undefined and caused a crash on GC. Reported by
Opera Cracow (Poland).
 Shift + GO on playback did not work as it should. Reported by Compulite
team.
 Flash key hangs when pressed with Shift and released. Reported by Matthias
Schoffmann (Austria).
 Hand picker icon disappeared in some of the popups. Reported by Ronen
Ben-Harosh (Israel).
 Updating a temp cue when there was no Qlists on any playback caused a
mix in the values. Reported by Opera Cracow (Poland).
 Using "Group Deselect" on empty cue caused a crash on RT. Reported by
Opera Cracow (Poland).
 Load\Save show shortcuts from a Desktop did not work if the Desktop view
was not on the main window. Reported by Opera Cracow (Poland).
 Removing all columns from live wing display caused a crash on GC. Reported
by Opera Cracow (Poland).
 When both "All params for selected" and "Multi editors" were enabled then
the multi editors flag was discarded. Reported by Opera Cracow (Poland).

|4
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

 Show conversion from previous versions (Prior to 3.20.R03) caused a wrong

conversion to the DMX output settings. Reported by Opera Cracow (Poland).
 Saving a show on a network drive did not remember the destination location
after power up the console. Reported by Opera Cracow (Poland).

5|
Text Conventions

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS
are in BOLD CAPS.

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the
mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

|6
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

5 Midi Notes Editor

Midi notes commands can now be edited. You can edit both notes on and notes
off commands.

The Midi Notes Editor Toolbar

Midi notes are edited form the Midi notes window using the Midi notes editor
Toolbar:

Midi Notes Toolbar Options

The following is a description of each option on the Midi editing toolbar:

Option Description

Edit command.
This option activates Select Command mode. Use this option to edit a selected
note.

Delete command.
This option will clear a selected command.

How to Edit a Midi note

The following process will guide you through editing a Midi note.

To Edit a Midi note

1. Open the Midi notes window from the workspace tree under show.

7|
Midi Notes Editor

The Midi notes editing window opens.

Example:

2. From the Midi notes editing window select a row to edit.

The Midi notes editing toolbar options become active and the selected row
turns blue.

Example:

Active Midi notes editing options

Selected blue row

3. Edit a Midi note using the Midi notes editing toolbar options.
The selected row becomes green if Edit current Command option is selected.
This indicates that the System has entered Select Command mode.

Example of Select Command mode:

Green selected row

The Command line color also changes to green with the text [SELECT
COMMAND]:
Green Command line

|8
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

Note the following when Select Command mode is active:

 All Midi notes editing options will be disabled except the selected option.
Select the selected Midi notes editing option to exit the current mode.
 The Editor Toolbar will become active with all the existing system Toolbar
commands.
 Panel Keys, Soft Keys and Editor Toolbar options can be used to insert
commands.
 Each single input command will create a new entry.
4. After entering a command the System exits Select Command mode. The
selected row changes from green to blue.
5. Your note has been updated to the new command.

To Clear a Midi note entry

1. Repeat steps 1, 2 from the Edit Midi note procedure.
2. Once a note is selected, tap the Delete Command option to clear this entry.

9|
Store Options for Libraries

6 Store Options for Libraries

Store options can now be used when storing libraries. This includes the "Red
Cells Only" option. This can be done through the store library toolbar.

To Store "Red Cells Only" to a library

1. Create your desired editor picture.
2. Select the wanted parameters to store with the parameter selection keys.
3. Press [STORE, LIB].
4. On the Editor Toolbar select "Store Red Cells Only".

5. Select the destination Soft key library to store to.

| 10
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

7 Editor Cell Source Notification

By using this option, you can see what the editor source of a cell is in the live
display.

To enable this option

1. Select the live display that you want to see this information on.
2. Go to Format  PB Source and enable it.

3. After assigning values from editors you will see the cells editor source.

Note: If a cell is coming both from Editor and a PB then the Editor source
will be shown.
11 |
Shift + Group Deselect

8 Shift + Group Deselect

It is now possible to do multiple functions from the "Group Select" and "Group
Deselect" keys with the Shift key.
Using Group Select with Shift will do Group Deselect.
Using Group Deselect with Shift will do Group Select.

Terms
All written here about "Group Deselect" may also apply to "Group Select".

Use the Shift + Group Deselect

1. After assigning a Group Deselect option to a PB key press and hold
[SHIFT].
2. Press the PB key with the function Group Deselect.
3. The result is that it actually did Group Select.

Assigning Group Deselect to a Key

Assigning Group Deselect to a PB key or Q-Key is done from the PB Key
behavior list. The behavior list can be accessed by selecting a PB key or Q-Key
from the Settings ► Playback tab or the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist Properties.
The key text will change according to the function selected.
Group Deselect can be assigned only to a PB key on-the-fly from the Qlist
properties in which case the text GrpDsl will be displayed in the PB wing.
Assigning it from the System Settings will only apply to new assignments.

Group Deselect in the PB Keys Example of an assigned Example of GrpSel and

Behavior list PB Key GrpRel text in the PB wing

GrpDsl = Group Deselect

| 12
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

To assign Group Deselect from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.
2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

Select a PB key or
Q-Key to assign
Group Deselect.

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select Group Deselect.

The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click Apply to save the change.
13 |
Shift + Group Deselect

To assign Group Deselect from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.

2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB key to assign

Group Deselect.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

4. From the PB Key behaviour list select Group Deselect.

The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

| 14
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

9 Playback Wing 20 Text

An improvement to the Playback Wing 20 text has been made in this version to
make more sense and be clearer about the paging.

Text Rules
1. When Playback Wing 20 is connected to a 10-Fader console (i.e Vector Blue,
Vector Green, Vector Orange, Vector Node and Vector PC) the display will
show the text "PB #-#".
The numbers will indicate the pages of the console that the wing is showing
at this time. (i.e "PB 4-5" indicates that the Playback Wing 20 is now
showing pages 4 and 5 of the console that the wing is connected to).
2. When Playback Wing 20 is connected to a 20-Fader console (i.e Vector Red,
Vector Violet, Vector Ultra Violet) the display will show the text "PB #/1".
The number will indicate the page of the console that the wing is showing at
this time. (i.e "PB 2/1" indicates that the Playback Wing 20 is now showing
pages 2 of the console that the wing is connected to).

15 |
Playback Wing 20 Paging

10 Playback Wing 20 Paging

An improvement to the Playback Wing 20 Paging method has been made in this
version to make more sense and be clearer about the paging.

Paging Rules
1. When Playback Wing 20 is connected to a 10-Fader console (i.e Vector Blue,
Vector Green, Vector Orange, Vector Node, and Vector PC) then paging will
be in frames of 10. This means that paging up and down will move 10 faders
each time.
2. When Playback Wing 20 is connected to a 20-Fader console (i.e Vector Red,
Vector Violet, Vector Ultra Violet) then paging will be in frames of 20. This
means that paging up and down will move 20 faders each time exactly like
on the connected console.

| 16
Vector Release Notes 3.20R05

11 Load Layout on Load Show

A new option has been added to the load show popup. This option allows to load
the show's layout that was saved in the show in the same process of loading the
show itself.

To load a show layout together with the show

1. From the Menu bar select File ► Open Show…
2. Select the show you want to load.
3. Mark the option Load Show's Layout at the bottom.

4. Tap Open.
5. The show will load together with its layout.

17 |
Import Desktop in Load Partial Show

12 Import Desktop in Load Partial Show

From this version you can also import Desktops that were saved in other shows
into this show in the Import Partial Show menu.

To load a Desktop from another show

1. From the Menu bar select File ► Import\Export Shows ►Import Partial Show
2. Select the show you want to load the Desktop from.
3. Press Open.
4. In the partial show menu go to Editor Tools ► Desktop List.
5. Select the Desktops you want to load.
6. Press OK.

| 18
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 14/05/2013

Real time version: 3.20R04
Windows version: 3.20R04
RT interface version: 3.20R04
NOTE: This version does not support Single Core
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

Copyright © 2013 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents
1 Table of Contents ........................................................................... 2
2 Version Highlights .......................................................................... 3
3 Bug Fixes V3.20R04........................................................................ 4
4 Text Conventions............................................................................ 6
5 Select Range of Parameter Addresses............................................. 7
6 Spot key for Channel Wing ............................................................. 8
7 Toggle functions in Effect Engine .................................................... 9
8 Input patch to Q-Key .................................................................... 10
9 Group Deselect ............................................................................. 11
10 Choose Subnet for Artnet ............................................................. 15
11 Controlling Network from Editor Toolbar ...................................... 17
12 Japanese language support .......................................................... 19

|2
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

2 Version Highlights
Version 3.20R04 brings a range of new and updated features together with 17
new devices and 4 updated devices.

Feature / Improvements Description

Editing

 Select Range of Parameter You can now select DMX addresses for selected
parameters by using
Addresses
[FIXTURE, #, Parameter selection, DIM].

 Spot key for Channel Wing The key SPOT was added to the Channel Wing

 Toggle functions in Effect Engine On Violet consoles it is now available to toggle

between the wheels function with a press on
the wheel.

Playback

 Input patch to Q-Key Input patch to Q-Key is now available

 Group Deselect Fixtures can now be deselected by pressing on

an assigned PB key or Q-Key.

System Settings

 Choose Subnet for Artnet The option to select Subnet for Artnet protocol
is back with the choice whether to use it or not.

 Controlling Network from Editor Network settings can now be controlled from
the Editor Toolbar without the need to open the
Toolbar settings dialog.

 Japanese language support The Japanese language was added to the

language pack.

3|
Bug Fixes V3.20R04

3 Bug Fixes V3.20R04

 Reduced sync time for Master-Slave and Master-Node connections. Reported
by Steven Plotkin (Canada).
 Master-Slave and Master-Node reliability has been improved. Reported by
Steven Plotkin (Canada).
 "Editor Toolbar" and "Wheels Assignments" views could not be assigned with
BOLD font (Ronen Ben Harosh, Israel).
 Fixtures on TOPO did not update their text after [FIXTURE, #, TEXT] (Jerry
Roberto Romani, Italy).
 Loading a layout with TOPO from previous version caused CRASH (Norbert
Pobiegly, Poland).
 Loading a show from previous version with empty TOPO created TOPO
number 0.
 ACN & ArtNet indicators were not showing whether these protocols are ON
or OFF (Steven Plotkin, Canada).
 Playback keys definition list was bigger than screen (Ronen Ben Harosh,
Israel).
 Loading a show that was made prior to 3.20.R02 was enabling port #17 on
VCs (Steven Plotkin, Canada).
 Import TOPO in partial load was not possible (Steven Plotkin, Canada).
 Vector Violet did not transmit output after warm data unless applying a
change on settings (Brad Wagg, Canada and Jaime Marcos, Spain).
 Warm data did not load Matrix and TOPO if they were both in the same show
(Steven Plotkin, Canada).
 Master-Slave, editor values was fade off when Master disconnected (Andy
Stone, England).
 Master-Slave\Master-Node is not syncing in random cases. Sometimes it
does and sometimes it doesn’t (Steven Plotkin, Canada).
 Green Vector was outputting ArtNet only on port #1 (David Bishop,
England).
 European value input did not take effect on Channel Wing (Andy Stone,
England).
 When there was a connection of Master-Slave\Master-Node and a wing was
attached to the Slave or the Node and the wing was not on the same page
as the Slave or the Node then there was a delay on the wing (Steven
Plotkin, Canada).

|4
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

 Master-Slave\Master-Node was sometimes disconnecting during the transfer

of patch changes and this caused the data not to be transferred completely
(Brad Wagg, Canada).
 Master-Node was sometimes delaying fader movements when Master and
Node were not on the same page (Ronen Ben Harosh, Israel).
 Master-Slave\Master-Node were disconnecting after 10-15 minutes when not
touching the consoles (Filip Weisner, Czech Republic).
 Layout was not saved when closing the Vector PC from the "X" button.
Reported by Moshiko Peer (Israel).
 GC Crashed when added irrelevant headers to the Macro Editing view.
Reported by Tomer Shoshan (Israel).
 Wrong password on Protect showed a wrong message. Reported by Matthias
Schoffmann (Austria).
 If a range of fixtures with a gap were dragged into the TOPO then some of
them did not load. Reported by Tomer Shoshan (Israel).
 PARK did not save the right value when selecting the value from a picker.
Reported by Moshiko Peer (Israel).

5|
Text Conventions

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS
are in BOLD CAPS.

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the
mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

|6
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

5 Select Range of Parameter Addresses

By using the key DIM after a parameter selection, the addresses of the selected
parameters will be selected and shown on the echo line.

Example of selecting parameter addresses

Patched are 10 spots that have 5 parameters:
Dimmer, Pan, Tilt, Color wheel and Shutter (by this order).
In order to change these 10 fixtures' Shutter curve we will select the addresses
of the Shutter parameter and then proceed with the dimmer manipulation.
So the sequence [SPOT, 1  10, SHUTTER, DIM] will result in showing on the
echo line "DIMMER 5+10+15+20+25" and then we can proceed to changing the
curve.

7|
Spot key for Channel Wing

6 Spot key for Channel Wing

On the Channel Wing remote panel there was an empty key beside the
CHANNEL key. In order to be the same as on the consoles panels the SPOT
key was added to the same location as on a regular panel and it is now
supported via the Channel wing.

The new SPOT key

|8
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

7 Toggle functions in Effect Engine

Note: This feature is for Vector Violet only.
By using the encoder wheels press option it is possible to toggle between the
options in the effects engine.

Example
After opening the effect dialog we get this situation on the wheels:

By pressing the most left wheel for the first time we will get the Offset all
selected:

By pressing the most left wheel again we will get the Offset fan selected:

The second wheel will control the Size, the third will control the Rate and the
fourth will control the Duty Cycle.

9|
Input patch to Q-Key

8 Input patch to Q-Key

It is now possible to patch an input dimmer to a Q-Key under the same
conditions as the input patch for PB.

Terms
1. The input value will control the "Intensity limit" of the Q-Key.
2. When the input value is reaching 0, the behavior will be according to the
"Release on bottom" of this Q-Key.
3. When the input value is exiting the 0, the behavior will be according to the
"Intensity behavior" combo box (Intensity only, Go+Jump parameters,
Go+Fade parameters).

To patch Q-Key input

1. Press DIM.
2. Select the DMX address. A range can also be selected.
3. Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4. Press the Select key of the desired Q-Key.
5. Press STORE.

| 10
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

9 Group Deselect
Fixtures can now be deselected by pressing on an assigned PB key or Q-Key. A
key can be assigned as a Group Deselect key. Content can be deselected
whether the PB fader is active or not.
Group Deselect will deselect all content (Channels, Spots, etc.) on a cue or
temp cue.
In order to use Group Deselect; Cues, Temp cues etc. should be first created on
a PB or a Q-Key.

Example of Group Deselect

PB 1 is a Sub-master for Channels 15.
PB 2 is a Sub-master for Channels 610.

Both PBs middle key functions are Group Deselect.

Channels 110 are now selected:

11 |
Group Deselect

Now if we press the middle key of PB 1 then Channels 15 will be removed
from the selection:

Group deselect function

is assigned

Assigning Group Deselect to a Key

Group Deselect in the PB Keys Example of an assigned Example of GrpSel and

Behavior list PB Key GrpRel text in the PB wing

GrpDsl = Group Deselect

| 12
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

To assign Group Deselect from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.
2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

Select a PB key or
Q-Key to assign
Group Deselect.

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select Group Deselect.

The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click Apply to save the change.
13 |
Group Deselect

To assign Group Deselect from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.

2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB key to assign

Group Deselect.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

4. From the PB Key behaviour list select Group Deselect.

The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

| 14
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

10 Choose Subnet for Artnet

On the previous version the option to select a Subnet to the Artnet output has
been removed. According to requests from some users the option is back and
with it the option whether to use it or not.
On the previous version when selecting for example AN #3, the Vector
automatically translated the value into Subnet 0 and Universe 3 (universe 3 on
Artnet is actually 4 because Artnet count starts from 0), on the Artnet protocol
without the need to enter the subnet manually.
Same happened when user chose AN #18. The vector translated it to Subnet 1
and Universe 2, again without the user need to calculate.
Now there is a new button named "Use subnet". This button tells if to use the
user input of the subnet or auto calculate the subnet.
If this button is disabled then everything will work the same as in version
3.20.R03.
If this button is enabled then the Vector will add the subnet value to the auto-
calculated subnet number according to the selected universe.

Example for using subnet

Port 1 is configured to output Artnet on AN #0. This means that the Vector will
automatically understand that it should be transmitted to Subnet 0 and
Universe 0.

Option 1
If the option is enabled and the Subnet entered is 0 then there will be no
change since in the auto calculation the result was 0 and the number entered is
0 then 0+0=0.

Option 2
If the option is enabled and the Subnet entered is 1 then the output will go to
Subnet 1 and universe 0 since in the auto calculation the result for the subnet
was 0 but the entered value is 1 then 0+1=1.

15 |
Choose Subnet for Artnet

To Change the Use Subnet settings

1. From the Manu bar click on Tools ► Settings.

The System Settings dialog opens.

2. Click on the DMX Protocols tab:

3. Activate one of the Artnet universes:

The ArtNet and the Use Subnet buttons will now be clickable.
4. Change the Artnet and the Use Subnet to be enabled and write your desired
subnet value:

| 16
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

11 Controlling Network from Editor

Toolbar
A new "Network" Soft Key option has been added to the Setup Toolbar.
This is accessed by pressing the SETUP key on the actual panel.

By pressing the NETWORK soft key a new Network toolbar will be opened.
This toolbar is a reflection of the actual Network tab in the system settings
dialog. If an option is already ON then the color of the button will be orange.

Tip! You can create a Macro to trigger the options in the NETWORK
toolbar.

The NETWORK new buttons

The following is a list of the new NETWORK buttons with their functions:

Button Settings button Function

Slave of # Slave Toggles the option of Slave. The
Master console ID is the number written
in the button. This number can be
changed only via the System settings
dialog in the "Master Console ID" field.

Node of # Node Toggles the option of Node. The Master

console ID is the number written in the
button. This number can be changed
only via the System settings dialog in
the "Master Console ID" field.

Remote Apps Remote Control Application's Toggles the option of Remote apps.

17 |
Controlling Network from Editor Toolbar

Using the Network Toolbar

1. Press SETUP.
2. Tap the NETWORK soft key on the Editor Toolbar.
3. Toggle the desired option. For example tap on the Remote Apps soft key.
4. Press STORE.
Your change is saved if the echo line is showing "Assigned".

| 18
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

12 Japanese language support

In addition to the supported languages: German, Spanish, Hebrew and Chinese,
the Japanese language was added to the Vector language support.
Language changes will be applied to the Menu bar, drop down menus, dialogs,
title bars and warning messages.

Japanese language installation

A Japanese language patch needs to be installed in order to view Japanese on
the Vector console. The Patch can be found in a folder called “Japanese” located
in the Updates folder in the Compulite program files.

To install Japanese language patch

1. Navigate to the Updates ► Japanese folder:
Vector Console–D:\Program files\Compulite Vector\Config\Updates\Japanese
Vector PC – C:\Program files\Compulite\Vector PC\Config\Updates\Japanese
2. Click on the Japanese Folder
3. Double click on the file JAPANRC.BAT.
4. A Black Screen will pop up for a second. Once the screen will disappear it
means that the installation was completed.
5. Once the Japanese language patch has been installed, navigate to Regional
and Language Options in the Control Panel. See Changing Language
6. From the Advanced tab click in the drop down language menu and change
the language to Japanese.
7. Reboot the system
8. After Rebooting the System, start the Vector Software and Select Japanese
language; Help ► Languages ► Japanese.

Changing Language
The Windows OS language needs to be changed first in order for the console to
display a selected language other than English. Windows language is changed
from the Control Panel.

To change Windows language

1. From the Windows Start menu select Control Panel.
2. From the Control Panel double click on Regional and Language Options.

19 |
Japanese language support

The Regional and Language Options dialog opens:

3. Select the Advanced tab and then click on the language drop down menu
under Language for non-Unicode programs.

4. From the drop down menu select the required language.

5. Click Apply.
6. If a warning message appears click Yes or OK.
7. Click Yes to restart your computer.

| 20
Vector Release Notes 3.20R04

To change vector language

1. From the Vector menu bar click on Help ► Language.

2. Select the desired language.

3. Note the following:

 If you are changing the language on a Vector PC you will be prompted
with a warning message and required to restart Vector.

Click OK to verify the language change. Vector will shut down.

 If you are changing the language on a Vector console you will not be
prompted with a warning message and Vector will automatically shut
down.
 In both the above cases, Vector will need to be started
manually after shutdown.

21 |
Japanese language support

Troubleshooting Language Change

If you have changed the Language on Vector and now have question marks
(???) in place of text, it means that the required language has not been
selected in the Regional and Language Options in the Windows Control Panel.
See: Changing Language

| 22
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 3/02/2013

Real time version: 3.20R03
Windows version: 3.20R03
RT interface version: 3.20R03
NOTE: This version does not support Single Cole
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Copyright © 2013 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

7 Shift Selection .............................................................................. 14

Examples of Using [SHIFT+NEXT] ............................................................. 14
Example 1 ....................................................................................... 14
Example 2 ....................................................................................... 14
Examples of Using [SHIFT+PREV] ............................................................. 15
Example 1 ....................................................................................... 15
Example 2 ....................................................................................... 15

8 Change Beat Key to Next Key ....................................................... 16

9 Delete External Parameters Patch ................................................ 17
10 DMX Protocols Enhancements....................................................... 19
Limitations............................................................................................. 20

11 PB Live View Enhancements ......................................................... 23

12 New Parameter Fade Profiles ....................................................... 26
The New Fade Profile Options in Vector ...................................................... 26
The New Fade Profile Options in Device Builder ........................................... 26
The New Fade Profile Descriptions ............................................................. 26

13 Topo Feature Improvements ........................................................ 27

Adding, Editing and Deleting a Topo .......................................................... 28

14 Topo Enhancements ..................................................................... 34

Using the New Topo Layers Toolbar ........................................................... 35
The Topo Layers Toolbar Options ........................................................ 35
How to Display the Topo Layers Toolbar ............................................... 36
Adding Objects to a User Defined Layer ..................................................... 37
Aligning Objects ..................................................................................... 38
How to Align Objects ......................................................................... 39
New Topo Fixture Images ........................................................................ 41

15 Pandora’s Box Integration ............................................................ 43

Getting Started with Pandora’s Box and Vector ........................................... 43
How to Sync Vector to Pandora’s Box......................................................... 50

|2
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

16 Block Cue Enhancement ............................................................... 52

17 Macro Editing ............................................................................... 54
The Macro Editing Toolbar ........................................................................ 54
Macro Editing Toolbar Options ............................................................ 54
How to Edit a Macro Offline ...................................................................... 55
How to Create a New Macro Offline ........................................................... 57
How to Create a Macro from an Existing Macro ............................................ 59
Macro Time Editing ................................................................................. 60

3|
Version Highlights

2 Version Highlights
Version 3.20R03 brings a range of new and updated features together with 49
new devices and 14 updated devices.

Feature / Improvements Description

Display

 PB Live View Enhancements The Fader/Level can now be separated into two
fields.

 Block Cue Enhancement A new option called Block Cue Indication has
been added which enables you to easily view
blocked cues in the Cue sheet.

Editing

 Toggle Bank Keys Layout You can now toggle the layout between the
wheel bank group of keys and the group of
keys under the Dimmer Wheel.

 Shift Selection Selected fixtures can be shifted forwards or

backwards by using [SHIFT+NEXT or PREV].

 Change Beat Key to Next Key The BEAT key can now be used to function as
the NEXT key.

 Delete External Parameters Patch An external parameter patch can now be

deleted separately from a Fixtures Patch.

 New Parameter Fade Profiles 3 new parameter fade profiles were added to
profile options on the Editor Tool bar in Vector.

 Topo Feature Improvements More than one Topo can now be created.

 Topo Enhancements 6 new enhancements were added to Topo.

 Macro Editing Previously recorded Macros can now be edited

and new macros can be created offline.

Playback

 Freeze All Freeze All is a new playback control feature

that enables you to instantly freeze running
effects or chasers on a fader.

System Settings

 DMX Protocols Enhancements You are now able to define which Ethernet
Protocol Port Address you want to send a
Universe Port to.

|4
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Pandora’s Box Integration

Vector is now fully compatible with Coolux Pandora Box media server.
See: Pandora’s Box Integration

5|
Bug Fixes V3.20R03

3 Bug Fixes V3.20R03

 A show layout that was saved with soft keys on a certain page did not load
correctly. Reported by Greg Shipley (US).
 An external parameter patch from the Patch Manager was not stored.
Reported by Orit Freedman (Holland/Netherlands).
 There was a delay on the live view when Active on Stage was activated.
Reported by Steven Plotkin (US), Pawel Jarzabek (Poland) and Alon Cohen
(Israel).
 Interactive selection was incorrect when Active on Stage was activated.
Reported by Pawel Jarzabek (Poland).
 Changing from Slave to Node and vice versa caused syncing errors.
 When not downloading thumbs the File/Folder picker did not open. Reported
by Norbert Pobiegly (Poland).
 Import device caused a warning message in some languages. Reported by
Isias Garcia (Spain).
 Starting a New Show caused a blank message pop up in some languages.
Reported by Ernst Taubinger (Austria).
 The View Properties dialog was incomplete in some languages. Reported by
Matthias Schoffmann (Austria).
 Removing and re-attaching fixtures to stage elements in TOPO caused a
crash.
 Virtual dimmer did not affect all color layers if there was more than 1 layer.
Reported by Alon Cohen (Israel).
 Fixture text did not work in Enter mode. Reported by Steven Plotkin (US).
 All sub master values dropped to zero during Patch changes. Reported by
Tomer Shushan (Israel).
 The Shift button on the PC Wing did not affect the Macro button LED’s.
Reported by Moshiko Peer (Israel).
 An absolute dimmer value above 512 could not be entered. Reported by
Meirson (Israel).
 Re-selection did not work after Storing/Updating records. Reported by Ronen
Ben Harosh (Israel).
 User Defined dimmer curves did not load correctly from warm data.
Reported by Gerhard Fiener (Germany).
 The Grand Master LED had syncing problems with the PC Wing. Reported by
Matthias Schoffmann (Austria).

|6
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

 Deleting a link between cues caused a system delay. Reported by Alon

Cohen (Israel).
 Qkey mode on the Master node between 2 Violets did not separate the
playbacks. Reported by Tomer Shushan (Israel).
 Fade out cue faded in cut time when first using the X-Fader. Reported by
Pawel Jarzabek (Poland).
 A Block cue recorded all values on all patched fixtures. Reported by Matthias
kern (Switzerland).
 Fade profiles was not applied to all system times, such as; Editor Fade in
time, Editor Fade out time, Library time etc. Reported Shay Bonder (Israel).
 Next/Prev did not function after storing a group. Reported by Matthias
Scoffmann (Austria).
 Reset rate did not move the fader to its actual position if the fader behavior
was Rate Master. Reported by Matthias Schoffmann (Austria).
 Look ahead did not function correctly when the dimmer level was set at 1%.
Reported by Pawel Jarzabek (Poland).
 The Flash button of joined playbacks did not work correctly after the system
was booted from warm data. Reported by Ei Osawa (Japan).
 The Editor Toolbar did not show data of more than 1 row.

7|
Text Conventions

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS
are in BOLD CAPS.

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the
mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

|8
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

5 Toggle Bank Keys Layout

Note: This feature is for Vector Violet only.
By using the RT window you can now toggle the layout between the wheel bank
group of keys and the group of keys under the Dimmer Wheel. Once you have
toggled the layout, the wheel bank group of keys will replace the bottom group
and visa-versa:

The wheel bank group of keys can be

toggled with the bottom group keys and
visa-versa.

To toggle layout

1. From the Windows Task bar double click on the RT icon :

The Vector RT window opens:

9|
Toggle Bank Keys Layout

2. From the RT window click on the Toggle Layout button:

Confirmation of the layout change can be seen by an LED change of the

active key on the console. Example; the INTENSITY LED will now move to
the LOLIGHT/HILIGHT key –OR- if the POSITION key is active, the LED
will move to the FAN key etc.

| 10
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

6 Freeze All
Freeze All is a new playback control feature that enables you to instantly freeze
running effects or chasers on a fader. Freeze All can be assigned to either a PB
key or Q-key.
Note: Freeze All only works with effects and chasers.

Assigning Freeze All to a Key

Assigning Freeze All to a PB key or Q-Key is done by selecting the option from
the PB Keys Behavior list. The behavior list is accessed by selecting a PB key
from the Settings ► Playback tab or the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist properties.
The PB key text will change to Freeze All once assigned.
Freeze All can be assigned on-the-fly only via the Qlist properties, in which case
the text FrzAll will appear in the PB wing view. Assigning Freeze All via the
System Settings will only be applied to new assignments.

Freeze All in the PB Keys Example of a PB Example of FrzAll text on

Behavior list Key assigned to the PB wing
Freeze All

11 |
Freeze All

To assign Freeze All from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the DEFAULT PB DEFINITIONS option to activate the PB key options:

The PB key options become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Freeze All:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key to

assign Freeze All.

4. From the PB keys behavior list select Freeze All.

Freeze All is now assigned and the selected key option text changes to Freeze
All.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

| 12
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To assign Freeze All from the Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].

The Qlist Properties dialog opens.

2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key to assign

Freeze All.

3. Select a playback key to assign Freeze All.

4. From the Playback key behavior list select Freeze All.
Freeze All is now assigned and the selected key option text changes to Freeze
All.
5. Click OK to apply the change and close the Qlist Properties dialog.

13 |
Shift Selection

7 Shift Selection
By using [SHIFT+NEXT or PREV], selected fixtures can be shifted forwards or
backwards according to the selection sequence.

Examples of Using [SHIFT+NEXT]

Example 1
If Channels 1 ►3 are selected:

By using [SHIFT+NEXT] will move the selection forward to Channels 4 ►6:

Example 2
If Channels 1, 3 and 5 are selected:

By using [SHIFT+NEXT] will move the selection forward to Channels 2, 4 and 6:

| 14
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Examples of Using [SHIFT+PREV]

Example 1
If Channels 8, 9 and 10 are selected:

By using [SHIFT+PREV], the selection will move backwards to Channels 5, 6 and

Example 2
If Channels 5, 7 and 9 are selected:

By using [SHIFT+PREV], the selection will move backwards to Channels 4, 6 and

15 |
Change Beat Key to Next Key

8 Change Beat Key to Next Key

The BEAT key can now be used to function as the NEXT key.
By using a simple 4 digit code, you can change the BEAT key to function in the
exact same way as the NEXT key.

This option is available on all Vector consoles.

To Change BEAT Key to NEXT Key

1. On the console press and hold SHIFT.
2. While holding down SHIFT, key in the numbers 1111.
3. Release the SHIFT key and press ENTER.

To Change Back to BEAT Key

Repeat the sequence above to revert back to the BEAT key.

| 16
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

9 Delete External Parameters Patch

An external parameter patch can now be deleted separately from a Fixtures
Patch by using the External Parameter soft key from the editor toolbar.

Before deleting external patch:

External parameter patch

After deleting external patch:

External parameter patch

deleted

To Delete External Patch

1. Select Fixture and Fixture number.
[CHANNEL / SPOT, #]
2. Press [DIM].

3. From the Editor Toolbar select the External Parameter soft key:

The Command line displays the text “External Parameter”

4. Press [DELETE].

The Clear Dimmer Patch dialog box appears:

17 |
Delete External Parameters Patch

5. Select Delete to clear the patch.

After the Patch is deleted the Command line displays the text “Released”:

ATTENTION! There is NO UNDO for External Patch delete.

| 18
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

10 DMX Protocols Enhancements

You are now able to define which Ethernet Protocol Port Address you want to
send a Universe Port to. Each Ethernet Protocol now has a drop down menu for
easy selection. An Auto Config and Clear All button has been added to each
Ethernet Protocol.
Auto Config will automatically configure an Ethernet Protocol range according to
the Max number of ports available.
Clear All will clear an Ethernet Protocol range to None.

Universe Ports

Ethernet Protocols

Drop down menu with

Ethernet Protocol Port
Addresses

New Auto Config and

Clear All buttons

19 |
DMX Protocols Enhancements

Limitations
The following limitations exist when using the DMX Protocol enhancements:
 Two Universe Ports cannot be sent to the same Ethernet Protocol Port
Address. Doing so will produce an error message.
For example: Universe Port 1 and 2 are both being sent to VC#1.

Port 1 and 2 are sent to

VC1

Once the settings have been applied the following error message will
appear:

 The maximum number of Universe Ports that can be sent to Art-Net and/or
ACN depends on the Max Universe Ports number. Any Universe Port can be
used as long as it in the Max ports range.
The Max Universe Port number is located on the bottom right hand side of
the DMX Protocol dialog:

If the number of Universe Ports used exceeds the Max Universe Port
number, an error message will appear:

| 20
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Example:
Your Max Universe Ports is 1, with Universe Port 1 being sent to Art-Net
Ethernet Protocol Port 1 and ACN Ethernet Protocol Port 2:

Max Universe Ports is 1.

Universe Port 1 is being

sent to AN#1 and ACN#2

If you try and send another Universe Port to another Ethernet Protocol Port;
For example, Universe Port 2 to Art-Net AN#1 an error message will
immediately be displayed:

21 |
DMX Protocols Enhancements

To Define an Ethernet Protocol to a Universe Port

1. From the Menu bar click on Tools ► Settings.

The System Settings dialog opens.

2. Click on the DMX Protocols tab:

3. Select an Ethernet Protocol according to the Universe Port that is being

used. From the drop down menu select the Ethernet Protocol Port address:

4. Activate the Ethernet Protocol that has been selected in the step above by
clicking on the correct DMX-On-Ethernet button:

5. Click Apply then click OK.

| 22
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

11 PB Live View Enhancements

The Fader/Level field on the PB live view can now be separated into two fields;
Fader Level and Fader Behavior:
 Fader Level displays the fader level output in percentage.
 Fader Behavior displays the behavior of the fader as set in Playback
Definitions, for example; Intensity Master, Rate Master Etc.
Separating the fields is done in the Grid Properties dialog via View Properties.

Fader/Level Combined Fader/Level Fields Separated

To Separate Fader/Level Fields

1. Click on the View Properties icon on the grid view title bar:

-OR-
Right click and select View Properties.

-OR-
From the Menu bar click View and select View Properties.

The Grid Properties dialog appears:

23 |
PB Live View Enhancements

2. From the Grid Properties dialog select Fader/Level from the right hand side
fields box and click Remove:

Fader/Level is now moved to the Available fields’ box on the left hand side.
3. From the Available fields box click on either Fader Level or Fader Behavior and
click Add:

| 24
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

The added field now shows in the right hand side field’s box:

4. Click Apply then click OK to close the Grid Properties dialog.

25 |
New Parameter Fade Profiles

12 New Parameter Fade Profiles

3 new parameter fade profiles were added to Profile Options on the Editor Tool
bar in Vector. The new fade profiles can also be applied via device builder.

The New Fade Profile Options in Vector

The following are the new fade profile option buttons:

The New Fade Profile Options in Device Builder

The following are the new fade profile options in the Profile drop down menu in
Device Builder:

The New Fade Profile Descriptions

The following are the 3 new fade profiles graphs and there descriptions:

Profile What happens on the fade

Smooth Start On go, the parameter will fade slowly and end linear.

Smooth End On go, the parameter will start linear and fade slowly.

Smooth On go, the parameter will start slowly to linear and fade slowly

| 26
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

13 Topo Feature Improvements

More than one Topo can now be created. Topo’s are created in the Patch
Manager using the Create icon located on the Patch Tool bar.

Create icon on the

Patch Tool bar.

All created Topo’s will now be visible in the Workspace Tree under the heading
Topo List and the Patch Topo List window:

Patch Topo List

window
Workspace Tree
Topo List

NOTE THE FOLLOWING:

The Topo Tab from the System Settings dialog has been removed. This is due to
the fact that more than one Topo can be now created. Each time a Topo is
added from the Patch Manager, you will be presented with an Add Topo dialog.

The Add Topo dialog enables you to add the following Topo information:
 Topo Data; Topo Name and any Topo notes.
 Stage Measurement Data
 Fixture Display Set Type

27 |
Topo Feature Improvements

Adding, Editing and Deleting a Topo

The following section describes how to add, view, edit, rename and delete a
Topo.

To Add a Topo
1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

The Patch Manager window opens.

2. From the Workspace Tree in the Patch Manager scroll down and select Topo
List:

3. From the Patch Tool bar select the Create icon:

The Add Topo dialog opens:

| 28
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

4. Enter a Topo name into the Name field and add any notes if needed:

5. Enter Stage Measurements and Fixture Display data:

6. Click OK to apply the new Topo.

The new Topo now appears under the Topo List in the Workspace Tree and the
Patch Topo List window:

7. Repeat the steps to add another Topo to the list.

29 |
Topo Feature Improvements

To View a Topo
1. From Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. From the Workspace Tree and under Topo List click on the Topo name to view
the Topo:

To Edit a Topo
1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. From the Workspace Tree select Topo List:

3. From the Patch Topo List window, place the mouse over the Topo to edit,
Right click and select Properties.

-OR-
Select the Properties icon on the Patch Tool bar:

-OR-
From the Workspace Tree select the Topo to edit, then from the Topo title bar
select the View Properties icon:

| 30
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

The Add Topo dialog opens:

4. Edit the Topo as desired and then click OK.

To Rename a Topo
1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. From the Workspace Tree select Topo List:

3. From the Patch Topo List window double click on the name field to rename a
Topo:

-OR-
31 |
Topo Feature Improvements

Place the mouse over the Topo to rename, right click and select Properties:

-OR-
Select the Properties icon on the Patch Tool bar:

The Add Topo dialog opens.

In the Name field enter the new Topo name then click OK.

After renaming, the Topo name appears in the Patch Topo List window under
the Topo List in the Workspace Tree.

| 32
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To Delete a Topo
1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. From the Workspace Tree Select Topo List:

3. Place the mouse over the Topo to delete, right click and select Delete:

33 |
Topo Enhancements

14 Topo Enhancements
The following Topo enhancements were added:
 A Zoom slider was added to the Live Topo List title bar:

 New Layers Tool bar:

See: Using the New Topo Layers Toolbar

 Objects can be added to a User Defined Layer, locked, displayed or hidden.
See: Adding Objects to a User Defined Layer
 Objects can now be aligned using the Aligned icons available on the Topo
Tool bar or by Right clicking and selecting an Align option.

See: Aligning Objects

 Multiple objects can be selected using the Ctrl key on the Keyboard.
 A new range of Fixture icon images:

See: New Topo Fixture Images

| 34
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Using the New Topo Layers Toolbar

The new Topo layers tool bar enables you to do the following:
 Lock, display or hide objects
 Add objects to User Defined Layers
A Layers Toolbar button will only become active once a relevant object is added
to the Topo.

Topo Layers Toolbar:

Stage Spots Matrix User Defined Layers with Lock Layers Show / Hide
Elements Layer Layer objects
Layer Media
Channels Server
Layer Layer

The Topo Layers Toolbar Options

The following is an explanation of the Topo Layers Toolbar options:

Toolbar Option What it does…

This option will show or hide stage elements in the Topo window.

This option will show or hide Channel objects in the Topo window.

This option will show or hide Spot objects in the Topo window.

This option will show or hide Matrix objects in the Topo window.

This option will show or hide Media Server objects in the Topo window.

These are User Defined Layers. When a layer is locked you will not be
able to select or manipulate the objects.

This option will show or hide all objects that are not defined in a layer.

35 |
Topo Enhancements

How to Display the Topo Layers Toolbar

The Topo Layers Toolbar can be displayed from the Topo live view and from the
Patch Manager.

To Display Topo Layers Toolbar from Topo Live View

1. From the Workspace Tree select a Topo.
2. From the Topo List title bar click on the Layers Toolbar icon to display the
Topo Layers Toolbar.

To Display Topo Layers Toolbar from Patch Manager

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. From the Workspace Tree select a Topo.

3. From the Topo List title bar click on the Layers Toolbar icon to display the
Topo Layers Toolbar:

| 36
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

Adding Objects to a User Defined Layer

There are 5 User Defined Layers. Any object can be added to a layer.

To Add Objects to a User Defined Layer

1. Select the objects to add.
2. Right click.
3. From the User Defined Layers list select a layer from 1-5:

The corresponding User Defined Layer button on the Layers Toolbar will
become active:

To Hide Objects in a Layer

 Click on the active User Defined Layer button number:

To Lock Objects in a Layer

 Click on the Lock button:

37 |
Topo Enhancements

To Remove Objects from a User Defined Layer

1. Make sure the layer is unlocked.
2. Select the objects to remove.
3. Right click and from the User Defined Layers list select Layers None:

Aligning Objects
Objects in the Topo window can be aligned by using the Align icons on the Topo
Toolbar or by Right clicking the Mouse and selecting an Align option.

The Topo Toolbar Align Icons:

Left Right Top Bottom

Right Click Align Options:
Align Align Align Align

Right click mouse Align

options

| 38
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

How to Align Objects

The Align options become active once 2 or more objects are selected. The
selected objects will be aligned to the last selected object which is identified by
a blue border.
White border of selected objects

Blue border indicates the last

selected object

To Align an Object
Method 1
1. Press and hold Ctrl on the Keyboard then Left click the Mouse and select the
objects.
The Align options become active and the selected objects will be contained
within a white border, with the last selected object surrounded by a blue
border.

Example image:

White border of selected

objects

Last selected object with blue

border

2. Select an Align option from either the Topo Toolbar or Right click the Mouse
and select an Align option.
The selected objects will be aligned to the object with the blue border.

39 |
Topo Enhancements

Method 2
1. Select the objects, excluding the object you want to align with, by drawing
a box around the objects using Left mouse click hold.
The selected objects will be contained within a white border.

Example image:

Selected objects excluding

the align with object

The Align with object outside

the selected objects

2. Press and hold Ctrl on the Keyboard then Left click the Mouse and select the
object to align with. This object must be outside of the selected objects.
The Align with object becomes part of the selected objects with a blue
border.

Example image:
Selected objects including the
Align with object

3. Select an Align option from either the Topo Toolbar or Right click the Mouse
and select an align option.
The selected objects will be aligned to the object with the blue border.

| 40
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

New Topo Fixture Images

A new range of Topo Fixture icon images have been added. There are now a
total of 13 images which can be selected via Stage Fixture Properties.
Topo Fixture images can only be changed from the Patch Manager.

The following is a list of all the available Fixture icon images and their
meanings:

Icon Meaning

Bar

Blinder

Fresnel

Laser

Media Server

41 |
Topo Enhancements

Panorama

Moving Head

Par LED

Par

Scanner

Profile

Smoke

Wash

To Change Topo Fixture Icons

1. Select a Fixture from the Patch Manager Topo List.
2. Right click and select Change Icon.

The Select Topo Image dialog opens.

3. Select a Topo image.
-OR-
1. Select a Fixture from the Patch Manager Topo List.
2. Right click and select Properties.
3. From the Stage Fixture Properties dialog select the browse icon:

| 42
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

15 Pandora’s Box Integration

Vector is now fully compatible with Coolux Pandora Box media server. Vector
controls the Pandora Box media server using the VC Ethernet Protocol. New
Pandora Box server devices have also been added in this release.
Media server Thumbnails are downloaded in real time on Vector which are
viewed via the Media Server tab.
NOTE: Pandora Box must have the same Subnet Mask IP as the Vector console.

Thumbnails from Pandora’s Box as Viewed in Vector

Pandora Box media server thumbnails viewed in

Vector on the Media Server tab.

Getting Started with Pandora’s Box and Vector

The following section describes how to do the following:
 How to Start and Save a new project in Pandora’s box
 How to Select device types
 How to add the Compulite tab
 How to enable Compulite VC Input
 How to add files to a Pandora’s Box project

43 |
Pandora’s Box Integration

To Start and Save a New Project in Pandora’s Box

1. Start Pandora’s Box.
2. From the Menu bar click File ► New Project and select either Standard or
Lighting Console:

The Save As dialog opens.

3. Enter a project name in the Save As File name field:

4. Click Save.

| 44
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To Select Device Types in Pandora’s Box

1. From Pandora’s Box main screen click on the Device Types tab:

2. From the Device Types tab double click on either the Pandora’s Box PLAYER
file or the Pandora’s Box SERVER file:

The selected file list appears:

45 |
Pandora’s Box Integration

3. From the selected file device list select any device and drag it down to the
Devices tab:

Drag a device down to the Devices

tab.

| 46
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To Add the Compulite Tab

1. From the Pandora’s Box menu bar click Tabs ► Extensions ► Compulite:

The Compulite tab appears on the lower left hand corner:

47 |
Pandora’s Box Integration

To Enable Compulite VC Input in Pandora’s Box

1. From the Compulite tab click on the Enabled button under the heading VC
Input:

2. Click on the Listen to Console drop down list and select the Vector IP of the
console that will be controlling Pandora’s Box:

To Add Files to a Project

1. Click on the Assets tab located in the middle window:

2. Double click on the local IP.

| 48
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

The local IP file list appears:

3. From the local IP file list locate the files you want in the project and drag
and drop them to the Project folder:

Drag and Drop files to the

Project folder.

49 |
Pandora’s Box Integration

How to Sync Vector to Pandora’s Box

The following procedure will guide you through the process of syncing Vector to
Pandora’s Box.
Please make sure that Pandora Box is installed on a separate PC.

To Patch a Coolux Device in Vector

1. From the Vector menu bar select Tools ► Patch Manager.

The Patch Manager window opens.

2. From the Patch Manager tool bar click on the Create and Patch icon:

The Create and Patch Fixtures dialog opens.

3. In the Name field of the Create and Patch Fixtures dialog enter the name of the
PC or IP of the System that contains Pandora’s Box:

4. Click on Import Device.

The Import Device list dialog opens.

| 50
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

5. Scroll down the device list and click on Coolux:

6. From the Coolux device list select a device according to the following:
NOTE: Only V5 devices should be selected.
If you created a Standard Pandora Box project then select any PB V5
device with the ending “Standard”.
If you created a Lighting Console Pandora Box project then select any PB
V5 device with the ending “Lighting”.
See Getting Started with Pandora’s Box and Vector
7. Apply the device to the Patch.
8. Enable VC from the System Settings► DMX Protocols tab.

9. Activate the Media Server by using the following sequence:

[Media Server, #]
10. From the Editor Tool bar tap on the Download Thumbs soft key. Use the arrow
keys to scroll left or right if the Download Thumbs soft key is not visible.

51 |
Block Cue Enhancement

16 Block Cue Enhancement

A new option has been added to the Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab called Block
Cue Indications, which enables you to easily view Blocked cues in the Cue Sheet
window.
Once Block Cue Indication is activated, the blocked cue will change to an orange
color. Block Cue Indications can be activated on-the-fly.
By default the Block Cue Indications setting is off unless the setting has been
changed and saved as default.

New Block Cue

Indications option

Orange color
indicates a Block
cue.

| 52
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To Activate Block Cue Indications

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. From the Playback tab and under Block Cue Options select Block Cue Indications:

3. Click Apply then click OK to close the System Settings dialog.

53 |
Macro Editing

17 Macro Editing
Previously recorded Macros can now be edited and new Macros can be created
offline.

The Macro Editing Toolbar

Macros are edited from the Macro editing window using the Macro editing
toolbar:

Macro Editing Toolbar Options

The following is a description of each option on the Macro editing toolbar:

Option Description

Add command before selected command.

This option activates Select Command mode. Use this option to insert a new
Macro command before the selected command.

Add command after selected command.

This option activates Select Command mode. Use this option to insert a new
Macro command after the selected command.

Edit command.
This option activates Select Command mode. Use this option to edit a selected
command.

Delete command.
This option will delete a selected command.

Rename Macro.
Use this option to rename a Macro.

Save Macro.
Use this option to save changes.

Discard changes.
This option will discard any changes that have been made.
Note: This option will not discard any changes to the Macro name.

| 54
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

How to Edit a Macro Offline

The following process will guide you through editing a Macro offline.

To Edit a Macro Offline

1. Select the Macro to edit by using one of the following methods:
 [MACRO,#,EXAM]
 [MACRO,EXAM] then double click on the Macro number from the Macro list.
 Select the Macro from the Workspace Tree.

Either way opens the Macro Exam window:

2. From the Macro Exam window click on the Edit Current Macro icon :

The Macro editing window opens.

Example:

3. From the Macro editing window select a row to edit.

The Macro editing toolbar options become active and the selected row blue.

Example:

Active Macro editing options

Selected blue row

55 |
Macro Editing

4. Edit the Macro using the Macro editing toolbar options.

See: Macro Editing Toolbar Options
The selected row becomes green if Add new Macro before, Add new Macro after
or Edit current Macro option is selected. This indicates that the System has
entered Select Command mode.

Example of Select Command mode:

Green selected row

The Command line color also changes to green with the text [SELECT
COMMAND]:
Green Command line

Note the following when Select Command mode is active:

 All Macro editing options will be disabled except the selected option.
Select the selected Macro editing option to exit the current mode.
 The Editor Toolbar will become active with all the existing system Toolbar
commands.
 Panel Keys, Soft Keys and Editor Toolbar options can be used to insert
commands.
 Each single input command will create a new row.
5. From the Macro editing toolbar select the activated editing option.
The System exits Select Command mode. The selected row changes from
green to blue.
6. Select the Save option to save the edited Macro or select another editing
option to carry on editing

| 56
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

How to Create a New Macro Offline

The following process will guide you through creating a new Macro offline.

To Create a New Macro

1. From the Workspace Tree select Macros.

The Macro list window opens:

2. From the Macro list window select the Create New Macro icon :

The Create Macro dialog opens with the New option selected:

3. In the New Macro number field enter the new Macro number.
4. In the New Macro Name filed enter the new Macro name:

57 |
Macro Editing

5. Click OK.

The Macro editing window appears with Select Command mode active:

Green row indicates Select Command

mode is active

Note the following when Select Command mode is active:

 All Macro editing options will be disabled except the selected option.
Select the selected Macro editing option to exit the current mode.
 The Editor Toolbar will become active with all the existing system Toolbar
commands.
 Panel Keys, Soft Keys and Editor Toolbar options can be used to insert
commands.
 Each single input command will create a new row.
6. The new Macro can now be edited using the Macro editing toolbar options.
See: Macro Editing Toolbar Options and How to Edit a Macro Offline

| 58
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

How to Create a Macro from an Existing Macro

A new Macro can be created using an existing Macro. This is done by selecting
the Copy of Existing option from the Create Macro dialog.

To Create Macro from Existing Macro

1. Select the Macro to copy by doing either of the following:
 Select the Macro from the Workspace tree.

 [MACRO,#,EXAM]
 [MACRO,EXAM] then double click on the Macro number from the Macro
list.
2. From the Macro Exam window select the Create New Macro icon:

The Create Macro dialog opens with the Copy of Existing option selected:

3. Make sure that the Macro you intend to copy is selected from the existing
Macro drop down list:

59 |
Macro Editing

4. Enter the new Macro number in the New Macro number field.
5. Enter the name of the new Macro in the New Macro Name field:

6. Click OK.

The Macro editing window opens containing the copied Macro.

The Macro can be edited using the Macro editing toolbar options.
See: Macro Editing Toolbar Options
See: How to Edit a Macro Offline

Macro Time Editing

Macro time is the “waiting time” between key presses, for example:
The following image shows a 5 sec “waiting time” between key presses. The
system will wait for 5 seconds before the key SPOT is pressed. 5 seconds later
key 1 is pressed and after another 5 seconds the SPOT 1 will be at FULL:

5 second waiting time before

each key press

Macro time is edited in the Macro editing window. Time can entered in seconds
and milliseconds.

| 60
Vector Release Notes 3.20R03

To Edit Macro Time

1. Select a Macro by doing either of the following:
 Select the Macro from the Workspace Tree.

 [MACRO,#,EXAM]
 [MACRO,EXAM] then click on the Macro number from the Macro list.
2. From the Macro Exam window select the Edit Current Macro icon:

3. From the Macro Editing window double click in the Time cell:

4. Edit the Macro time.

5. Click on the Save Macro option to save the new Macro time:

61 |
Vector
Release Notes

Release Date: 9/7/2012

Real time version: 3.20R02
Windows version: 3.20R02
RT interface version: 3.20R02
NOTE: This version does not support Single Cole
Consoles.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

Copyright © 2012 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.

1|
Table of Contents

7 Re-Select Group Selection ............................................................ 15

8 Link Enhancement ........................................................................ 16
Using Link Options .................................................................................. 17
Link On BACK ................................................................................... 17
Link Indications ................................................................................ 17
Link Options Rules and Conditions ............................................................. 18
Cues with two or more links ............................................................... 18
When Cues in-between linked Cues will NOT be greyed-out..................... 19
Overlapping link ranges ..................................................................... 20

9 Default Settings for A/B Playback ................................................ 21

10 Default Settings for Submaster ..................................................... 22
11 Flash To Black .............................................................................. 23
Assigning Flash To Black to a Key.............................................................. 23

12 The New Vector PC Wing .............................................................. 26

Connecting Vector PC Wing ...................................................................... 26
LED connection indications ................................................................. 27
Vector PC Wing Operation ........................................................................ 28
Parallel Behavior ............................................................................... 28
Paging ............................................................................................ 29
Vector PC Wing Firmware Update .............................................................. 29
Vector PC Wing Keycap Changes ............................................................... 30

13 Local DMX Outputs Selection ........................................................ 31

14 Monitor DMX Outputs ................................................................... 33
Enabling DMX Output Monitor ................................................................... 33

15 Increased Ports ............................................................................ 34

16 Multi-Language Support ............................................................... 35
Changing Language ................................................................................ 35
Troubleshooting Language Change ...................................................... 37

|2
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

Chinese Language Installation .................................................................. 37

17 New Warning Message ................................................................. 39

3|
Version Highlights

2 Version Highlights
Version 3.20R02 brings a range of new and updated features together with 33
new devices and 12 updated devices.

Feature / Improvements Description

Display
Font color can be changed for empty soft-
 Empty Soft-Key Text Color keys.

Editing
Fixture names can be changed. Edited names
 Edit Fixture Names can include or exclude index numbers.
There is now a faster method to re-select a
 Re-Select Group Selection group or selection.

 Link Enhancement  Cues in-between linked cues can now be

greyed out.

 The Back button can now be used to go

BACK while bypassing the cues in-
between the linked cues.

Playback
Changes have been made to the default
 Default Settings for A/B Playback settings of the A/B Playback.
The A/B will now have the following default
settings:

 Prevent From Paging will be OFF

 Prevent Snap Override will be ON

Changes have been made to the default

 Default Settings for Submaster Submaster settings of a fader.
The new Submaster settings are as follows:

 Top button will now be Group Selection

instead of GO

 Middle button will now be Group Release

instead of HOLD/BACK

 Bottom button will remain as Flash

You are now able to instantly bring a dimmer

 Flash To Black value of a PB to zero (Blacken) using the new
Flash To Black feature.

|4
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

System Settings
You can now define which universe will be
 Local DMX Output Selection transmitted from a local DMX output located
at the back of the console.
You are now able to view and monitor DMX
 Monitor DMX Outputs data and values that are being transmitted
out of the console.
The amount of DMX ports transmitted from
 Increased Ports the console has been increased.
Vector now supports the following languages;
 Multi-Language Support German, Spanish, Hebrew and Chinese.
A new system warning message has been
 New Warning Message added to prevent console data from being
deleted by mistake.

External Hardware
The new Vector PC Wing can be used as a
 New Vector PC Wing hardware attachment to a Vector PC or as a
Remote Wing with a console.
A getting started guide for connecting the
new Vector PC wing has been included in this
document.
Note: There has been a change in some
hardware keycaps for the new Vector PC
Wing. See Vector PC Wing Keycap Changes.
FIRMWARE UPDATE:
Please install the latest Firmware T025V030.
The Firmware file and Release notes can be
downloaded from the Compulite Downloads
page; (Vector PC Wing Firmware Update
July2012).

5|
Bug Fixes V3.20R02

3 Bug Fixes V3.20R02

 A Submaster with a mixed selection of RGB (with no dimmer devices) and
devices with dimmers did not work correctly. This issue has been fixed.
Reported by Matthias Schoffman.
 A 50%value or 128 decimal value of a 16 bit parameter was incorrect. This
issue has been fixed. Reported by Christof Leuba.
 When the “Release at bottom” option was enabled, release Qlist time was
ignored. Problem has been fixed. Reported by David Hall.
 When a Cue was stored in the Blind editor while the Multi Editors option was
enabled with Blind being the active editor, the system would exit the Blind
mode. This issue has been fixed. Reported by Filip Wiesner.
 Faders that were attached did not work correctly from warm data. The Snap
had to be activated in-order for them to work. Problem has been fixed.
Reported by Matthias Schoffman.
 STEP>> did not work from the last Cue to the first Cue. This issue has been
fixed. Reported by Matthias Schoffman.
 If STEP was applied to a PB and BACK was used, the system used BACK
TIME instead of CUT time. This problem has been fixed. Reported by
Matthias Schoffman.
 If a PB was moved from the last fader on a page to another fader in the
middle of a page, then it was not possible to attach more faders to it. This
issue has been fixed. Matthias Schoffman.
 Copying a parameter from a spot in a library to another spot in the same
library failed. This issue has been fixed. Reported by Orit Freedman.
 If a range of Cues was updated and one of the Cues in the range had a
private cell time, then the system would set all the Cues from the private
cell time Cue onwards using the private cell time attribute. This problem has
been fixed. Reported by Filip, Opera Prague.
 ACTIVE did not work with RGB devices. This problem has been fixed.
Reported by Matthias Schoffman.
 LED Desk light worked only on the editor panel (main screen).This issue has
been fixed. Reported by Gerhard Feiner.
 When saving settings as default the console would change the settings
instead of saving the new default settings. This problem has been fixed.
Reported by Matthias Schoffman.
 Images could not be loaded to a Matrix built of Channels. This has been
fixed. Reported by Matthias Kern.

|6
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

 If the Patch manager was open and Dimmer patch operations were made,
then the Patch manager and show data were out of sync. This issue has
been fixed. Reported by Orit Freedman.
 When exporting a Channel display to Excel, caused one of the columns from
the grid to be deleted. This problem has been fixed. Reported by Filip, Opera
Prague.
 After turning off “Jump to Fixture\Parameter” and updating a patch, caused
“Jump to Fixture\Parameter” to turn ON. This problem has been fixed.
Reported by Filip, Opera Prague.

7|
Text Conventions

4 Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS
are in BOLD CAPS.

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the
mouse to “click” or “tapping” on the touch screen.

|8
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

5 Empty Soft-Key Text Color

You are now able to set a different font color for an empty Soft-Key. This
enables you to see the difference between empty and occupied Soft-Keys.
The font color is set by using a new drop-down menu called “Empty Sk Font”
located in the SK Editor.

Occupied Soft-Keys with

white font

Empty Soft-Keys with

grey font

New Empty SK Font

drop down menu

9|
Empty Soft-Key Text Color

To change empty soft-key font

1. From the Soft-Key menu pane click on the View Properties icon.

-OR-
From the Soft-Key menu pane right click and select View Properties.
The SK Editor window will open.
2. From the SK Editor window select the Empty SK Font drop down menu and
select a font color.

3. Click OK to apply the font color to the active soft-key set, or click Apply to All
to apply the font to ALL soft-key sets.
A confirmation dialog will open if Apply to All is selected. Select Yes or No to
apply the font to all Soft-Key sets:

| 10
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

6 Edit Fixture Names

Fixture names can now be edited. This feature will work with all Fixture sets
(Channel, Spot, Matrix and Media Server). Edited names that are the same can
include or exclude index numbers.
Editing Fixture names is done via the consoles panel.

Fixture names and index

numbers automatically given by
the system

Fixture names edited without

index numbers

Fixture names that are the same

with index numbers

How to Edit Fixture Names

When editing Fixture names, you can either edit each name separately or in a
range. A selected range of the same Fixture name can have index numbers
added by adding a “Space” or an “Underscore” after the name.

To edit Fixture names without index numbers

1. Select Fixture and Fixture number.
[CHANNEL, #]
2. Select [TEXT].
The Fixture Name dialog text box will open.
11 |
Edit Fixture Names

3. In the text box enter a Fixture name.

4. Click OK to apply the Fixture name, or Cancel to cancel the operation.

To name a Fixture range without adding index numbers

1. Select a Fixture range.
[CHANNEL, #  #]
2. Select [TEXT].
The Fixture Name dialog text box will open.

3. In the text box enter a Fixture name for the range.

4. Click OK to apply the name to the Fixture range, or Cancel to cancel the
operation.

To name a Fixture range and adding index numbers

1. Select a Fixture range.
[CHANNEL, #  #]

2. Select [TEXT].
The Fixture Name dialog text box will open.

| 12
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

3. In the text box enter a Fixture name for the range and either add a “Space”
or “Underscore” after the name.
For Example:

Space after Fixture name

Underscore after Fixture name

4. Click OK to apply the name with index numbers to the Fixture range, or
Cancel to cancel the operation.

13 |
Edit Fixture Names

Sequences Examples to Edit Fixture Names

The following is list of sequences examples that can be used to edit Fixture
names.
Note: You can use SPOT instead of CHANNEL

Sequence Result
[CHANNEL, #, TEXT, enter name, OK] A Single Fixture name will
be edited.
[CHANNEL, #  #, TEXT, enter name, OK] A range of Fixture names
will be edited without index
numbers.
[CHANNEL, #, +, #, +, #, TEXT, enter name, OK] A non-sequential range of
Fixtures names will edited
without index numbers.
[CHANNEL, #, , #, +, SPOT, #, , #, +, MEDIA, #, A mixed group of Fixture
+, MATRIX, #, +, MATRIX, #, TEXT, enter name, OK] sets and ranges will be
named without index
numbers.
[CHANNEL, #, , #, TEXT, enter name 1, OK] A range of Fixture names
will be edited with index
numbering starting at 1.
[CHANNEL, #, ,#, TEXT, enter name 5, OK] A range of Fixture names
will be edited with index
numbering starting at 5.
[CHANNEL, #, , #, +, SPOT, #, , #, +, MEDIA, #, A mixed group of Fixture
+, MATRIX, #, +, MATRIX, #, TEXT, enter name_101, sets and ranges will be
OK] named with index
numbering starting at 101.
The index numbers will be
applied to all selected
Fixtures even if they are
taken from different Fixture
sets.

| 14
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

7 Re-Select Group Selection

A faster method has been added to re-select a group or a selection after
modifying its parameters.

Once a groups parameters have been modified the key can be used to re-
select the original selection.
Example:

Spot 1-5 belongs to

group 1 (Alpha FOH)

Modifying the group’s parameters

The groups parameters have been modified

using Next, Prev and Every. Spot 5 is now the
only Fixture selected.

Using the key to re-select the original group selection

Using the / key will re-select the original group

selection.

15 |
Link Enhancement

8 Link Enhancement
Link has been enhanced to enable you to grey out cues in-between linked cues.
This enables you to easily view cues that are in-between linked cues. You are
also able to use the BACK key to go back while bypassing the cues in-between
the linked cues.
For example
Cue 5 is Linked to Cue 10
Greyed out cues in-between the linked cues 5 and 10:

Cue 5 is linked to Cue 10

Cue 6 to Cue 9 are between the

linked cues, therefore they are
greyed out.

Cue 5 is linked to Cue 10.

Using the BACK key to fade from Cue 10 to Cue 5 will bypass the cues in-
between:

Using the Back button will

bypass the cues between the
linked cues.

| 16
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

Link enhancement includes the addition of two new buttons called LINK ON
BACK and LINK INDICATIONS. These have been added to the System Settings
Playback tab under Link Options; Tools ► System Settings ► Playback tab.

Using Link Options

By default the Link Options settings are off unless the settings have been
changed and saved as default. Link Options can be activated on-the-fly if
needed.

Link On BACK
The LINK ON BACK option enables you to use the Back button to bypass cues
in-between linked while going backwards.

Link Indications
The LINK INDICATIONS option enables you to grey out cues in-between linked
cues.

17 |
Link Enhancement

To activate Link Options

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.
2. From the Playback tab and under Link Options select a link option.

3. Click OK to accept the new setting.

Link Options Rules and Conditions

The following rules and conditions should be noted while using Link Options.

Cues with two or more links

If the option LINK ON BACK is activated and a cue has two or more links to it,
then pressing on the BACK key will go back to the first linked cue in the
backwards order.
For example:
Cue 5 and Cue 7 are linked to Cue 10. Pressing on the BACK key from Cue 10
will fade to Cue 7. (The first linked Cue in the backwards order)

Cue 5 Linked to Cue 10 Cue 7 Linked to Cue 10 Cue 10

Pressing on the Back key from Cue 10 will

fade to the first linked cue in the
backwards order. In this case Cue 7.

| 18
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

If the option LINK ON BACK is activated and two Cues are linked to the same
Cue, then pressing on the BACK key from the linked Cue will fade to the first
linked Cue the backwards order.
For example:
Cue 2 and Cue 8 are linked to Cue 5. Pressing on the BACK key from Cue 5 will
fade to Cue 8. (The first linked Cue in the backwards order)

Cue 2 Linked to Cue 5 Cue 5 Cue 8 Linked to Cue 5

Pressing on the Back key from Cue 5 will

fade to the first linked cue in the
backwards order. In this case Cue 2.

When Cues in-between linked Cues will NOT be greyed-out

When the option LINK INDICATIONS is activated, Cues in-between linked Cues
will not be greyed out in the following instances:
 If a Cue is linked to a Cue less than its Cue number.
For example:
If Cue 10 is linked to Cue 5 (Less than Cue 10) the Cues in-between will not
be greyed out.

Cues in-between the linked

Cues are not greyed out.

Cue 10 linked to Cue 5

 If a link exists after programming a loop, the Cues in-between will not be
greyed out.

19 |
Link Enhancement

Overlapping link ranges

When the option LINK INDICATIONS is activated and there is an overlapping link
range, only the first range will be greyed-out.
For example:
If Cue 2 is linked to Cue 7 and Cue 4 is linked to Cue 10, then the first range
which is from Cue 2 to Cue 7 will be greyed-out.

First linked range is greyed-out

| 20
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

9 Default Settings for A/B Playback

Changes have been made to the default settings of the A/B Playback [SETUP ►
A/B SELECT, Playback Definitions tab]. The new default settings will be
saved with Snap data.
When starting a new show the A/B will now have the following default settings:
 PREVENT SNAP OVERRIDE will be ON
This option locks a Cue list on the AB fader during a show.

To change A/B playback settings

Use the following sequence to change the A/B playback settings:
1. [SETUP ► A/B SELECT]

The Playback A/B Properties dialog will open.

2. From the Playback Definitions tab and in the Properties section click on
PREVENT SNAP OVERRIDE to change the settings.
3. Click OK to apply the settings.

21 |
Default Settings for Submaster

10 Default Settings for Submaster

Changes have been made to the default Submaster settings of a fader. [SETUP
► SELECT #, Playback Definitions tab] The new Submaster settings are as
follows:
 Top button will now be GROUP SELECTION instead of GO
 Middle button will now be GROUP RELEASE instead of HOLD/BACK
 Bottom button will remain as FLASH

The default settings will be saved with Snap data.

Note: From now on, Default PB Definition settings; Tools ► Settings ► Playback
tab, will not affect Submaster settings.

| 22
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

11 Flash To Black
Flash To Black is a new playback control feature that enables you to instantly
bring the dimmer value of a playback to zero (Blacken). Flash To Black can be
assigned to either a PB key or Q-Key.

Assigning Flash To Black to a Key

Assigning Flash To Black to a PB key or Q-Key is done by selecting the option
from the PB Keys Behavior list. The behavior list is accessed by selecting a PB
key from the Settings ► Playback tab or the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist
properties. The PB key text will change to Flash To Black once assigned.
Flash To Black can be assigned on-the-fly only via the Qlist properties, in which
case the text FlshBO will appear in the PB wing. Assigning Flash To Black via the
System Settings will only be applied to new assignments.

Flash To Black in the PB Keys Example of a PB Example of FlshBO text

Behavior list Key assigned to on the PB wing
Flash To Black

23 |
Flash To Black

To assign Flash To Black from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.
2. Select the DEFAULT PB DEFINITIONS option to activate the PB key options:

The PB key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Flash To Black:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key to

assign Flash To Black.

4. From the PB keys behavior list select Flash To Black.

Flash To Black will be assigned and the selected key option text will change to
Flash To Black.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

| 24
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

To assign Flash To Black from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].
The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key to assign

Flash To Black.

3. Select a playback key to assign Flash To Black.

4. From the Playback key behavior list select Flash To Black.
Flash To Black will now be assigned and the selected key option text will
change to Flash To Black.
5. Click OK to apply the change and close the Qlist Properties dialog.

25 |
The New Vector PC Wing

12 The New Vector PC Wing

The Vector PC Wing can be used as a hardware attachment for Vector PC or as
a Remote Wing with a console. Vector PC Wing is not a standalone wing, panel
or console, and can only be used as a parallel hardware attachment, as it draws
its processing power from a Vector PC or Vector Console.
Note: Minimum software requirement is Vector Software 3.20R02

Connecting Vector PC Wing

The Vector PC Wing needs to be connected to a Vector system using a RJ-45
network cable. Connection can either be via an Ethernet hub or direct.
Note: If more than one system exists in the network, the Vector PC Wing will
connect to the first recognized system in the network. (You may need to
disconnect one of the systems in order for the PC Wing to recognize the correct
one).

| 26
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

LED connection indications

During connection the Vector PC Wing LED’s will indicate the connection status.
The following are the LED indications:

Action LED indication

Powering Up All LED’s will blink for a split second.

Scanning the network Green LED's

All Playback LED’s will run in a
progress bar fashion from left to right.

During connection All LED’s will remain ON until

connection is complete.

Connection established All LED’s will blink for a split second.

NO Network Red LED's

All Playback LED’s will run in a
progress bar fashion from left to right.

To connect Vector PC Wing

1. Make sure Vector software is running.
2. Using the supplied power cable connect the Vector PC Wing to a 110-220V
power output.
Do NOT turn wing ON.
3. Using a RJ-45 network cable, connect one end to the Ethernet port on the
Vector PC Wing and the other end to either of the following:
 Vector console data port
 Ethernet hub
 Vector PC Ethernet port
Note: If an Ethernet network hub is used, then make sure the Vector
system is connected to the same Network hub.

27 |
The New Vector PC Wing

4. Turn ON the Vector PC Wing.

The Vector PC Wing should now connect to the system. See LED connection
indications.
Note the following:
 The PC or console IP MUST be different than 127.0.0.1. For example;
90.10.XX.1 or 91.10.XX.1.
 The PC or console Subnet mask MUST be 255.0.0.0
 Vector PC Wings with built in ePorts are controlled via C-Net Manager.
Please make sure the ePort IP is the same as the Subnet of the PC.

Vector PC Wing Operation

The Vector PC Wing can only be used as a Parallel hardware attachment and not
a standalone unit.

Parallel Behavior
The following applies to the Wing behavior in parallel mode:
 Changing the fader mode on the Vector console changes it on the Wing and
visa-versa.
 Master playback can be changed on either the Wing or Vector console.
 Editor functions on the PC Wing work together with the editor functions on
the console.

| 28
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

Paging
The following explains how Vector PC Wing paging works when using either a 10
playback console or a 20 playback console:

10 Playback Console
 Paging on the PC Wing will also page on the console and visa-versa.
 The 10 Playbacks on the console will affect the 10 Playbacks on the PC Wing
and visa-versa, for example; Playback 1 on the console will affect Playback 1
on the PC Wing and visa-versa.

20 Playback Console

 Paging on the PC Wing will also page on the console and visa-versa.
 The first 10 Playbacks on a page of the console will affect the 10
Playbacks on the PC Wing and visa-versa.
For example

Console PC Wing

Page 1 (Playbacks 1- 20) Will affect Playbacks 1-10

Page 2 (Playbacks 21-40) Will affect Playbacks 21-30

Vector PC Wing Firmware Update

There is a new Firmware update for the Vector PC Wing. The file can be
downloaded from the links below or from the Compulite Downloads page.
Vector PC Wing Firmware Update Release Notes V0.30
Vector PC Wing Firmware Update

29 |
The New Vector PC Wing

Vector PC Wing Keycap Changes

Due to client requests we have changed certain Keycaps on the Vector PC Wing.
Please contact your local distributor.

1 2

3
4

No. Old Keycap New Keycap

1 Playback Free All / Free
2 Rate PB Release
3 Store+ Setup
4 Blank Lo.Light / Hi.Light

| 30
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

13 Local DMX Outputs Selection

You are now able to define which universe will be transmitted from a local DMX
output located at the back of the console. This is done by selecting a Universe
port from a drop down menu in the Local DMX Outputs table in the DMX
Protocols tab. (Tools ► System Settings ► DMX Protocols).

Local DMX
Outputs

To select a Universe port

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► System Settings ► DMX Protocols tab.

2. From the Local DMX Output table click on a Universe Port.

The Port drop down menu will open.

31 |
Local DMX Outputs Selection

3. From the drop down menu select a universe Port.

4. Click OK or Apply to apply the settings.

Note: The Default 1 to 1 button will return the Universe ports to their default
settings (Out 1 ► Port 1, Out 2 ► Port2, etc.).

| 32
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

14 Monitor DMX Outputs

The DMX monitor enables you to view and monitor DMX data and values that
are being transmitted out of the console. A new tab has been added to the Ports
view called Output. (Workspace Tree ► Patch ► DMX Out ► Port #)

New Output tab

Note: Only one view pane of the Output monitor can be opened at any given
time. If an attempt to open more than one view pane occurs then a warning
message will be displayed:

Enabling DMX Output Monitor

VC outputs need to be enabled in order to view the DMX Output monitor.

To enable VC output
1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► DMX Protocols.

2. Select the desired Port VC’s.

3. Click Apply, and then click OK.

33 |
Increased Ports

15 Increased Ports
The amount of DMX ports transmitted from the console has been increased. The
following table provides details on increased ports for each console:

DMX Protocol VC’s Art-Net Streaming ACN

E-Ports N/R 0 1 2 3 4 8 0 1 2 3 4 8

Consoles

Red/Blue/Green 32 32 32

Orange 16 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16

Violet/UltraViolet 12 12 12

Vector Node 32 32 32

Vector PC 32 1 4 8 12 16 32 1 4 8 12 16 32

Note: Vector Violet and Ultra Violet ports increase was implemented in software
version 3.20R01.

| 34
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

16 Multi-Language Support
Vector now supports the following languages; German, Spanish, Hebrew and
Chinese. Language changes will mainly be applied to the Menu bar, the Menu
bar drop down menus, dialogs, title bars and warning messages.
Note: For Chinese language see Chinese Language Installation.

Changing Language
The Windows software language needs to be changed first in order for the
console to display a selected language other than English. Windows language is
changed from the Control Panel.

To change Windows language

1. From the Windows Start menu select Control Panel.
2. From the Control Panel double click on Regional and Language Options.

The Regional and Language Options dialog opens:

3. Select the Advanced tab and then click on the language drop down menu
under Language for non-Unicode programs.

35 |
Multi-Language Support

4. From the drop down menu select the required language.

5. Click Apply.
6. If a warning message appears click Yes or OK.
7. Click Yes to restart your computer.

To change vector language

1. From the Vector menu bar click on Help ► Language.

2. Select the desired language.

3. Note the following:
 If you are changing the language on a Vector PC you will be prompted
with a warning message and required to restart Vector.

Click OK to verify the language change. Vector will shut down.

| 36
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

Troubleshooting Language Change

Chinese Language Installation

A Chinese language patch needs to be installed in order to view Chinese on the
Vector console. The patch can be found in a folder called “Chinese” located in
the Updates folder in the Compulite program files.

To install Chinese language patch

1. Navigate to the Updates ► Chinese folder:
Vector Console – D:\Program files\Compulite Vector\Config\Updates\Chinese
Vector PC – C:\Program files\Compulite\Vector Pc\Config\Updates\Chinese
2. Click on the Chinese folder.
3. Double click on the file ie_zhc.exe.

A Microsoft Chinese Language Support pop-up will appear:

4. Click Yes.
5. Click Yes to accept the License Agreement.

The Install will begin.

When the install is complete an Installation Complete pop-up will appear.

37 |
Multi-Language Support

6. Once the Chinese language patch has been installed, navigate to Regional
and Language Options in the Control Panel. See Changing Language
7. From the Advanced tab click on the drop down language menu and change
the language to Chinese (PRC).

8. Reboot the System.

9. After Rebooting the System, start the Vector Software and select Chinese
language; Help ► Languages ► Chinese.

See To change vector language

| 38
Vector Release Notes 3.20R02

17 New Warning Message

A new system warning message has been added to prevent console data from
being deleted by mistake.
If New Show is selected by mistake while working with a show the following
warning message will appear:

39 |
Vector Release Notes
Dual Core Release
Release Date: 27/11/2011

Real time version: 3.20.R01

Windows version: 3.20.R01

RT interface version: 3.20.R01

NOTE!!
This version does not support Single Core* consoles.
*Vector Orange will support this release with a few hardware limitations.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Version Highlights

Version Highlights
1. Display
1.1. Live Mode View The Pan Title Bar will now display the selected
Enhancement Live Mode.

1.2. Live Fixtures Display An option has been added to view the Live
Enhancement Fixture display grid either horizontally or
vertically.

1.3. External Wing Display A dedicated display has been added to the
Workspace Tree for an external wing.

1.4. Navigation History Navigation history items can now be selected

from drop down menus on the Back and
Forward navigation buttons.

2. Editing
2.1. Shuffle 3 new shuffle options have been added; Shuffle
Order, Shuffle Fixtures and Shuffle All Cells.

2.2. User Defined Curves 8 User Defined curves have been added which
can be edited accordingly.

2.3. Invert Values Selected Fixtures and Parameters can now be

inverted to an opposite value.

2.4. Bypass Library Time A library fade-in time value can be bypassed,
in which case CUT time will be used.

3. Playback
3.1. Enhanced Move Function Playbacks can now be moved to Playbacks on-
the-fly.

3.2. New Snap Options New snap options have been added which
enable you to store a current master PB and/or
current page number to a snap.

3.3. Tap Beat Tap Beat enables you to set the Rate speeds by
tapping on the BEAT button.

1|
Version Highlights

3.4. Go Reverse Go Reverse is a new playback control feature

that enables you to go in a reverse direction
when using cues.

3.5. Group Selection and Fixtures can now be selected and/or released
Release via PB by pressing on an assigned PB key or Q-Key.

4. System Settings
4.1. System Lock You are now able to lock the console using a 1
to 10 digit code.

Vector Violet Improvements

Vector Violet is now able to transmit up to 12 outputs from any protocol (VC’s, ArtNet and
Streaming ACN) regardless of the amount of ePorts connected.

|2
Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.20R01

Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.20R01

 Snaps that were saved with running/off status did not come up as “Saved”. This has been
fixed. Thanks to Stephen Plotkin, Canada.
 Communication has been improved between Master console and Slave or Node. Thanks
to Bambi, Bonder and Vini, Israel.
 A Macro with Freeze Effect did not unfreeze on the second pass. Now only one Macro
can be used to freeze and unfreeze. Thanks to Moshiko Pe’er, Israel.
 Assigning or storing a range of cues to a range of playbacks did not work properly;
instead it was spreading the cues to Qkeys. This has been fixed. Thanks to Gerhard
Feiner, Germany.
 If the Autosave folder was moved or changed from the Vector Shows folder, an error
message occurred. This has been fixed and now the system will auto create the Autosave
folder again. Thanks to Eli Osawa, Tokyo.
 Copying a fixture or parameter did not work properly especially when selecting groups.
This has been fixed. Thanks Bill Peachment, UK.
 When attempting to update a Library on a show that was saved on an older software
version, produced an error message which was related to Mark-Cue. This has fixed.
Thanks to Gino DeLeo, David Winnik, Ronen Ben-Harosh, Italia, Israel.
 When assigning Delay In/Out times with a value smaller than 1 sec and using the decimal
dot (.), the result was a wrong value. This has been fixed. Thanks to Uri Morag, Israel.
 On some occasions, Vector did not download more than 180 thumbnails from Arkaos'
Media-Master. This has been fixed.
 On Vector orange, when loading a show that had DMX-In + Art-Net or DMX-In + ACN
enabled, caused a windows crash. This has been fixed. Thanks to Orit Freedman,
Holland.
 There was a crash using the sequence [FIXTURE, #, VIRTUAL DIMMER, @, RED,
Spin wheel] on a device that was using a virtual dimmer. This has been fixed. Thanks to
Stephen Plotkin, Canada.
 When loading a show from a previous version that had an infinite time setup to control
parameter, caused the infinite time to be around 10 minutes. This has been fixed. Thanks
to Pekka Rytilahti, Finland.

 The Park sequence was always selecting the whole fixture. Now it is possible to select
specific parameter/s that will be parked. This is done by the sequence:[FIXTURE, #, (→,

3|
Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.20R01

#), Move values, PARAM, PARAM,… (To select the parameters in RED),
SHIFT+PARK, STORE]. This sequence will also work to release parameters from park.
Thanks to Moshiko Peer and Speedy Cole, Israel & Matthias Kern, Switzerland.
 When working in Multi-Editors mode with the option "Take Multi-Editors" activated,
then updating objects did not take all the editors. Now when this flag is enabled, updating
objects will use all editors.
 When examining a PB after the key "PB/QKey Display" was pressed, the content of the
exam was incorrect. This has been fixed. Thanks to Raphael from Crystal, France.
 The Automatic Parameter Grouping flag from the Editing tab in the system settings was
not applied after exiting the System Settings. This has been fixed. Thanks to Orit
Freedman, Holland.
 The sequence of releasing fixtures from Sub-Masters did not work on some occasions.
This has been fixed. Thanks to Filip Wiesner, Austria.
 Wheel assignments did not page correctly when there were spaces between the
parameters on the wheels. Now paging will page exactly as stored in the device. Thanks
to Bonder, Israel.
 If a device had no Dimmer, Virtual Dimmer or RGB parameter patched, it caused odd
behavior to the system. This has been fixed. Thanks to David Bishop, UK.
 The sequence of [CUE, #, NEXT/PREV] did not work if the # (cue number) did not exist.
Now when doing this sequence on a non-existing cue and pressing NEXT/PREV then it
will give the nearest cue next/prev to the number that was entered. Thanks to Aviram
Shahinu, Israel.
 It was not possible to see 16 bit color parameters in the Matrix-List live view. This has
been fixed. Thanks to Jerry Roberto Romani, Italy & David Bishop, UK.

|4
Text Conventions

Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS are in BOLD
CAPS.
 The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen BUTTONS are
BOLD ITALICIZED CAPS.
 Dialog boxes, Window titles and field names appear in this font.

 Sequences appear like this; [SEQUENCE, SEQUENCE].

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the mouse to “click”
or “tapping” on the touch screen.

5|
Live Mode View Enhancement

Live Mode View Enhancement

An option has been added to enable the selected “live mode” to be displayed on the live mode
title bar. This will only be visible if the title bar is not hidden; Show/Hide Pane Title
Example:
If you select Active In Editor from the Live Mode menu, the live mode title bar will display the
text “Active In Editor” provided the Pane Title is not hidden.

|6
Live Fixtures Columns Display Enhancement

Live Fixtures Columns Display Enhancement

The Live Fixture display grid can now be viewed either horizontally or vertically for Live
Channels, Spots, Matrix and Media Server:

Vertical View

Horizontal View

A new option has been added to the Columns tab; View Properties ► Grid Properties, called
Vertical View. When Vertical View is activated the grid style will be vertical and the number of
columns can be defined. (Default No of Columns is 10). When Vertical View is OFF the grid
style will be horizontal.

Vertical View ON Vertical View OFF

7|
Live Fixtures Columns Display Enhancement

To change columns display type

1. Click on the VIEW PROPERTIES button in the grid view pane title bar.

-OR-
Right click and select View Properties:

-OR-
From the View menu select View Properties:
Either way will open the Grid Properties dialog:

|8
Live Fixtures Columns Display Enhancement

2. Select the Columns tab:

3. Click on the Vertical View option under Display Type to activate vertical view and
enter the amount of columns - if desired:

Note: When Vertical View is OFF, the display grid type will be
horizontal view.

4. Click Apply to apply the change.

9|
External Wing Display

External Wing Display

The External wing display is a dedicated display of external wings; Wing 10 and Wing 20. The
external wings are selected from the Workspace Tree ► Playback ► External Wing. The display
will enable you to view Wings and Qkeys.
The display window will be blank if an external wing is not present in the network.

To view external wing

Before you can view an external wing, make sure the wing is connected and a connection has
been established with a Vector console.

| 10
External Wing Display

1. Open the Workspace Tree.

2. From the Workspace Tree click on the Playback folder, then click on the External
Wing folder.
3. Select a Wing / Qkey to view.

Exam Qkeys on Playback 20 Wing

Examining Qkeys on Wing 20 can ONLY be done in Parallel mode. If the wing is NOT in
parallel mode, then follow the instructions below:

To select parallel mode on Wing 20

1. On the Vector console press SETUP.

The edit tool bar will now be in setup mode.
2. From the Edit toolbar select REMOTES.
3. Select the type of wing; REMOTE WING-20PB.
The wings will be displayed on the toolbar.
4. Select the specific wing.
The operation mode dialog box opens and the current mode is displayed at the top of
the dialog box.
5. Select PARALLEL.
The dialog box closes.

To Exam Qkeys on Wing 20

1. On the Vector console press EXAM.

2. On the Wing 20 press QKEY MODE.
The LED on the QKEY MODE key will turn ON (Red)
3. On the Wing 20 press the PLAYBACK SELECT key twice.
The LED on the PLAYBACK SELECT key will blink green
You should now be able to exam a Qkey by pressing a SELECT key on the wing 20.

11 |
Navigation History

Navigation History
Navigation history can now be viewed by selecting the desired view history from a drop down
menu. The History drop down menu will display up to 10 history pages of the current active
view. (The current active view has an orange border) Using the drop down menu is a faster way
of selecting a history item.
The Navigation history drop down menu has been added to the Back and Forward navigation
buttons:

Drop down menu arrows. There

will be no arrows if no history
exists.

History drop down

Using Navigation History

The Back drop down menu will display only the history that you can go back to. The
Forward drop down menu will display only the history that you can go forward to.

The following is an example of how to use navigation history:

To use navigation history – Example

1. From the Workspace Tree click on Libraries.

The Libraries view window will become the active view.
2. From the Workspace Tree and under the Libraries file, select Position, Color, Beam
and Effect. (The last selected view ,Effect, becomes the current view)
3. From the Navigation bar click on the drop down menu arrow:

Drop down menu arrow

| 12
Navigation History

The history drop down menu will appear:

4. Select a history item to go back to, for example Libraries:

After selecting a history item, another drop down menu arrow will appear next to the
forward button. You can now use the drop down menus on both buttons to navigate to
a history view:

Use the drop down menus to navigate to

a desired history view

13 |
Shuffle

Shuffle
There are now 3 new options to shuffle a fixture selection order; Shuffle Order, Shuffle Fixtures
and Shuffle All Cells. By using shuffle you are able to build effects and/or chaser steps without
any thinking or creativity.
Shuffling can be done via the following:
 The Editor toolbar using a new button called; SHUFFLE ORDER
-OR-
 The Effects Editor which has two new shuffling buttons; SHUFFLE FIXTURES and
SHUFFLE ALL CELLS

USING SHUFFLE ORDER

Shuffle Order will shuffle a selection in random order when using the Next / Prev buttons.
The new Shuffle Order button is located on the Editor toolbar, and is only available once the
“Every” button has been selected.

Tap on the EVERY

button to access
SHUFFLE ORDER

| 14
Shuffle

To shuffle order

Example: Shuffle order of spot 1 -5 and assign a dim intensity value of 45%.
1. Select Fixtures; [SPOT 1  5]
2. From the Editor toolbar select EVERY.

3. From the Editor toolbar select SHUFFLE ORDER.

The Command line will display the following:

4. Press on NEXT or PREV.

5. Type; [@, 45]
6. Press on NEXT or PREV to shuffle the order.

Shuffle Order Sequence Examples

 [FIXTURE, #  #, EVERY, SHUFFLE ORDER, NEXT / PREV, FULL, NEXT, NEXT,
PREV, etc.]
 [FIXTURE, #  #, EVERY, SHUFFLE ORDER, NEXT / PREV, @, ##, NEXT, NEXT,
PREV, etc.]
 [FIXTURE, #  #, @, ##, EVERY, SHUFFLE ORDER, NEXT / PREV, PAN / TILT,
NEXT, NEXT, PREV, etc.]

15 |
Shuffle

Using Shuffle Fixtures with Effects

Shuffle Fixtures will only shuffle the selected fixture rows in random order. All fixture
attributes will be shuffled, except the Base value. (Base value is a parameter value that defines an
effect’s starting point). For more information on Base, see Chapter 10, page 274 in the Vector
Reference Guide.

Example of shuffling fixture rows:

Fixtures
rows will be
Selected fixtures shuffled in
1-5 random
order

The Shuffle Fixtures option is located in the Effects Editor ► Advanced tab:

| 16
Shuffle

To shuffle fixtures

Example: In this example we will assign a circle and wave effect for spots 1-5, then use
shuffle fixtures to shuffle the order.
1. Select Fixtures; [SPOT 1  5].
2. Press EFFECT.
The Effect Editor dialog will open
3. From the Pre-Built tab select the Circle effect option.
4. Now click on the Basic tab.
5. From the Basic tab and under Wave Functions select the Wave option.
6. Now click on the Advanced tab.
7. From the Advanced tab select the Shuffle Fixtures option.
The selected fixtures rows will now shuffle in a random order.

TIP! You can re-shuffle the order by selecting the Shuffle Fixtures button
again until you find a desired shuffle order or effect.

Using Shuffle All Cells

Shuffle All Cells will shuffle only the Offset values of the selected fixture cells in random order.
Example
Before using Shuffle All Cells:

Selected
The Offset values remain
Fixtures 1- 5
unchanged.

17 |
Shuffle

After using Shuffle All Cells:

Selected The Offset values are shuffled

Fixtures 1- 5 in random order.

The Shuffle All Cells option is located in the Effects Editor ► Advanced tab:

| 18
Shuffle

To shuffle all cells

Example: In this example we will assign a circle and wave effect for spots 1-5, then use
shuffle all cells to shuffle the order.
1. Select Fixtures; [SPOT 1  5].
2. Press on EFFECT.
The Effect Editor dialog will open.
3. From the Pre-Built tab select the Circle effect option.
4. Now click on the Basic tab.
5. From the Basic tab and under Wave Functions select the Wave option.
6. Now click on the Advanced tab.
7. From the Advanced tab select the Shuffle All Cells option.
The selected fixtures cells will now shuffle in a random order.

TIP! You can re-shuffle the order by selecting the Shuffle All Cells button
again until you find a desired shuffle order or effect.

19 |
User Defined Curves

User Defined Curves

8 User Defined curves have been added which can be edited using the windows interface. User
Defined curves can be applied to a dimmer the same way you apply the factory curves. See:
Editing DMX channel properties on page 76 in the Vector Reference Guide.
A new folder called “Curves” has been added to the Patch folder in the Workspace tree. The
folder contains factory and user defined curves. Clicking on the Curves folder in the Workspace
Tree will also display the curves in a grid window, and will indicate which curves can be edited
or not; (Yes / No).
Editing of User Defined curves can only be done from the Patch Manager.

No:
Curves
cannot
be edited

Yes:
Curves
can be
edited

| 20
User Defined Curves

Editing User Defined Curves

Curve names and points can be edited and saved to a show. Curves can contain up to 255 curve
points (Min is 2 points). Factory curves can also be copied and pasted into user defined curve
and then edited.
Curves are edited by adding and moving active points. Active points are white and non-active
points are blue:

Active Point
is white

Non Active Point

is blue

Graph Editing Controls

The following is list of graph editing controls and what they do:

Controls What it does…

These controls are used to move the active point to the next or previous point
on the graph.

These shows the Input and Output points of the curve.

21 |
User Defined Curves

Controls What it does…(Cont.)

This will add a point to the left of the active point. The point will be added in
the middle of the two points:
Example:
Note the
light Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
shade Active Point

The new point will be added in the middle of point 1 and point 2. (To the left
of point 2 – Active point)

This will delete an active point only. Click on a point to make it an active
point and then press the delete button.

This will add a point to the right of the active point. The point will be added
in the middle of the two points:
Example:
Note
the Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
light Active Point
shade

The new point will be added in the middle of point 2 and point 3. (To the
right of point 2 – Active point)

Hide or show grid icon.

Copy From enables you to copy a curve from either Factory curves or User
defined curves and automatically pastes it to the current open User defined
window.

| 22
User Defined Curves

To edit a user defined curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. Open the Workspace Tree.
3. From the Workspace Tree click on the Patch folder to display the Patch list.
4. Scroll down the list until you reach the Curves folder.
5. From the Curves folder select a User defined curve to edit.

Select a User
Defined curve to
edit.

23 |
User Defined Curves

The User Defined curve window will open.

Example:
User Define1 was selected:

Active point (White Point)

6. Add points to the graph using the plus button; or .

For example; one point was added using the right plus button:

Point 2

Point was added in

the middle of point
1 and point 2

Point 1

| 24
User Defined Curves

TIP! You can add a point by double clicking the mouse on the graph line.

7. Using the mouse, left click and hold on the active point and drag the point to the
desired location:
Example:

TIP! You can use the arrow keys on the keyboard for moving the point to a
more accurate value:
Using the mouse, left click on the point to move, and then use the keyboard
arrow keys to move the point.

8. To add more points go back to step 6.

9. Save the curve by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar:

Press to
save curve

25 |
User Defined Curves

To name a curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. Open the Workspace Tree.
3. From the workspace tree click on the Patch folder to display the Patch list.
4. Scroll down the list until you reach the Curves folder.
5. Select the Curves folder.
A window will appear with all the curves in a grid form:

6. Double click on the User Define curve you want to name.

Example:

Double click to
name curve

7. Type in the name of the curve.

8. Save the curve name by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar:

| 26
User Defined Curves

The curve name will be changed in the Workspace Tree and the Curve grid:
Example:

To copy a curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

2. Open the Workspace Tree.
3. From the Workspace Tree click on the Patch folder to display the Patch list.
4. Scroll down the list until you reach the Curves folder.
5. From the curves list select a User Defined curve that you want to copy a curve to.
The User Defined curve window will open.
6. From the Curve editing toolbar select the Copy From button.
A Copy From drop down menu will be displayed:

27 |
User Defined Curves

7. From the Copy From drop down menu select where you want to copy the curve from;
either Factory curves or User curves, then select the actual curve you want to copy.
Example: In this example we will copy from Factory curves and select the S-Curve:

Once you select the curve it will be immediately copied into the User Defined curve:
Example: Factory curve; S-Curve was copied into User Define 1:

Factory Curve: S-Curve

8. The curve can now be edited and named; See To edit a user defined curve

9. Save the curve by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar.

| 28
Invert Values

Invert Values
Selected Fixtures and Parameters can now be inverted to an opposite value by using a new option
called INVERT VALUE, which has been added to the Editor toolbar.

When using Invert Value, selected Fixtures that have parameter values highlighted in red will be
inverted, whereas when selected fixtures have no specific values selected, all the fixture
parameter values will be inverted.
Below are examples of using Invert Value for fixtures with and without parameter values
selected.
Example: Fixtures with parameter values selected.
[SPOT 1 → 5, @, 40]
Spot 1 to 5 is selected with dimmer output value of 40%:

INVERT VALUE is selected from the Editor Toolbar:

Result: The dimmer output value has been inverted from 40% to 60%.

29 |
Invert Values

Example: Fixtures with no specific parameter values selected.

[SPOT 1→ 5, INVERT VALUE]
Spot 1 to 5 is selected with all parameter values inverted:

Invert Value Sequences

The following is a list of Invert Value sequence examples and what they do:

Sequence What is does…

[SPOT, #, INVERT VALUE] Inverts all the values of the selected fixture.

[SPOT, #, →, #, INVERT VALUE] Inverts all the values of the selected fixtures.

[SPOT, #, PARAM, INVERT VALUE] Inverts only the selected parameter.

[SPOT, #, →, #, PARAM, INVERT VALUE] Inverts only the selected parameters of the
selected fixtures.

[SPOT, #, →, #, PARAM, PARAM, INVERT Inverts only the selected parameters of the
VALUE] selected fixtures.

TIP! Experiment using Invert with CMY and RGB parameters. You can also use Invert
with Pan/Tilt parameters.

| 30
Bypass Library Time

Bypass Library Time

When entering a library value into the editor, library time can be bypassed in which case CUT
time will be used. Library time can be bypassed by using the SHIFT key only if the default
library time in System Settings ► Timing tab is NOT Cut time.
Bypassing library time can be handy when inserting Gobo libs without a fade.

Sequence Examples to Bypass Library Time

 [SPOT, #, →, #, SHIFT + LIB]

 [SPOT, #, →, #, LIB, #, SHIFT+ENTER]
 [SHIFT+LIB, ENTER]
 [LIB. #, SHIFT+ENTER]

31 |
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

The Move function has been enhanced to enable you to move a single playback to another
playback or a range of playbacks to a range of playbacks on-the-fly. This is now achieved by
using the SELECT key. Playback Definitions and fader position (if motorized) of a selected
playback will also move to the new location.

What Playbacks can be moved?

Single, multiple or a range of PB’s can be selected and moved. All playbacks are movable; for
example:
 PB’s to PB’s and QK’s
 QK’s to QK’s, PB’s

Note the following:

 Assignments cannot be moved to and from the A/B.
 A mixed selection is not movable; for example, PB and QK.

Example of moving PB’s

4 PB’s have been setup with the following:
 PB 2/1; Qlist 3 with Playback Definition defined as GoRev (Go Reverse)
 PB 2/2; Chaser (Qlist 4) with Playback Definition defined as Rls (Release)
 PB 2/3; Qlist 5 with Playback Definition defined as GoRev (Go Reverse)
 PB 2/4; Temp Cue with Playback Definition defined as Hld/Bck (Hold/ Back)
Move PB 2/2 and PB 2/3 to PB 2/6 and PB 2/7 which are empty:

| 32
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Use the sequence:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB 2, SELECT PB 3, SELECT PB 6]

The above sequence will move the selected PB’s (PB 2/2 and PB 2/3) to PB 2/6 and PB 2/7:

In the above example, you can see that the Playback Definitions of the PB’s (Rls and GoRev) are
also moved to the new PB location.

Sequences to Move a Playback to an Empty Playback

When using the following sequences, the last SELECT in the sequence is the destination PB:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT #, SELECT#] This will move a single PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, SELECT#, SELECT#, This will move multiple PB’s.
ETC.]

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT #, ,#, SELECT #] This will move a range of PB’s.

33 |
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Moving a Playback to an occupied Playback

Playbacks can also be moved to occupied playbacks by using the @ key. When a playback is
occupied an “Occupied!” dialog will appear with options to; Overwrite All, Swap or Cancel.
 Overwrite All – This will overwrite all the existing PB information with the new PB
information.
 Swap – This swap the PB information around.
 Cancel – This will cancel the operation.

Sequences to Move a Playback to an occupied Playback

The @ key is used when moving a PB to an occupied PB. The last SELECT in the sequence is
the occupied destination PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, @, SELECT#] This sequence will move a single PB

to an occupied PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, SELECT#, SELECT#, @, This sequence will move multiple
SELECT#] PB’s to an occupied PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, , #, @, SELECT#] This sequence will move a range of

PB’s to an occupied PB.

| 34
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Illegal Destination error

When moving a range to a destination that overlaps the selected range, for example; moving
1→5 to 3, an error message will appear in the command line “ILLEGAL DESTINATION”

Destination Limit Exceeded error

When moving a range to a destination that exceeds its limits, an error message will appear in the
command line; “DESTINATION LIMIT EXCEEDED! SELECT A NEW DESTINATION”. The
range will still be on the clipboard allowing you to select a new destination.

Example:
If you select a range of PB’s and move them to Channel 10 on page 10, the destination range will
be exceeded as there is NO page 11.

Moving Playbacks to Qkeys and visa-versa

Playbacks can be moved to Qkeys and visa-versa by using the following sequences:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, QKEY#] This will move a single PB to a QK.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, SELECT PB#, This will move multiple PB’s to QK’s
SELECT PB#, QKEY#]

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, , SELECT PB#, This will move a range of PB’s to QK’s
QKEY#]

35 |
New Snap Options

New Snap Options

New Snap options have been added called “Include Current Master PB” and “Include Current
Page #” which enable you to store the current master PB and/or current page number when
storing a snap. A new snap option toolbar has been added for this purpose which is activated
every time the Snap key is pressed.
The snap options have also been added to the Snap Options section in the System Settings
(System Settings ► Playback tab), enabling you to set the snap option defaults for a show. The
default snap option will then always be triggered when a Snap key is pressed.
You can toggle between options on-the-fly by using the Snap Options toolbar without affecting
the snap default settings.
The Snap options will always be restored when a “New Show” is selected.

New Snap Options Toolbar New Snap Options in Systems Settings

Using the New Snap Options

The following explains the storing and loading of snaps using the new snap options:

| 36
New Snap Options

Snap Option Storing Loading

INCLUDE CURRENT MASTER PB When this option is When this option is

enabled, the current master enabled, the stored master
PB will be stored in the PB will be loaded to the
snap. snap.

INCLUDE CURRENT PAGE # When this option is When this option is

enabled, the current page enabled, the stored page
number will be stored in number will be loaded to
the snap. the snap.

Both snap options can be enabled for storing and loading.

Viewing the Stored Snap Information

When the new snap options are enabled, the stored snap information can be viewed from the
snap view window:

Stored Master PB Number

Stored Page Number

If a snap is stored with a snap option off, the text “None” will appear in the
relevant cell.

37 |
New Snap Options

Default Snap Options

Changing the default options will only be applied to new assignments. The Snap “Include”
default settings also affect how a snap is loaded.

To change default snap options

1. From the menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Under Snap Options enable or disable the desired “Include” option:

3. Click Apply to apply the new default setting.

4. Click OK to exit System Settings.

| 38
New Snap Options

Storing Master PB and/or Page number in Snap

Storing snaps using the “Include” options can be done on-the-fly or by using the “Include”
options default settings. See: Default Snap Options

Note: The sequences below use Action Mode. When using Enter Mode, end a
sequence with ENTER.

To store Master PB and/or Page number in a snap

Use the following sequence to perform operations on-the-fly:

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Enter a number on the numeric keypad.

3. Select a desired “Include” option to enable or disable.
4. Press STORE.

Use the following sequence to perform operations using the default snap settings:
1. Press STORE.
2. Select a number on the snap soft keys.
The snap will be stored using the default “Include” options. See: To change default
snap options.

39 |
New Snap Options

Loading a Snap with Include Master PB and/or Page Number

Loading snaps stored with Include Master PB and/or Page Number can be done on-the-fly or by
using the “Include” default settings. See: Default Snap Options.

To load a snap with Master PB and/or Page Number

Use the following sequence to perform operations on-the-fly:

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Select a desired “Include” option.

3. Select a stored snap from the soft keys.

-OR-

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Enter a snap number on the numeric keypad.

3. Select the desired “Include” option.
4. Press ENTER.

Use the following to perform operations using the default snap settings:
 Select a stored snap from the soft keys.
The snap will load according to the default “Include” snap options.
See: To change default snap options.

| 40
Tap Beat

Tap Beat
The Tap Beat feature enables you to set the Rate/Speed of a Chaser, Q-List or Effect by tapping
a beat. This is done by either tapping on the Beat key or defining a Tap Beat button to a Playback
key from the Playback Definitions. Beat pace can be set for all or selected Playbacks.

Using Tap Beat

The number of beat taps can be set for 2 taps, 4 taps or 8 taps from setting options in the Rate
toolbar. The Command line will also display the selected Tap Beat option. When you start
tapping, the Command line will show the amount of beats tapped.

Command line displaying the

selected Tap Beat option

Command line displaying the

amount of beats tapped; 1 beat
tapped out of 2

The Tap Beat options

The following is an explanation of each Tap Beat option:

TAP BEAT 2; enables you to tap 2 beats. The first tap will be the first beat and the
2nd tap will be the last beat; for example; tap tap

TAP BEAT 4; enables you to tap 4 beats. The first tap will be the first beat with
the 4th tap being the last; for example; tap tap tap tap

TAP BEAT 8; enables you to tap 8 beats. The first tap will be the first beat with
the 8th tap being the last, for example; tap tap tap tap tap tap tap tap

Setting the number of taps

The number of taps can be set once. You can reset the number of taps at any time by accessing
the Rate toolbar via the RATE key.
41 |
Tap Beat

To set number of taps

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

2. From the Rate toolbar, select a TAP BEAT button; 2, 4 or 8 number of taps:

The Command line will display the selected Tap Beat option, for example:

The console will store the selected Tap Beat setting until a new Tap Beat option is
chosen.

Setting a Beat using the Beat key

A beat can be set to; all, single, or multiple playbacks. The following sequences use the BEAT
key to set a beat.
Before setting a beat make sure you have some cues running such as an effect or chaser.

To set a beat to all playbacks

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

2. Using the BEAT key tap to a beat to set the beat.

The beat will be set to all playbacks.

To set a beat to a single or multiple playbacks

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

| 42
Tap Beat

2. Select a single or multiple of playbacks to set a beat:

Single PB sequence [SELECT PB#]

Multiple PB sequence [SELECT PB#, SELECT PB#, ETC.]

The Command line will display your selection; for example:

3. Using the BEAT key tap to a beat to set the beat.

The beat will now be set to the selected PB’s

Assigning Tap Beat to a Playback key

Tap Beat can be assigned to a Playback or Qkey button from the Playback Definition list which
can be used on-the-fly during live shows. The definition list can be accessed by selecting a PB
key from the Settings ► Playback tab OR from the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist properties.

When Tap Beat is assigned to a

PB key, the PB wing will
display the text “Beat”.

To assign Tap Beat from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

43 |
Tap Beat

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Tap Beat:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key

to assign Tap Beat.

4. From the Playback keys definition list select Tap Beat.

Tap Beat be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Tap Beat.
5. Click Apply to save the change.
To assign Tap Beat from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#]

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.

| 44
Tap Beat

2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key

to assign Tap Beat.

3. Select a playback key to assign Tap Beat.

4. From the Playback key definition list select Tap Beat.
Tap Beat will now be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Tap
Beat.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

Setting a beat using an assigned Tap Beat key

The following makes use of an assigned Tap Beat key that has been assigned to a playback key.
See: Assigning Tap Beat to a Playback key
Before setting a beat make sure you have some cues running such as an effect or chaser.

45 |
Tap Beat

To set a beat with an assigned Tap Beat key

 Press on the assigned Tap Beat key to set a beat.

| 46
Go Reverse

Go Reverse
Go Reverse is a new playback control feature that enables you to go in a reverse direction when
using cues. Go Reverse can be assigned to a PB key or Q-Key and will utilize the fade times of
cues including; Time-In, Time-Out, Delay-In, Delay-Out and Param-Time. Go Reverse also
enables you are to go from the first cue to the last cue in a Q-List instead of 0 (zero).
Example:
If there are 5 cues in a Q-List, by pressing on the assigned Go Reverse key, you will go back
from the last cue in the list which is 5, to cue 4, 3, 2 and then to cue 1, then back to cue 5:

Using Go Reverse to go
from first cue to last cue in
the list

Assigning Go Reverse to a Key

Assigning Go Reverse to a PB key or Q-Key is done by selecting the option from the PB Keys
Behavior list. The behavior list can be accessed by selecting a PB key from the Settings ►
Playback tab or the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist properties. The PB key text will change to
Go Reverse once assigned.
Go Reverse can be assigned only to a PB key on-the-fly from the Qlist properties in which case
the text GoRev will be displayed in the PB wing. Assigning Go Reverse from the System
Settings will only be applied to new assignments.

Go Reverse in the PB Keys Example of a PB Key Example of GoRev text on

Behavior list assigned to Go Reverse the PB wing

47 |
Go Reverse

To assign Go Reverse from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Go Reverse:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key

to assign Go Reverse.

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select Go Reverse.

Go Reverse be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Go Reverse.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

| 48
Go Reverse

To assign Go Reverse from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT #]

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key

to assign Go Reverse.

3. Select a playback key to assign Go Reverse.

4. From the Playback Key behaviour list select Go Reverse:
Go Reverse will now be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Go
Reverse.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

Go Reverse Sequences and Tips

The following is list of Go Reverse sequences and what they do:
49 |
Go Reverse

Sequence What is does…

[GO REVERSE] Cue will fade to the previous cue in the Q-List with
its cue times.

[CUE, #, SELECT, GO REVERSE] Cue will fade to the previous cue in the Q-List with
its cue time and will disregard the requested
pending cue.

[SHIFT + GO REVERSE] When using Go Reverse while holding down the

Shift key will cause the fade to occur in zero time.

| 50
Group Selection and Release via PB

Group Selection and Release via PB

 Group Release will release selected content from the editor.

In order to use Group Selection or Group Release; Cue’s, Temp-Cue’s etc. should be first created
on the PB’s.

Example of Group Selection

PB 1 has 5 Fixtures (1-5) and PB 2 has 5 Fixtures (6-10): The following PB keys have been
assigned to Group Selection:

Group
Selection
Fixtures 1-5 on PB 1 assigned
PB keys

Fixtures 6-10 on PB 2

If you select the assigned Group Selection key on PB 1 ,the group of Fixtures
1- 5 will be selected:

Selected content on PB 1

51 |
Group Selection and Release via PB

Example of Group Release

PB 1 has 5 Fixtures (1-5) with editor values: The following key on PB has been
assigned to Group Release:

Group
Release
assigned PB
key

PB 1 Fixtures with editor values

If you select the assigned Group Release key on PB 1, the group of selected Fixtures
will be released from the Editor:

PB 1 Fixtures have been released from

the editor

Note: The Fixtures will still be selected, moving any parameter wheel
will re-select the released fixtures.

| 52
Group Selection and Release via PB

Assigning Group Selection or Group Release to a Key

Assigning Group Selection or Group Release to a PB key or Q-Key is done from the PB Key
behavior list. The behavior list can be accessed by selecting a PB key or Q-Key from the
Settings ► Playback tab or the Playback Definitions tab in Qlist Properties. The key text will
change according to the function selected.
Group Selection and Group Release can be assigned only to a PB key on-the-fly from the Qlist
properties in which case the text GrpRel or GrpSel will be displayed in the PB wing. Assigning
them from the System Settings will only apply to new assignments.

Group Selection and Group Release in Example of an assigned Example of GrpSel and GrpRel
the PB Keys Behavior list PB Key text in the PB wing

GrpSel = Group Selection

GrpRel = Group Release

53 |
Group Selection and Release via PB

To assign Group Selection or Release from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

Select a PB key or
Q-Key to assign
either Group
Selection or Group
Release.

| 54
Group Selection and Release via PB

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select either Group Selection or Group
Release.
The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

To assign Group Selection or Release from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB key to assign

either Group Selection or
Group Release.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

4. From the PB Key behaviour list select either Group Selection or Group Release.
The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

55 |
System Lock

System Lock
The system lock feature enables you to lock the console using a 1 to 10 digit code. Once locked,
all panel keys, controllers, screens and access to windows will be disabled, except the numeric
keypad, enter and protect buttons.

Using System Lock

Locking and unlocking the system is done using the Protect key. A 1-10 digit code needs to be
chosen each time you lock the system. The same code will be used to unlock the system. Once
the system is locked, a Protect Mode message is displayed stating that the system is locked. This
activity is also seen on the command line with the text [LOCKED]:

Administrator Passcode
In case of a forgotten passcode, the administrator passcode can be used. This is a 6 digit code
that has been hard-coded in the system and cannot be changed.
The Administrator passcode is: 123456

Note: Turning the Console OFF and ON will unlock the system.

| 56
System Lock

To lock system

1. Press PROTECT.
The Command line will display the text [PROTECT]:

2. Using the numeric keypad, enter a passcode of 1-10 digits.

Example: 12233
The command line will display the passcode in the form of a star *.

3. Press ENTER.
The Protect Mode pop-up will appear confirming that the system is now locked. This
can also be seen in the command line with the text [LOCKED]

To unlock system

1. Press PROTECT
The command line will display the text [PROTECT]:

2. Using the numeric keypad, enter the passcode.

The command line will display the passcode in the form of a star *.
3. Press ENTER.
The Protect Mode pop-up will disappear indicating the system is now unlocked.
If the passcode is incorrect, an INCORRECT PASSWORD message will appear in the
command:

57 |
Vector Release Notes
Release Date: 25/12/2011

Real time version: 3.19.R02

Windows version: 3.19.R02

RT interface version: 3.19.R02

This version supports all Vector consoles

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Version Highlights

Version Highlights
1. Editing
1.1. User Defined Curves 8 User Defined curves have been added which
can be edited accordingly.

2. Playback
2.1. Enhanced Move Function Playbacks can now be moved to Playbacks on-
the-fly.

2.2. New Snap Options New snap options have been added which
enable you to store a current master PB and/or
current page number to a snap.

2.3. Tap Beat Tap Beat enables you to set the Rate speeds by
tapping on the BEAT button.

2.4. Go Reverse Go Reverse is a new playback control feature

that enables you to go in a reverse direction
when using cues.

2.5. Group Selection and Fixtures can now be selected and/or released
Release via PB by pressing on an assigned PB key or Q-Key.

1|
Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.19R02

Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.19R02

 Snaps that were saved with running/off status did not come up as “Saved”. This has been
fixed. Thanks to Stephen Plotkin, Canada.
 A Macro with Freeze Effect did not unfreeze on the second pass. Now only one Macro
can be used to freeze and unfreeze. Thanks to Moshiko Pe’er, Israel.
 Assigning or storing a range of cues to a range of playbacks did not work properly;
instead it was spreading the cues to Qkeys. This has been fixed. Thanks to Gerhard
Feiner, Germany.
 If the Autosave folder was moved or changed from the Vector Shows folder, an error
message occurred. This has been fixed and now the system will auto create the Autosave
folder again. Thanks to Eli Osawa, Tokyo.
 Copying a fixture or parameter did not work properly especially when selecting groups.
This has been fixed. Thanks Bill Peachment, UK.
 When attempting to update a Library on a show that was saved on an older software
version, produced an error message which was related to Mark-Cue. This has fixed.
Thanks to Gino DeLeo, David Winnik, Ronen Ben-Harosh, Italia, Israel.
 When assigning Delay In/Out times with a value smaller than 1 sec and using the decimal
dot (.), the result was a wrong value. This has been fixed. Thanks to Uri Morag, Israel.
 On some occasions, Vector did not download more than 180 thumbnails from Arkaos'
Media-Master. This has been fixed.
 On Vector orange, when loading a show that had DMX-In + Art-Net or DMX-In + ACN
enabled, caused a windows crash. This has been fixed. Thanks to Orit Freedman,
Holland.
 There was a crash using the sequence [FIXTURE, #, VIRTUAL DIMMER, @, RED,
Spin wheel] on a device that was using a virtual dimmer. This has been fixed. Thanks to
Stephen Plotkin, Canada.
 When loading a show from a previous version that had an infinite time setup to control
parameter, caused the infinite time to be around 10 minutes. This has been fixed. Thanks
to Pekka Rytilahti, Finland.
 The Park sequence was always selecting the whole fixture. Now it is possible to select
specific parameter/s that will be parked. This is done by the sequence:[FIXTURE, #, (→,
#), Move values, PARAM, PARAM,… (To select the parameters in RED),
SHIFT+PARK, STORE]. This sequence will also work to release parameters from park.
Thanks to Moshiko Peer and Speedy Cole, Israel & Matthias Kern, Switzerland.

|2
Important Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.19R02

 When working in Multi-Editors mode with the option "Take Multi-Editors" activated,
then updating objects did not take all the editors. Now when this flag is enabled, updating
objects will use all editors.
 When examining a PB after the key "PB/QKey Display" was pressed, the content of the
exam was incorrect. This has been fixed. Thanks to Raphael from Crystal, France.
 The Automatic Parameter Grouping flag from the Editing tab in the system settings was
not applied after exiting the System Settings. This has been fixed. Thanks to Orit
Freedman, Holland.
 The sequence of releasing fixtures from Sub-Masters did not work on some occasions.
This has been fixed. Thanks to Filip Wiesner, Austria.
 Wheel assignments did not page correctly when there were spaces between the
parameters on the wheels. Now paging will page exactly as stored in the device. Thanks
to Bonder, Israel.
 If a device had no Dimmer, Virtual Dimmer or RGB parameter patched, it caused odd
behavior to the system. This has been fixed. Thanks to David Bishop, UK.
 The sequence of [CUE, #, NEXT/PREV] did not work if the # (cue number) did not exist.
Now when doing this sequence on a non-existing cue and pressing NEXT/PREV then it
will give the nearest cue next/prev to the number that was entered. Thanks to Aviram
Shahinu, Israel.
 It was not possible to see 16 bit color parameters in the Matrix-List live view. This has
been fixed. Thanks to Jerry Roberto Romani, Italy & David Bishop, UK.

3|
Text Conventions

Text Conventions
The following text conventions exist in this document:
 The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS are in BOLD
CAPS.

 The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen BUTTONS are
BOLD ITALICIZED CAPS.
 Dialog boxes, Window titles and field names appear in this font.

 Sequences appear like this; [SEQUENCE, SEQUENCE].

 The word “Click” also refers to “tap”. This depends if you are using the mouse to “click”
or “tapping” on the touch screen.

|4
User Defined Curves

User Defined Curves

No:
Curves
cannot
be edited

Yes:
Curves
can be
edited

5|
User Defined Curves

Editing User Defined Curves

Active Point
is white

Non Active Point

is blue

Graph Editing Controls

The following is list of graph editing controls and what they do:

Controls What it does…

These controls are used to move the active point to the next or previous point
on the graph.

These shows the Input and Output points of the curve.

|6
User Defined Curves

Controls What it does…(Cont.)

This will add a point to the left of the active point. The point will be added in
the middle of the two points:
Example:
Note the
light Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
shade Active Point

The new point will be added in the middle of point 1 and point 2. (To the left
of point 2 – Active point)

This will delete an active point only. Click on a point to make it an active
point and then press the delete button.

This will add a point to the right of the active point. The point will be added
in the middle of the two points:
Example:
Note
the Point 1 Point 2 Point 3
light Active Point
shade

The new point will be added in the middle of point 2 and point 3. (To the
right of point 2 – Active point)

Hide or show grid icon.

Copy From enables you to copy a curve from either Factory curves or User
defined curves and automatically pastes it to the current open User defined
window.

7|
User Defined Curves

To edit a user defined curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

Select a User
Defined curve to
edit.

|8
User Defined Curves

The User Defined curve window will open.

Example:
User Define1 was selected:

Active point (White Point)

6. Add points to the graph using the plus button; or .

For example; one point was added using the right plus button:

Point 2

Point was added in

the middle of point
1 and point 2

Point 1

9|
User Defined Curves

TIP! You can add a point by double clicking the mouse on the graph line.

7. Using the mouse, left click and hold on the active point and drag the point to the
desired location:
Example:

8. To add more points go back to step 6.

9. Save the curve by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar:

Press to
save curve

| 10
User Defined Curves

To name a curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

6. Double click on the User Define curve you want to name.

Example:

Double click to
name curve

7. Type in the name of the curve.

8. Save the curve name by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar:

11 |
User Defined Curves

The curve name will be changed in the Workspace Tree and the Curve grid:
Example:

To copy a curve

1. Open the Patch Manager; Tools ► Patch Manager.

| 12
User Defined Curves

Once you select the curve it will be immediately copied into the User Defined curve:
Example: Factory curve; S-Curve was copied into User Define 1:

Factory Curve: S-Curve

8. The curve can now be edited and named; See To edit a user defined curve

9. Save the curve by clicking on the tick button on the Patch Manager toolbar.
13 |
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

What Playbacks can be moved?

Single, multiple or a range of PB’s can be selected and moved. All playbacks are movable; for
example:
 PB’s to PB’s and QK’s
 QK’s to QK’s, PB’s

Note the following:

 Assignments cannot be moved to and from the A/B.
 A mixed selection is not movable; for example, PB and QK.

Example of moving PB’s

| 14
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Use the sequence:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB 2, SELECT PB 3, SELECT PB 6]

The above sequence will move the selected PB’s (PB 2/2 and PB 2/3) to PB 2/6 and PB 2/7:

In the above example, you can see that the Playback Definitions of the PB’s (Rls and GoRev) are
also moved to the new PB location.

Sequences to Move a Playback to an Empty Playback

When using the following sequences, the last SELECT in the sequence is the destination PB:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT #, SELECT#] This will move a single PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, SELECT#, SELECT#, This will move multiple PB’s.
ETC.]

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT #, ,#, SELECT #] This will move a range of PB’s.

15 |
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Moving a Playback to an occupied Playback

 Cancel – This will cancel the operation.

Sequences to Move a Playback to an occupied Playback

The @ key is used when moving a PB to an occupied PB. The last SELECT in the sequence is
the occupied destination PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, @, SELECT#] This sequence will move a single PB

to an occupied PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, SELECT#, SELECT#, @, This sequence will move multiple
SELECT#] PB’s to an occupied PB.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT#, , #, @, SELECT#] This sequence will move a range of

PB’s to an occupied PB.

| 16
Moving Playbacks to Playbacks

Illegal Destination error

When moving a range to a destination that overlaps the selected range, for example; moving
1→5 to 3, an error message will appear in the command line “ILLEGAL DESTINATION”

Destination Limit Exceeded error

Example:
If you select a range of PB’s and move them to Channel 10 on page 10, the destination range will
be exceeded as there is NO page 11.

Moving Playbacks to Qkeys and visa-versa

Playbacks can be moved to Qkeys and visa-versa by using the following sequences:

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, QKEY#] This will move a single PB to a QK.

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, SELECT PB#, This will move multiple PB’s to QK’s
SELECT PB#, QKEY#]

[SHIFT, MOVE, SELECT PB#, , SELECT PB#, This will move a range of PB’s to QK’s
QKEY#]

17 |
New Snap Options

New Snap Options

New Snap Options Toolbar New Snap Options in Systems Settings

| 18
New Snap Options

Using the New Snap Options

The following explains the storing and loading of snaps using the new snap options:

Snap Option Storing Loading

INCLUDE CURRENT MASTER PB When this option is When this option is

enabled, the current master enabled, the stored master
PB will be stored in the PB will be loaded to the
snap. snap.

INCLUDE CURRENT PAGE # When this option is When this option is

enabled, the current page enabled, the stored page
number will be stored in number will be loaded to
the snap. the snap.

Both snap options can be enabled for storing and loading.

Viewing the Stored Snap Information

When the new snap options are enabled, the stored snap information can be viewed from the
snap view window:

Stored Master PB Number

Stored Page Number

If a snap is stored with a snap option off, the text “None” will appear in the
relevant cell.

19 |
New Snap Options

Default Snap Options

Changing the default options will only be applied to new assignments. The Snap “Include”
default settings also affect how a snap is loaded.

To change default snap options

1. From the menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Under Snap Options enable or disable the desired “Include” option:

3. Click Apply to apply the new default setting.

4. Click OK to exit System Settings.

| 20
New Snap Options

Storing Master PB and/or Page number in Snap

Storing snaps using the “Include” options can be done on-the-fly or by using the “Include”
options default settings. See: Default Snap Options

Note: The sequences below use Action Mode. When using Enter Mode, end a
sequence with ENTER.

To store Master PB and/or Page number in a snap

Use the following sequence to perform operations on-the-fly:

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Enter a number on the numeric keypad.

3. Select a desired “Include” option to enable or disable.
4. Press STORE.

21 |
New Snap Options

Loading a Snap with Include Master PB and/or Page Number

Loading snaps stored with Include Master PB and/or Page Number can be done on-the-fly or by
using the “Include” default settings. See: Default Snap Options.

To load a snap with Master PB and/or Page Number

Use the following sequence to perform operations on-the-fly:

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Select a desired “Include” option.

3. Select a stored snap from the soft keys.

-OR-

1. Press SNAP.
The snap toolbar will be displayed:

2. Enter a snap number on the numeric keypad.

3. Select the desired “Include” option.
4. Press ENTER.

| 22
Tap Beat

Using Tap Beat

Command line displaying the

selected Tap Beat option

Command line displaying the

amount of beats tapped; 1 beat
tapped out of 2

The Tap Beat options

The following is an explanation of each Tap Beat option:

TAP BEAT 2; enables you to tap 2 beats. The first tap will be the first beat and the
2nd tap will be the last beat; for example; tap tap

TAP BEAT 4; enables you to tap 4 beats. The first tap will be the first beat with
the 4th tap being the last; for example; tap tap tap tap

TAP BEAT 8; enables you to tap 8 beats. The first tap will be the first beat with
the 8th tap being the last, for example; tap tap tap tap tap tap tap tap

23 |
Tap Beat

Setting the number of taps

The number of taps can be set once. You can reset the number of taps at any time by accessing
the Rate toolbar via the RATE key.

To set number of taps

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

2. From the Rate toolbar, select a TAP BEAT button; 2, 4 or 8 number of taps:

The Command line will display the selected Tap Beat option, for example:

The console will store the selected Tap Beat setting until a new Tap Beat option is
chosen.

Setting a Beat using the Beat key

To set a beat to all playbacks

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

2. Using the BEAT key tap to a beat to set the beat.

The beat will be set to all playbacks.

| 24
Tap Beat

To set a beat to a single or multiple playbacks

1. Press the RATE key.

The Command line will display the following:

2. Select a single or multiple of playbacks to set a beat:

Single PB sequence [SELECT PB#]

Multiple PB sequence [SELECT PB#, SELECT PB#, ETC.]

The Command line will display your selection; for example:

3. Using the BEAT key tap to a beat to set the beat.

The beat will now be set to the selected PB’s

Assigning Tap Beat to a Playback key

When Tap Beat is assigned to a

PB key, the PB wing will
display the text “Beat”.

25 |
Tap Beat

To assign Tap Beat from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Tap Beat:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key

to assign Tap Beat.

4. From the Playback keys definition list select Tap Beat.

Tap Beat be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Tap Beat.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

| 26
Tap Beat

To assign Tap Beat from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#]

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key

to assign Tap Beat.

3. Select a playback key to assign Tap Beat.

4. From the Playback key definition list select Tap Beat.
Tap Beat will now be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Tap
Beat.
5. Click OK to close the Qlist Properties dialog.

27 |
Tap Beat

Setting a beat using an assigned Tap Beat key

To set a beat with an assigned Tap Beat key

 Press on the assigned Tap Beat key to set a beat.

| 28
Go Reverse

Using Go Reverse to go
from first cue to last cue in
the list

Assigning Go Reverse to a Key

Go Reverse in the PB Keys Example of a PB Key Example of GoRev text on

Behavior list assigned to Go Reverse the PB wing

29 |
Go Reverse

To assign Go Reverse from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign Go Reverse:

Select a PB fader key or Q-Key

to assign Go Reverse.

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select Go Reverse.

Go Reverse be assigned and the selected key option text will change to Go Reverse.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

| 30
Go Reverse

To assign Go Reverse from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT #]

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB fader key

to assign Go Reverse.

3. Select a playback key to assign Go Reverse.

31 |
Go Reverse

Go Reverse Sequences and Tips

The following is list of Go Reverse sequences and what they do:

Sequence What is does…

[GO REVERSE] Cue will fade to the previous cue in the Q-List with
its cue times.

[CUE, #, SELECT, GO REVERSE] Cue will fade to the previous cue in the Q-List with
its cue time and will disregard the requested
pending cue.

[SHIFT + GO REVERSE] When using Go Reverse while holding down the

Shift key will cause the fade to occur in zero time.

| 32
Group Selection and Release via PB

Group Selection and Release via PB

Fixtures can now be selected and/or released by pressing on an assigned PB key or Q-Key. A key
can either be assigned to function as a Group Selection or Group Release key. Content can be
selected whether the PB fader is active or not.
 Group Selection will select all content (Channels, Spots, etc.) on a cue or temp cue.
 Group Release will release selected content from the editor.
In order to use Group Selection or Group Release; Cue’s, Temp-Cue’s etc. should be first created
on the PB’s.

Example of Group Selection

PB 1 has 5 Fixtures (1-5) and PB 2 has 5 Fixtures (6-10): The following PB keys have been
assigned to Group Selection:

Group
Selection
Fixtures 1-5 on PB 1 assigned
PB keys

Fixtures 6-10 on PB 2

If you select the assigned Group Selection key on PB 1 ,the group of Fixtures
1- 5 will be selected:

Selected content on PB 1

33 |
Group Selection and Release via PB

Example of Group Release

PB 1 has 5 Fixtures (1-5) with editor values: The following key on PB has been
assigned to Group Release:

Group
Release
assigned PB
key

PB 1 Fixtures with editor values

If you select the assigned Group Release key on PB 1, the group of selected Fixtures
will be released from the Editor:

PB 1 Fixtures have been released from

the editor

Note: The Fixtures will still be selected, moving any parameter wheel
will re-select the released fixtures.

| 34
Group Selection and Release via PB

Assigning Group Selection or Group Release to a Key

Group Selection and Group Release in Example of an assigned Example of GrpSel and GrpRel
the PB Keys Behavior list PB Key text in the PB wing

GrpSel = Group Selection

GrpRel = Group Release

35 |
Group Selection and Release via PB

To assign Group Selection or Release from System Settings

1. From the Menu bar select Tools ► Settings ► Playback tab.

2. Select the Default PB Definitions option:

The PB Key options will become active.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

Select a PB key or
Q-Key to assign
either Group
Selection or Group
Release.

| 36
Group Selection and Release via PB

4. From the PB Keys Behavior list select either Group Selection or Group Release.
The new function will be applied to the key and the text name will change.
5. Click Apply to save the change.

To assign Group Selection or Release from Qlist Properties

1. Press [SETUP, PB SELECT#].

The Qlist Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the Playback Definitions tab:

Select a PB key to assign

either Group Selection or
Group Release.

3. Select a PB key to assign.

37 |
Vector Release Notes
Release Date: 3/04/2011

Real time version: 3.19R01

Windows version: 3.19R01

RT interface version: 3.19R01

Firmware file updates are required for:

 Remote Editor Wing: Version 28

The following Macro Keys have changed:

SEE Quick Access to MACRO’s

(Please contact your local Compulite distributor for replacement keys)

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
IMPORTANT NOTES!!

IMPORTANT NOTES!!
Please note the following before continuing!
In this version we added more options to the System Settings.
The following list is new options that are disabled by default (Previously they were always
enabled); this is relevant for new shows and saved shows from previous software versions:

 The Remote Control is now DISABLED by default. See Remote Control Enable /
Disable

 SMPTE and MTC new buttons are DISABLED by default. Any external trigger (SMPTE
or MIDI Time Code) will be ignored unless you enable the relevant SMPTE or MIDI
Time Code button. See SMPTE Midi Enable / Disable

 “Activate Snap On Load” is DISABLED by default. Saved shows from previous

versions will be loaded to the default setting. See Vector Snap Enhancements

We recommend using 2GB of RAM for better performance while

using this version on Vector PC. (3.19)

1|
Version Highlights

Version Highlights
In this version we added more than 40 new devices and updated 80:

1. Display
1.1. View Properties Button A new View Properties button was added to
the pane title of any grid or soft key view:

1.2. Master PB Indication Enhancement The Playback key on the Faders Mode can be
used to display the Master PB on the Faders
Mode LCD.

1.3. Clock and Date View A Digital and Analog clock was added
together with a Date view.

2. Matrix
2.1. Live Matrix Zoom Function You now have full zoom function control
while in Live view; Zoom in/out and Fit To
Screen. These controls are found on the pane
title of the Matrix programmer live view.

2.2. Increased Matrix Width / Height in The Matrix width or Height can now be
the Patch manager increased to 10,000. The max cells
width/height is still 40,000.

2.3. Clear Selection A Clear Selection button was added to the

Matrix Programmer. Now you can clear a
selection by a click of a button:

See Vector Reference Guide;

Chapter 11, Page 292 on how to display the
Matrix programmer.

3. Editing
3.1. Vector @ Key Enhancement This enables only the dimmer intensity
parameter value to be affected each time you
use the @ Key.

|2
Version Highlights

3.2. Fan Enhancements  You are now able to activate the Fan
3.2.1. Fan From Step to Step mode by selecting the Fixture’s, then
pressing the Fan key.
 Now you can change a range of
Fixtures while in Fan mode.
 You can Fan from one step to another
using the Step Picker (Color Wheel
Picker, Gobo Picker and Media Server
Picker etc.)
 Now you are able to go from value to
value using a shorter sequence.

3.3. Prohibit Mark Cue Vector will now protect Mark cues from being
manipulated. However you can still edit the
timing properties and the name of the mark
cue.

3.4. Move Function  The Move function enables you to

move objects such as cue’s, groups,
libraries etc.
 More sequences where added for Copy
and Cut in Enter Mode Syntax.

3.5. Effect Editor Improvements  Now you can assign an exact value
using the keypad.
 The Release button has been
enhanced.
 A Pre Build effect can now be run on
parameters of the same type, example;
RGB

4. Playback
4.1. Direct PB operations You are now able to do PB operations, for
example; assign Qlists, release PB’s etc.,
directly from the PB wing view.

4.2. Vector Snap Enhancements A new option was added that enables you to
choose if the PB will be released or activated
when loading a show, for example; “Activate
the snap on load”.

3|
Version Highlights

5. Patch Manager
5.1. Apply and Continue Wizard Now you are able to apply a patch and
continue working in the same wizard dialog
without re-opening the wizard after every
operation.

6. System Settings
6.1. SMPTE Midi Enable / Disable  You now have the ability to control
the signals from SMPTE, MTC, MIDI
In and MIDI Out.
 A larger clock view was added to the
active TimeLine view screen.

6.2. Remote Control Enable / Disable A Remote Control Application’s option was
added to allow you to enable or disable the
ability for an external application to connect
to the console. This option can be found in the
Network tab:
Tools ► System Settings ► Network
The Remote Control Application’s option is
DISABLED by default. Enable the option so
that an external application can connect.
(iControl, iControl App & Remote PC Panel).

You will still be able to see the console in

the console list on the remote application,
however, the console will NOT respond
until you ENABLE the remote control in
that console.

Note: External hardware (Editor,

Playback and Channel wing), can still be
connected to the console if the Remote
Control Application’s option is either enabled
or disabled.

|4
Version Highlights

7. Desktop
7.1. Desktop Enhancements A bunch of new desktop enhancements where
added:
 Stage Element support:
There are 16 elements that can be
dragged onto the Desktop. Each
element can be manipulated to change
size, angel, line thickness and line
color.
 Ability to add shortcuts from the
windows explore to the desktop.
 Printing ability
 Undo changes
 A new Layers Toolbar that enables
you to define layers, lock layers and
decide which layers you want to
display.

8. General Improvements
8.1. Export Show to ASCII Vector now supports ASCII show file export
according to the ASCII Standard Protocol.

8.2. Import ASCII Show File Enhanced Import ASCII Show file now supports:
 Proportional Patch Level
 Cue Link

8.3. WIN SCROLL Mode Enhancements 6 new functions where added to the WIN
SCROLL mode.

8.4. Locked Columns Enhancement A thicker and brighter line can now be seen
when you lock columns on a grid view.

8.5. Blind Enhancements It is now possible to copy the editor values

into the Blind editor.

8.6. Import Devices Improvements You are now able to select multiple devices
from the Import Device tree as you would in
windows.(CTRL or SHIFT)

5|
Version Highlights

8.7. Delete / Clear Patch in reverse Now you can delete or clear a patch in reverse
order order in the Clear Patch dialog from the Patch
manager.

8.8. VC Compressed Indication When you use VC Compressed, the indication

bar will now indicate VC’c.

8.9. Workspace Improvement Now if you have only one workspace, there
will be no workspace indication tab until you
add another workspace. This helps save
screen space. See Workspace example.

8.10. Range Information The Modify or patch dialog title bar now
contains range information.
See Modify and Patch Information
Improvement.

8.11. Import / Export shows Enhanced The new Import / Export Show’s menu now
Menu contains all the Import and Export show
options:
 Import Partial Show
 Import 4D Show
 Import Sabre Show
 Import ASCII Show
 Export Show To ASCII

8.12. Using PB in Cut Time You are now able to manipulate PB content
by using the [SHIFT] key together with a PB
key.

|6
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.19.R01

Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.19.R01

1. When using DMX input on Fixtures with high Fixture numbers (example; 1000), after
loading that show, the DMX input was deleted. This has been fixed. Thanks Bill Peachment,
Little Mouse Production, David Bishop & Ian Reith, UK.
2. The column order of the DMX Port view was misleading. Now the first field is the Fixture
name. Thanks to Alone Cohen, Israel
3. If a text of a “point cue” contained zero at the end, the text did not show on the SK view.
This has been fixed now. Thanks Raphael Ollier, Crystal Equipment, France and our French
distributor and his clients.
4. Pressing again on an enabled button in the pre-built tab was not possible. When the PB
definition was enabled (in the system settings), and you were working in main master Qlist
mode, [STORE, CUE, SELECT] was not using the single cue definition.
5. When a PB fader behavior was X-Fader and the fader was at zero position, raising the fader
after [Qlist, #, Cue, #, SELECT] did not work the first, but worked the second time. If the
fader is at full position it must be taken down and then up again. This has been fixed. Thanks
to Gino De-Leo, Spotlight and RAI TV, Italy.
6. [FIXTURE, #, FULL/ON/ZERO] on an RGB Fixture with a virtual dimmer was not possible.
7. When a RGB device had a Dimmer parameter and you stored cues on a fader that was set as
intensity, taking down the fader also took down the RGB values. This is now fixed. Thanks
Bill Peachment & Ian Rieth, UK.
8. When fanning values with [90% →10], the spread negative was activated and if pressed
again the data changes where incorrectly calculated. This has been fixed.
9. When using HOME or RELEASE key while in REM Dim mode, kicked you out of the
mode. This is now fixed. Thanks David Winnik (Vini), Israel.
10. When examining an A/B or PB that was active, the console showed the preview instead of
the Exam tab. This has been fixed. Thanks Sabi at House of Tradition (MUPA), Hungry.
11. When using the blackout key, or grand master, the "fine" parameter of the 16 Bit dimmer did
not change to 0% and therefore the console did not black-out. This is now fixed. Thanks
David Bishop, David Bishop Lighting, UK.
13. [UPDATE, Cue Only] on a cue before a mark cue or a force black cue, was ignoring the cue
only function. This has been fixed. Thanks Orit freedman, BEO, Netherlands.

7|
Operating New Features

Operating New Features

ATTENTION!

This Vector documentation contains both Action and Enter procedure syntax. Procedures that
use Action syntax are preceded by: procedures that use Enter syntax are preceded by:

Limitations
 When dimming desk lights, FULL, ON, or ZR will only work after the Wheel has been
moved.
 Beat is not implemented yet.
 In Try Cue, the parameter time progress will not displayed.
 Qlist and Cue cannot be set as the Numeric default in the Command line.
 Interactive Fixture selection does not work on a console designated for slave or node.
 Matrix and Topo selection does not work on a console designated for slave or node.
 Cue numbers in Qlists on time-lines will not be updated when re-numbering Cues.
**Work around: Re-number before teaching the time-line.

|8
The View Properties Button

The View Properties Button

The View Properties button which replaces the Soft Key editor button enables you to change
properties according to the view type on any soft key or grid views. The View Properties option
can be accessed from; the pane title, right click menu or View menu ► View Properties.
For example:
To change the SK view properties

 Click on the View Properties button on the SK view pane title bar.
-OR-
 Right click, select View Properties.
-OR-
 From the View menu select View Properties.
View Properties
button on the
pane title

To change the Grid view properties

 Click on the View Properties button on the Grid view pane title bar.
-OR-
 Right click, select View Properties.
-OR-
 From the View menu select View Properties.
View Properties
button

9|
Clock and Date View

Clock and Date View

The Clocks and Date view options have been added to the Workspace tree ► Editor Tool’s ►
System Time:

To add a clock or date

 From the Workspace Tree, click on System Time; choose a clock or date or both.
(Each one will be in a separate tab view)

Each clock and date view will be resized automatically when you change the tab size. By double
clicking on the actual clock or date will bring up the PC’s Date and Time Properties box:

| 10
Master PB Indication on the Faders Mode LCD

Master PB Indication on the Faders Mode LCD

By pressing and holding down the Playback key on the Faders Mode, will display the Master PB
in the Faders Mode LCD. This feature works for all Vector models.

Faders Mode LCD displaying

the Master PB

11 |
Vector @ Key Enhancement

Vector @ Key Enhancement

A new button has been added to the System Settings ► Editing tab, called “@ Key For
Intensity Only”:

New added key to

the Editing tab

When the @ Key For Intensity Only is enabled, only the dimmer intensity parameter value will
be affected each time you use the @ Key. The keys; ZERO, FULL and ON will also default to the
intensity parameter, not to the last selected parameter.
You can also use ZERO, FULL and ON for parameters but only if the parameter key is pressed
directly before you press ZERO, FULL or ON.
The @ Key For Intensity Only is saved in the show data, so you can decide if to enable it per
show.

NOTE: Old shows will be loaded with the @ Key For Intensity Only disabled.

When the @ Key For Intensity Only is enabled, you are also able to select and change multiple
parameters by using the following sequences:
 [Param, Param, enter value]
 [Param, Param, FULL/ON/ZERO]

If the @ Key For Intensity Only is disabled, then the last selected parameter will be affected by
the @ Key, (Which is how it has always worked)

NOTE: Decimal value input [SHIFT+@], is not affected by the @ Key For Intensity Only
function key.

| 12
Vector @ Key Enhancement

Examples:
When the @Key For Intensity Only is disabled:

Sequence:
1. Select a FIXTURE, example; Spot 1.
2. Select a parameter, example; Cyan.
3. Press the @ key and enter a value using the keypad, example; 75.
The Cyan parameter will be changed to value 75.

When the @Key For Intensity Only is enabled:

Sequence 1:
1. Select a FIXTURE, example; Spot 1.
2. Select a parameter, example; Cyan.
3. Press the @ key. (Once you press the @ key the parameter selection will automatically
change to the dimmer intensity parameter).
4. Enter a value using the keypad, example 75.
The dimmer intensity parameter value will be changed to 75 without Cyan being
changed.

Sequence 2: - Selecting multiple parameters:

1. Select a FIXTURE, example; Spot 1.
2. Press the @ key.
3. Select parameter, parameter, enter a value, example:
[Cyan, Magenta, 45]
-OR-
1. Select a FIXTURE, example; Spot 1.
2. Press the @ key.
3. Select parameter, parameter, enter a value, example:
[Cyan, Magenta, FULL]

13 |
Vector @ Key Enhancement

When the @ Key For Intensity Only is enabled or disabled

Sequence 1:
This sequence will work regardless if the @ Key For Intensity Only is enabled or disabled.
1. Select a FIXTURE, example; Spot 1.
2. Select a parameter, example; Cyan.
3. Enter a value using the keypad, example 75.
The Cyan parameter will be changed to value 75.

| 14
Fan Enhancements

Fan Enhancements
The new Fan enhancement gives you a faster way of using the Fan feature without exiting the
Fan mode. You are now able to activate the Fan mode by selecting the Fixture’s, then pressing
the Fan key, and then selecting a parameter, or you can use the previous sequence of activating
the Fan feature [Fixture # → # select parameter, FAN].
A new soft-key attribute has also been added to the Fan Toolbar which is the Fan Inward Mirror
button:

Fan Inward Mirror key

The Fan Inward Mirror key

The Fan Inward Mirror button enables you to fan from the outside to the center. The Fan
Inward Mirror button is the opposite of the Fan Outward Mirror button .

Using the new Fan Mode

When you are in Fan mode, the Fan key LED will be lit and the command line will display
[FAN] together with the current selected Fan parameter, for example:

As soon as a parameter key is pressed or a parameter wheel is moved, the indication on the
command line will show [FAN_*_], indicating that a parameter is in active Fan mode.

When using the new sequence of activating the Fan [Fixture # → #, Fan], the last used Fan
parameter will be selected. (The default Fan parameter is Fan Center Diagonal).

Last selected Fan parameter

NOTE: When using the previous sequence, [Fixture # → # @ # → #], out of the Fan
mode, the default fan direction will still be the Fan Side Right button.

15 |
Fan Enhancements

After the Fan feature is activated using the sequence [Fixture # → #, Fan], you are then able to
select a parameter, such as yellow, and then Fan it using the wheel of that parameter.
After selecting a fan option, the system will always default back to the last used fan option until
you select a different fan type or reboot the console.

Example:
If you are using the Fan Side Left option to fan spots 1-5, then you select spots 6-10, the
minute you press the Fan key the system will default to the last used fan option which
was the Fan Side Left option.
When you select a parameter to fan, the fan will stay on that parameter until you select another
parameter, in which case you will need to press the Fan key again to activate the fan for that
parameter.

Example:

If you have selected the Cyan parameter to fan, and then you select the Magenta
parameter to fan, the minute you select the Magenta parameter the console will exit the
fan mode until you press the Fan key again.

To exit the Fan mode

 Press either Fan, ENTER (in ENTER Mode), Clear or Reset.

The Fan key LED will turn OFF and [FAN] will disappear from the command line.

Fan mode sequences

These are the sequences that can be used to activate the Fan mode:
 Select Fixtures, FAN, then adjust fan with a parameter wheel.
 Select Fixtures, Select parameter, FAN, then adjust fan with the selected parameter
wheel.
 [Fixture # → #, @, # → #]
 [Fixture # → #, Select a parameter, # → #]
 [Fixture # → #, FAN, @, # → #]
 [Fixture # → #, FAN, Select a parameter, # → #]
 Using the Step Picker [Fixture # → # STEP → STEP]. See Fan Parameter from Step to
Step.
 Using the Media Server Picker [Fixture # → # STEP → STEP]. See Fan Parameter from
Step to Step.

| 16
Fan Enhancements

 We also added a sequence to make it easier to go from:

 Value to value to value etc.:
[Fixture # → #, @, # → # → # → # → # → # → #...etc. etc]
-OR-
 Using the Step Picker:
[Fixture # → #, STEP → STEP → STEP → STEP…etc]

NOTE: You can change the Fixture selection while in fan mode as long you keep
working on the same parameter.

17 |
Fan Parameter from Step to Step

Fan Parameter from Step to Step

This new features enables you to Fan from one step to another using the Step Picker (Color
Wheel Picker, Gobo Picker and Media Server Picker etc.)

Using the Step to Step Fan Feature

The Step to Step Fan feature is now similar to the sequence of value to value:
[Fixture, # →# @ # →#]
You are now able to use the same sequence using Steps from a Picker. This sequence can be
used whether you are in Fan mode or not.

For example;
1. Select a range of Fixtures.
2. Open a picker from a parameter, for example; double tap on color wheel to open the color
wheel picker.
3. From the picker, tap on a step, for example; Red.
4. Press on the “Thru” key →.
The console will now enter into Fan mode.
5. From the picker, tap on another step, for example; Orange.
The selected range of Fixtures is now fanned from Red to Orange.
6. Repeat point 4 – 5, to carry on fanning from step to step.

Tip! You can change the Fan attributes from the Fan toolbar.

Note the following:

When you Fan using pickers, if the Fixtures in the selected range are from
different device types, the Fan will be from the start point of the step you choose
from the active picker, until the end step you choose from the active picker. This
will actually spread the result values of that parameter type to all the active
devices.
Example; If you work with VL3000 Spot and Mac III Spot, assigning values to
both of these Fixtures range from the color wheel picker of the VL, from step 2
(24%, Orange) to step 7 (72%, Deep Red), the values of the Fan on the whole
range will be fixture 1 color wheel at 24% until the last fixture at level of 72%,
This will happen even though the actual step value and content on either of the
device type are not necessarily a Deep Red color but the device value of the color
wheel at 72%.

| 18
Prohibit Mark Cue Data Modifications

Prohibit Mark Cue Data Modifications

You are now prohibited from editing the Mark Cue, except the timing properties and the name of
the mark cue. If you try to update, overwrite or store on an existing mark cue, the console will
prompt you with “Mark cue cannot be edited”. You are still able to delete a mark cue.
If a mark cue already exists and you try to re-store the mark cue, then the console will prompt
you with “Object Exists” together with an option to “Overwrite”.

Updating an Active Mark Cue

If a Mark cue is active on the PB and you update that mark cue using the Update dialog
[Update], the command line will show the error message “MARK CUE CAN NOT BE EDITED”
and the Update dialog will open. The Update dialog will show the Cue before the Mark cue that
you are trying to update. You will now have the option to update the cue before the Mark cue or
update a different cue.

Example:
1. [Spot 1-10, HOME, Channel 1-10, @ 50%, Cue 1, Store]
2. [Spot 1-10, ZERO, Cue 2, Store]
3. [Spot 1-10, FL, Pan Tilt changes, Cue 3, Store]
4. [Cue 2.5, Mark Cue, Store]
5. Go to cue 2 on the PB, the console will automatically fade to the mark cue (2.5)
6. [Channel 1- 10, @ 80%, Update]
The Update dialog will open showing Cue 2 (which is the cue before the Mark cue) and
the Command line will indicate “MARK CUE CAN NOT BE EDITED”:

19 |
The Move Function

The Move Function

The Move function enables you to move objects such as cue’s, groups, libraries etc. This is a
faster and easier way without using the cut and paste functions. We also enhanced the Copy and
Cut sequences to work in Enter mode. (Meaning now you can start with an action, e.g. [Copy])

Sequences to move objects

The following sequences are used to move objects by either using the keypad or soft keys. These
sequences can also be used with Copy and CUT.

To move an object using the keypad

1. [SHIFT + MOVE]
2. Press on the object key that you want to move, e.g. [Group], [Qlist] etc.
3. Type in the object number that you want to move.
4. Press @ key.
5. Enter in the target number (The place number to move the object to)

6. [Store]
-OR-

7. [ENTER] / [Store]

Example:

In this example we will move Group 1 to Group 10:

1. [SHIFT + Move]
2. Press [Group] and type 1 on the keypad.
The command line will indicate the following:

3. Press the [@] key.

The command line will indicate the following:

4. Enter target number 10

5. Press [Store] / [ENTER]
The command line will indicate the following:

| 20
The Move Function

To move a range of objects using the keypad

1. [SHIFT + MOVE]
2. Press on the object key that you want to move, e.g. [Group], [Qlist] etc.
3. Select the range [# → #]
4. Press [@] key.
5. Enter in the target number. (The place number to move the object to)

6. [Store]
-OR-

7. [ENTER] / [Store]

Example:
In this example we will move Group 1-5 to Group 8:
1. [SHIFT + Move]
2. Press [Group, 1 → 5]
The command line will indicate the following:

3. Press the [@] key.

The command line will indicate the following:

4. Enter target number 8.

5. Press [Store] / [ENTER]
The command line will indicate the following:

21 |
The Move Function

The above image shows that the group range 1 -5 was moved to group range 8-12.

NOTE: If an object already exists in the target place, a pop-up message will appear giving
you the option to either overwrite the existing or Swap the existing:

ATTENTION! By default the numeric object type is Cue.

For example;
If you have Qlist 1 on the Master PB, which has cues 1-5, as soon as you start the
sequence [MOVE, 4], the system will know you are referring to cue 4 from Qlist 1.

| 22
The Move Function

To move an object using the soft keys

Sequence 1

1. [SHIFT + MOVE]
2. Select or Tap on the object to move.
3. Select or Tap on the target soft key.( If the SK is empty)
-OR-
4. Press @
5. Select or tap on any target soft key.

Sequence 2

1. Press and Hold down [SHIFT + MOVE]

2. While holding down [SHIFT + MOVE] select the object to move.
3. Release [SHIFT + MOVE]
4. Select or Tap the target soft key. (any free or occupied soft key)
-OR-
Enter the target number on the keypad.

5. Press [Store]
-OR-

[ENTER] / [Store]

ATTENTION! Sequence 2 above will not work if you have Fixture

selection.
To overcome this problem, press [SHIFT+ ●], before
using the sequence.

23 |
The Move Function

To move a range of objects using the soft keys

Sequence 1

1. [SHIFT + MOVE]
2. Select or Tap on the objects to move.
3. Select or Tap on the target soft key.(If the SK is empty)
-OR-
4. Press @
5. Select or tap on any target soft key.

Sequence 2

6. Press and Hold down [SHIFT + MOVE]

7. While holding down [SHIFT + MOVE] select the objects to move.
8. Release [SHIFT + MOVE]
9. Select or Tap the target soft key.
-OR-
Enter a target number from the keypad.

10. Press [Store]

-OR-

[ENTER] / [Store]

Note the following:

 Holding down the Copy / Cut or Move key on the keypad, will disable the keypad
until you release them.
 The MOVE sequences are NOT valid for Fixture copying or playbacks.
 The above sequences can be used with numeric or non-numeric ranges.
 Objects will be pasted in order of selection.
 On non-linear ranges, the gaps will be kept after pasting to the target range.

| 24
The Move Function

The Copy Cue + Properties Button

In tracking mode, we added another option to the Copy Cue dialog:

By using this new option you are able to copy the Cue together with the cue properties(time,
Delay etc.). This is the Default option.

25 |
Effects Editor Improvements

Effects Editor Improvements

The following improvements were added to the Effects Editor:
 Assign a value using the keypad at any time
 Assign a negative value using the keypad
 The Release button has been enhanced
 Ability to run a Pre-Built effect on parameters of the same type example; RGB

Assign a value using the keypad

When using the Effect Editor, you are now able to assign an exact value using the numbers
keypad. The value will be assigned immediately once entered. The system will now also accept a
single digit number such as “1”.
If you have entered a value and you decide to change that value completely, then you will need
to do either of the following before entering a new value:
 Press on the Effect attribute button you are working on, example; Rate → All
-OR-
 Press on the parameter key associated with the effect you are working on.(The keys
above the Parameter wheels on Vector Red or Vector Blue)
You are now also able to enter a negative value for Size and Rate using the “-“key.
[- Key, #], Example; -50

Note the Max values for the following:

 Offset; 100%
 Size; 100% -OR- -100%
 Rate; 327 sec –OR- -327 sec
 Duty Cycle; 255

Tips!
 Instead of using the Keypad for Full, On or Zero values, press the FULL or
ON/ZERO keys.
 You can also use the negative “-“key with the FULL or ON/ZERO keys.
For example; [- Key, FULL]

| 26
Effects Editor Improvements

The Enhanced Release Button

The enhanced Release option which has now also been added to the advanced tab can now be
used in 2 ways:
 When an effect is running, click on the Release button once to release a Primitive
selection, click again to reset the other effect attributes. (Offset, Size, Rate, Duty cycle)
 If NO Primitive is selected, click once to reset the Effect attributes.

ATTENTION! If you release a Primitive only (One Click), then close and re-
open the Effect Editor, the Effect attributes will be reset.

NOTE: You can also use the [RELEASE] key on the console panel to perform
the above operations when the effect machine is open.

Release Button

Effect Primitives

Effect Attributes

27 |
Effects Editor Improvements

Run a Pre-Built effect on parameters of the same type

An effect will now run on all parameters from the same type. This can only be done when using
effects from the Pre-Built tab.

Example 1:
If you have 10 (Color kinetics), ColorBlaze-72 fixtures:
[Fixture, 1->10, EFFECT, RAINBOW]
The effect will now run on all the 12 sets of RGB parameters.

Example 2:
If you have 10 (Studio Due), CS-4 fixtures:
[Fixture, 1->10, EFFECT, DIMMER FADE]
The effect will now run on all the dimmer parameters of that fixture (4 Dimmers).

| 28
Direct PB Operations

Direct PB Operations
You are now able to perform PB operations, for example; assign Qlists, release PB’s etc.,
directly from the PB wing view by using the option “Interactive Selection”. This option is
located in the View menu and can also be used to enable or disable the feature for every PB view.

Using Interactive Selection

When Interactive Selection is enabled a divider will be placed on the PB and Q-Key wing view:

Interactive Selection OFF Interactive Selection ON with divider

To turn ON Interactive Selection

 From the View menu select Interactive Selection.

Once Interactive Selection is enabled, then the section above the divider line will behave like the
Select keys of the playbacks. This means that all operations that are done using the Select keys
can now be done from the PB wing view. By clicking on the section below the divider line will
open the Cue sheet for that PB. See Viewing the Cue sheet

Use this section to assign Qlists,

Release PBs, etc.

Click here to open the Cue sheet

Tip! You can use the PB control keys to manipulate the PB, (PB release, Free, GO, Forward or
Backwords, take Priority, Etc…)

29 |
Direct PB Operations

Example:

If Interactive Selection is enabled and you want to store Qlist 1 on PB 1, then instead of using
the Select key PB 1, click on the top section of PB 1 in the PB wing.
Type Qlist 1 and tap or click on the Playback wing:

Click here to add Qlist 1 to PB 1

Qlist 1 has been added to PB 1

Viewing the Cue sheet

You can view a Cue sheet of a PB by simply clicking on the section under the divider line. From
the Cue Sheet, you can also view the PB, Exam and Preview by clicking on those tabs. The Cue
sheet now has 2 new buttons on the right hand side for easier navigation- A back button and PB
Setup button:

The Back button will take you back to the PB

wing view.

The PB Setup button will open the PB

properties dialog.

The PB Setup option is also available on the pane title bar of any specific PB view including A/B
and Master PB Views:
Pane Title

Right hand side options

| 30
Direct PB Operations

Inside a specific PB view, the PB tab is also intercative and can be used instead of using the PB
select key. This includes A/B and Master PB views:

ATTENTION! By default the Interactive Selection is enabled, even when loading a layout
from a previous version (3.18).

Note the following:

 The Right hand side options (Back button and PB Setup) are not available on
A/B and Master PB views.
 The Interactive PB operations will work on PB’s and in Qkeys views.
 The console will divide the PB view regardless of the fields order.

31 |
Vector Snap Enhancement

Vector Snap Enhancement

A new button has been added to the System Settings ► Playback tab under the Snap Options
called “Activate Snap On Load”. The “Activate Snap On Load” enables you to choose what
happens to the snap when you load a show. When the option is enabled, the snap will load as it
does at the moment. When the option is disabled, the snaps will be loaded forcing all PB’s to be
released.

The behavior of the “Activate Snap On Load” is saved in the Show Data, (Meaning, when
loading a show, the console will check the state of this option and then load the show
accordingly). Therefore, before saving a show you will need to decide how you want the snap to
behave when loading that show.

Example:
1. Store a Cue on a PB. Make sure the PB is activated. Save as Snap 1.
2. Enable “Activate Snap On Load”. Save the show as “Snap Active”.
3. Disable “Activate Snap On Load”. Save the show as “ Snap Released”
4. Load a new show to clear all the data.
5. Load the saved shows and notice what happens:
Activate Snap On Load - Enabled: Activate Snap On Load - Disabled:

| 32
Vector Snap Enhancement

ATTENTION! Old and new shows will be loaded to the default setting of
“Activate Snap On Load” disabled.

Tip! Load your old shows, and then re-save them using the “Activate Snap On
Load” feature.

Note the following:

 Warm Data has no relation to the “Activate Snap On Load” option. Warm
Data will continue working as it does today.
 The Snap will remember which PB’s are enabled, but when loading the show
this data will be ignored.

33 |
The Apply & Continue Option in the Wizard

The Apply & Continue Option in the Wizard

The Wizard that is used to Create & Patch Fixtures, Patch Fixtures, Modify Fixture Ranges, and
Modify Dimmer Ranges has been enhanced with a new button called “Apply & Continue”.
This button enables you to apply the change and continue working in the same wizard dialog
without re-opening the Wizard after every operation. The “Finish” button is still a valid
operation that can be used once you are satisfied with your changes.

Using the Apply & Continue button

When opening a wizard the Apply & Continue button will be greyed out until you have made
your additions or changes and have moved to the next screen using the Next button:

NOTE: The Help

button is now
move to the top
right of the dialog
box.
Apply And
Continue
button

| 34
The Apply & Continue Option in the Wizard

Apply And
Continue
button

Tapping on the Apply & Continue button will apply the changes, and then the wizard will return
to the previous screen thereby enabling you to add more devices or fixtures. When you are
satisfied with your additions, tap the Finish button to close the wizard.
Every time you use the Apply & Continue button, the system will automatically generate the
next available number for that device. For example; if you modify a range for spots 1-9, then you
use Apply & Continue, the next range will start from the next available number, i.e. spot 10.

NOTE: The Help button is now at the top right corner.

Modify and Patch Information Improvement

Now when you Modify or Patch dimmers in the patch manager, the range selected will be shown
in the Title of the dialog. This applies to the following:
 Creating and Patching Fixtures
 Patching Fixtures
 Modifying Fixture Ranges
 Modifying Dimmer Ranges

35 |
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

You now have the ability to control the signals from SMPTE, MTC, MIDI In and MIDI Out.
This enables you to turn OFF one or more of these protocols.

New buttons have been added to the System Settings ► MIDI/SMPTE tab:

Main MIDI button

New added buttons

The MIDI Input, Output and Macro buttons are greyed out until the main MIDI button is
activated.

NOTE: When MTC is enabled, the console will listen for MIDI time code protocol
regardless if the main MIDI button is enabled or not.

| 36
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

A new “MIDI/SMPTE” Soft Key option has also been added to the Setup Toolbar. This is
accessed by pressing the Setup key on the actual console:

By pressing the MIDI/SMPTE soft key will open a new MIDI/SMPTE toolbar:

Main MIDI SK

Tip! You can create a Macro to trigger the options in the MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar.

The MIDI/SMPTE new buttons

The following is a list of the new MIDI/SMPTE buttons with their functions:

Button Function

MIDI Input Keys Enable this key together with the main MIDI button to receive MIDI
commands into the console.

MIDI Output Keys Enable this key together with the main MIDI button to send MIDI
commands from the console.

MTC Enable this key to receive MIDI Time Code protocol (External Timeline
Clock) into the console.

SMPTE Enable this key to receive SMPTE protocol (External Timeline Clock) into
the console.

37 |
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

Using MIDI/SMPTE System Settings Tab

After pressing on the main MIDI button, the MIDI Input, Output and Macro keys will become
available:

Once the main MIDI key is activated, and you have clicked on OK or Apply; The Indication bar
will display MIDI:

After selecting a MIDI key choice; MIDI Input Keys, MIDI Output Keys, or MIDI Macro, the
changes will NOT be immediate until you apply the change by pressing OK or Apply.
Once you have applied the change, it will be visible on the Indication bar and on the
MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar.

| 38
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

Example:
MIDI, MIDI Input and MIDI Output keys have been selected:

Selected
MIDI keys

After you press Apply, the Indication bar will display “MIDI I/O”(MIDI Input / MIDI Output):

Indication bar MIDI/SMPTE indications

The following is a list of MIDI/SMPTE indications on the Indication bar:

MIDI Activated key’s SMPTE / Activated key’s

Indications MTC
Indications

Main MIDI Only or SMPTE

main MIDI + MIDI
Marco

Main MIDI + MIDI MIDI Time Code (MTC)

Input keys

Main MIDI + MIDI MIDI Time Code (MTC) +

Output keys SMPTE

Main MIDI + MIDI

Input keys & MIDI
Output keys

39 |
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

Using the MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar

The MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar is accessed by pressing the Setup key ► MIDI/SMPTE Soft key:

When using the MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar, by pressing on any of the MIDI commands (MIDI Input,
MIDI Output, MIDI Macro), will automatically activate the main MIDI key. After selecting an
option from the MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar, Store (Action Mode) or ENTER/Store (Enter Mode)
needs to be pressed to assign the command. Once the MIDI/SMPTE command is assigned, the
Command line will display Assigned and the Indication bar will display the assigned MIDI or
SMPTE command.
The Assigned command will also be visible in the MIDI/SMPTE System Settings tab.

Example:
MIDI Output is enabled:

The Command line

displaying the activated
MIDI command

After the MIDI/SMPTE command is stored, the Command line will display Assigned with the
Indication bar displaying the assigned command:

NOTE: The MIDI/SMPTE Toolbar will return back to the Default Tool bar after
assigning the command.

| 40
SMPTE, MTC, MIDI Enable / Disable

ATTENTION! SMPTE and MTC new buttons are disabled by default, so any external
trigger (SMPTE or MIDI Time Code) will be ignored unless you enable the relevant
SMPTE or MIDI Time Code button. This is relevant for new shows and saved shows
from previous software versions.

The SMPTE / MTC TimeLine Clock

A new Clock tab has been added to the active TimeLine view screen. This clock is a reflection of
the Indication bar TimeLine clock. The Clock can be resized by changing the tab size.

The active TimeLine clock is for preview only and cannot be edited.

Hours Minutes Seconds Frames

SMPTE / MTC
Clock View on
the Indication
bar
Note the following color changes:
(This also applies to the SMPTE / MTC Clock on the indication bar)
 The Clock color will be Orange when SMPTE is running from the internal
clock. (TimeLine Toolbar ► RUN)
 When running from an external clock, the clock color will be according to the
console theme.

41 |
Desktop Enhancements

Desktop Enhancements
The new desktop enhancements enable you to do the following:
 Add stage elements in various shapes
 Define, lock, display or hide elements using the Layers Toolbar
 Group elements
 Drag shortcuts from the Window explorer to the desktop
 Undo last changes
 Print the desktop

With these enhancements come two new Toolbars; The Stage Elements Toolbar and the Layers
Toolbar. These are floating Toolbars which can be positioned anywhere on the screen.
The Toolbars are accessed from two new buttons located on the Desktop pane title:

Stage Elements Toolbar NOTE: The Grid button has also

Layers Toolbar been added to the Desktop pane title.
button

NOTE: Unlock the display before editing anything on the desktop. When finished,

be sure to lock the display.

The Stage Elements Toolbar

The Stage Elements Toolbar contains 16 pre-defined elements that can be dragged onto the
Desktop. Once an element has been dragged to the desktop, then you can manipulate them to
change size, angel, shape, line thickness and line color.
Stage Elements Toolbar:

Horizontal Curve Square Polygon Circle Open

Arrow Hoist
Line Vertical Polygon Open Circle Truss
Rectangle Triangle
Line
Open Square Open Triangle L-Shape

| 42
Desktop Enhancements

To add stage elements to the Desktop

1. Add a Desktop to your show.(Right click and select Add Desktop)

2. From the Desktop pane title click on the Stage Elements button:

The Stage Elements Toolbar will appear:

3. Using the mouse, drag the desired element onto the Desktop area.
The Element will appear on the Desktop like the following example which is a circle:

To name the element

1. Double click the Name field.

-OR-
Click on the actual element to select it, and then Right click, select Rename from the
menu.
2. Type desired name in the Name field.
3. Press Enter or click anywhere in the desktop area.

43 |
Desktop Enhancements

To move an element

1. Click on the actual element to select it.

-OR-
Highlight the Element/s by left clicking the mouse and dragging the highlighter over
the Element/s.
-OR-
Select a few elements using CTRL and left mouse click.
2. Once the Element is selected, left click on the actual element, hold the mouse key
down and move the Element to the desired location.
You can also move the Element by clicking on the Name field and dragging the
mouse.

To change element size

Click and drag one of the white points from the outside frame:

The Arrows icon will appear once

the mouse is over a stretch point.

Tips!
 To change the size of multiple elements, select the elements, and then
drag one of the points from the outside frame.
 To equally change the size of an element; press and hold SHIFT while
stretching the element.

| 44
Desktop Enhancements

To rotate the element

Click and drag the rotation handle (Green point) at the top of the Element in the direction
that you want to rotate.
OR
Right click ► Rotate.

The Rotate icon will appear once the

mouse is over the rotate point.

Tips!
 To rotate multiple elements, select the elements, and then drag the
rotate point of one of the elements.
 By holding SHIFT together with the mouse, you can rotate the
element in jumps of 18 degrees.

To change the element shape

Click and drag one of the points on the actual element (Red points):

The Red Arrows will appear once the

mouse is over a draggable point.

Tip! By holding SHIFT together with the mouse, you can drag the element from
the red points in a straight line.

45 |
Desktop Enhancements

To add points to an element

You can add more points (Red only) to an element if needed; Min 2, Max 16 points.
1. Select the stage element.
2. Place the mouse on the element line where you want to add a point.
3. Right click and select Add Point.

To remove a point

1. Place the mouse on the red point you want to remove.

2. Right click and select Remove Point.

To delete an element

1. Click on the actual element to select it.

-OR-
Highlight the Element/s by left clicking the mouse and dragging the highlighter over
the Element/s.
2. Press Delete.
-OR-
Right click ► Delete
-OR-
Press Delete on the keyboard.
A Delete Objects dialog will appear:

3. Click Delete to delete the Element or Cancel.

| 46
Desktop Enhancements

To print a desktop

You are now able to print the desktop.

1. Open the Desktop view
2. Click on the Desktop view tab to activate it for printing.
The selected desktop view should have an orange frame around it.
3. From the File menu select Print.
-OR-
Ctrl + P

NOTE: The Desktop will not print using the “Print Multiple” option.

Using Undo
The Undo command can be used to undo the following:
 Undo Movement of an object.
 Undo a deleted object. (When using undo to restore a shortcut, the shortcut will be
restored with a generic icon)
 Undo an “Add/Remove” object from the user defined layer.
 Undo Rotation, Stretch and drag.
 Undo for group or ungroup.

To undo

1. Place the mouse anywhere in the Desktop.

2. Right click, select Undo.

NOTE: You only have 1 Undo.

47 |
Stage Element properties

Stage Element properties

In the Stage Element Properties you can change line thickness, angel, color, and style, name the
Element and decide if you want the Element to be open or closed, curved or not curved.

To access stage element properties

1. Right click on the element.

2. Select Properties.

| 48
Stage Element properties

The Stage Element Properties window

11 12
1 2

4 10

8 9

Stage Element properties options

The following is an explanation of the Stage Element Properties options:

1 Name: Name of the Element. Click in the Name field to change the name.

2 Location: The X and Y points enable you to place the element in the exact location.

3 Layer: Use the Layer drop down menu to add the element to a layer. See The Layers Toolbar

4 Thickness: Changes the thickness of the Element line; Min value is 0. Max value is 255.

5 Angle: Changes the Angle of the Element. 0 - 360Deg

6 Style: Allows you to change the Style of line, for example; Dotted line……….

NOTE: In order to use the Styles, the Curved Element button must be disabled. See
number 9 below.
Tip! You can also change any element into a “Truss” style by selecting Truss from the
Style pull down menu and increasing the Thickness of the line.

49 |
Stage Element properties

7 Color: Changes color of the Element line.

8 Close Element: If the button is enabled the Element shape will be closed. If the button is disabled
the Element shape will be open.

Example:
In this example we will use the Circle Element.

Closed Element: Open Element:

Tip! If you have an open element, for example; Open Square, you can close the Square
by clicking the on the Close Element button.

9 Curve Element: The Curve Element button is used to Curve or un-curve the Element.

Example:
In this Example we will use the Square Element.

Curve Element button is disabled: Curve Element button enabled: The

Square now becomes a sort of circle:

| 50
Stage Element properties

10 Reset Buttons: By clicking on the Reset button will reset the individual function back to the last
saved value.

11 Show: Show or hide element name.

12 Center: Centers the Element name or places the name outside the Element.

NOTE: The changes to the object will be saved only if you close the dialog by
clicking on OK or Apply.

Tips!

 You can change the stage properties of multiple elements by selecting the elements
then selecting properties.
 You can preview the changes on the actual element.

The Layers Toolbar

The Layers Toolbar gives you the option to display the Elements on the Desktop or not. You can
also define layers, lock layers and decide which layers you want to display.
A Layers Toolbar button will only become active once you add a relevant object to the Desktop.

Layers Toolbar:

User Defined Layers with Lock Layers

Show / Shortcuts Stage
Show / Hide objects
Hide Layer Elements
that are not
Text Layer
Topo Groups attached to any
Shortcuts Layer user defined layer
Layers

51 |
Stage Element properties

The Layers Toolbar options

The following is an explanation of the Layers Toolbar options:

Layers Toolbar What is does…

Option

This option will show or hide all text on the desktop.

When Enabled:
Object text will be visible on the desktop ( According to the object
properties)
When Disabled:
All object text will be hidden.

This option will show or hide all shortcut objects on the desktop, (except
Topo shortcuts)
When Enabled:
All shortcut objects will be visible.
When Disabled:
All shortcut objects will be hidden.

This option will show or hide all shortcut objects added from the Topo
view.
When Enabled:
All Topo shortcut objects will be visible.
When Disabled:
All Topo shortcut objects will be hidden.

This option will show or hide Stage elements on the desktop.

When Enabled:
All Stage element objects will be visible.
When Disabled:
All Stage element objects will be hidden.

This option will show or hide grouped objects on the desktop.

When Enabled:
All grouped objects will be visible.
When Disabled:
All grouped objects will be hidden.

| 52
Stage Element properties

These options are user defined layers, of which there are 5 to work with.
When the Layer is Enabled:
All the objects in the layer will be visible.
When the Layer is Disabled:
All the objects in the Layer will be hidden.

Locked or Un-Locked Layers

When a layer is locked, you will not be able to select or manipulate the
objects in it. The layers lock can only be used when the Vector display is
Unlocked :
When the Layer is Locked:
The Objects in the layer will be visible but they cannot be manipulated.
When the Layer is Un-Locked:
The Objects in the layer will be visible and can be manipulated.

This option will show or hide objects that are NOT linked to a user defined
layer.
When Enabled:
All the objects that are not linked to a user defined layer will be visible.
When Disabled:
All the objects that are not linked to a user defined layer will be hidden.

NOTE: When an object is part of a user defined layer, the object will still be part of its
generic layer. Therefore both of the layers must be visible in order for the object to be
visible.

Example:
If you add a shortcut to the desktop, it is automatically part of the Generic shortcut
layer.
If you add that shortcut into a user defined layer; example user defined layer 1, the
object will then part of both layers.(Generic shortcut layer and User defined layer 1)
In order to see this object, both layers must be enabled.

53 |
Stage Element properties

To add objects to a user defined layer

Any desktop object can be added to a user defined layer.

1. Select the objects to add.
2. Place the mouse on the selected objects.
3. Right click.
4. From the User Defined Layers list select a layer from 1-5.

-OR-
Right click on the Object ► Properties ► Layer
Once you have selected a User Defined Layer, the User Defined button on the Layers
Toolbar will become active:

To hide objects in a layer

 Click on the active User Defined Layer.

To lock objects in a layer

 Click on the lock button

To remove objects from a layer

1. Make sure the layer is unlocked.

2. Select the objects to remove.
3. Place the mouse on the selected element.
4. Right click.
5. From the User Defined Layers list select None.

| 54
Stage Element properties

To hide text on all objects on the desktop

 From the Layers Toolbar click on the Text button

This will hide all text from all objects.

To hide text on selected objects on the desktop

 To hide text from a selected object, Right click on the object and select Show/Hide
Text.

Groups
Grouping is when you take a bunch of objects and put them into one group. You can have many
groups each with a bunch of objects. Any desktop object can be grouped.
Note the following on groups:
 A group can also be part of a user defined layer.
 Objects in a group cannot be selected or manipulated separately.
 Object options such as rename, properties, rotate etc. will be greyed out when the
object is in a group.
 Objects that are part of a user defined layer or any other generic layer will be cleared
from those layers after grouping.(These objects will now be part of the Groups layer)
 Groups can be combined together by selecting both the groups (Right click ► Group)
 An object in a group will belong to the Groups Layer until ungrouped.
 When you group objects, there unique properties will be kept (Show/Hide Text,
Color, thickness etc.)

55 |
Stage Element properties

To group objects

1. Select the objects to group.

2. Place the mouse on the actual element.
3. Right click, select Group.

The Groups Layer button will become enabled and there will be white broken
lines around the group. These broken lines will become a dark grey color once you
click on another object.

To ungroup objects

1. Select the group to ungroup.

2. Place the mouse on the selected group.
3. Right click, select Ungroup.

To undo

See Using Undo

| 56
Stage Element properties

Drag Files from PC Desktop to Vector Desktop

Shortcuts from the Window explorer can be dragged to the desktop (Except windows
components, such as “My Computer, My Networks, etc.)

To drag files to the desktop

 Simply drag the Shortcut from the Window explorer to the Vector desktop:

NOTE: The shortcuts are LINKS only. These files will not be saved in the
show, only the links will be saved.

Tips! Dragging files to the Vector Desktop can be usefull for:

 Quick access to run applications such as C-Net Manager.
 CAD drawing of your stage or bitmap.

57 |
Stage Element properties

The Shortcuts properties dialog

The Shortcuts properties dialog is used to edit properties of a shortcut object.
You can perform the following:
 Change the name of the Shortcut
 Show / Hide the Shortcut text
 Enter an exact location to place the shortcut using X and Y fields
 Add the Shortcut to a user defined layer
 Add a hotkey for the shortcut

| 58
Stage Element properties

Using the Grid

The Grid Show / Hide button , which is located on the desktop title pane, adds layers of dots
that can be used to align objects. This grid works the same as the grid on the Topo.

General Desktop Notes

The following are general notes on using the Desktop enhancements:
 To select an object click once, then click again to move the object.
 When moving an object red point the frame will reset.
 When printing a desktop the zoom may change.

59 |
Export Show to ASCII

Export Show to ASCII

You are now able to export channel information, groups and 1 single Qlist (According to the
standard protocol) to an ASCII show file. The console will not allow you to export unless you
have at least 1 channel and 1 Qlist.
When exporting an ASCII show file, the following data is exported:
 Cue data
 Group data
 Cue time data (time-in / time-out)
 Cue Link
 Patch
 Proportional patch level
 Text of the Cue or Group

NOTE: A group will not appear in the Export to ASCII Show dialog if it does not
contain any channel data.

To export a show to ASCII

Before you export a show to ASCII make sure you have a channel and a Qlist in the show.
1. From the File menu select Import/Export Shows ► Export Show To ASCII.

2. From the Export to ASCII show dialog select the objects to export:

| 60
Export Show to ASCII

3. Click Export.
4. Select the destination to save the file.
5. Type the file name, select Save.
The file will be saved with the extension:.asc

ATTENTION! If more than 1 Qlist is selected, the console will merge these Qlists
into 1 Qlist. This will cause the cues to be re-numbered.

NOTE: Import ASCII show file now supports; Proportional Patch and Cue Link.

61 |
More General Enhancements

More General Enhancements

The following pages contain explanations on more general enhancements.

WIN SCROLL Enhancements

The following are new supported keyboard keys in WIN SCROLL mode:

Pressed PC Panel key Will act as Keyboard key

[MACRO] ALT

[SNAP] Space

[UNDO] UNDO ( CTRL + z)

[COPY] COPY (CTRL + c)

[PASTE] PASTE (CTRL + v)

[ACTIVE] SELECT ALL (CTRL + a)

Tip! By using [MACRO] + → (Thru) in WIN SCROLL mode will give you the
same effect as Alt + Tab on the windows keyboard.

NOTE: When you open a Text dialog or the Matrix ► Fixture properties, the WIN
SCROLL will turn ON automatically.
The WIN SCROLL will automatically turn OFF when you exit the Text dialog
or Matrix ► Fixture properties.

Locked Columns Enhancement

Now when you lock columns there will be a thicker and brighter line. This line will take the
colors according to the grid colors:

Thicker and brighter line

when columns are
| 62 locked
More General Enhancements

Blind Enhancement
By using the following sequence you can copy the editor values into the Blind editor. This can be
done even if the Blind editor already has values.

To copy current editor values into the blind editor

This sequence will copy the editor values into the blind editor and will automatically enter
the blind editor:
 [SHIFT+BLIND]

Import Devices Improvement

By using CTRL or SHIFT together with the mouse (as you would do in windows), will enable
you to select multiple devices in the Import device tree.

Import / Export Shows Enhanced Menu

All Import and Export options have been added into one menu:

ATTENTION! The previous way of importing 4D / Sabre / ASCII shows by using File
► Open Show is NO longer valid.

63 |
More General Enhancements

Workspace Improvement
When you have only one workspace in a window, there will be no workspace indication tab until
you add another workspace:

No workspace indication tab

To add a workspace

1. Right click anywhere.

2. Select Add Workspace.
The Workspace indication tab will appear and will show both workspaces.

| 64
More General Enhancements

Using PB in Cut Time

You are now able to manipulate PB content by using the [SHIFT] key together with a PB key.
The following are PB key behaviors:

Key Behavior With SHIFT Without SHIFT

GO PB will fade in using Cut PB will fade in using Cue

Time. Time.

GO / RELEASE PB will act as ON / OFF PB will fade in using Cue time

or will be released using
release Time.

RELEASE PB will be released in Cut PB will be released in release

time time

BACK / HOLD or BACK PB will fade back in Cut PB will fade back using back
Time. time.

ON / OFF PB will act as GO / RELEASE PB will fade in/ out using Cut
Time.

NOTE: The above behavior will work with PB’s and Q-keys.

Quick access to MARCO’s 111 – 116

You are now able to use MARCO’s 111 – 116 directly from the 6 original MARCO keys on the
panel. You can do this by pressing [SHIFT], then pressing on a relevant MACRO key.

MARCO Key Key + SHIFT MARCO Key Key + SHIFT

macro 101 macro 111 macro 104 macro 114

macro 102 macro 112 macro 105 macro 115

macro 103 macro 113 macro 106 macro 116

65 |
Vector Release Notes
Release Date: 20/12/2010

Real time version: 3.18.R03

Windows version: 3.18.R03

RT interface version: 3.18.R03

Firmware file updates are required for:

 Vector Red / Blue Editor: Version 14

 Vector Green / Orange Editor: Version 24
 Remote Playback Wing: Version 15
 Remote Editor Wing: Version 27
 Vector Violet Editor Panel: Version 26

Key Panel has been changed to [@/DECIMAL]

(Please contact your local Compulite distributor for replacement keys)

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Version Highlights

Version Highlights
In this version we updated and added many more devices. 120 new devices where added with more
than 100 devices updated:

1. Display

1.1. GUI Improvements The new GUI improvements include a 3D

look and feel together with new dialog
buttons.
1.2. SK Editor The new SK editor enables you to
personalize the Soft keys by changing their
color, font size, pattern and more.
1.3. Last Selected SK Indicator The last selected soft key will now be
indicated by a red border.
1.4. Hand Tool All Vector dialogs including the Vector PC
now have a hand tool which enables you
to drag the Dialogs around the screen.
1.5. Master PB Indication The Indication bar will now indicate which
PB is the Master PB.
2. Editing

2.1. Default Behavior of the Update dialog You now have the ability to change the
box Default options of the Update dialog box.
2.2. New Qlist store sequences There are new sequences to store a Qlist
either on the PB or as Data which can be
used later on.
2.3. Grid Editing We changed some of the Operations of the
Grid editing and added more key operations.
2.4. Decimal Value assignment A new option was added to assign values to a
Fixture Parameter in Decimal instead of
Percentage.
2.5. Main Master Qlist A new mode was added which enables you to
work with 1 main Qlist which defaults all cue
operations to that Qlist.
2.6. Fine tuning for 8 Bit parameters We added an option to use SHIFT + WHEEL
to fine tune 8 Bit parameters.

1|
Version Highlights

2.7. Rename of the Tracking General We renamed the Library “Tracking

Library General” to General. The Library will still
function as before.
3. Playback

3.1. GO For Multifades You now can enable or disable the option to
use the GO for fading between Cues while a
fade is in progress.
3.2. New Operations that exclude the There is a new range of PB Control
Master PB operations that can be used on all the PB's
without affecting the Master PB.
3.3. Playback Intensity limit A new feature which enables you to adjust
the Intensity limit of a PB.
3.4. Look Ahead Improvements The Look Ahead can now be filtered to either
work on the Master PB only, or on ALL
PB‟s.
4. Patch Manager

4.1. New Topo options and improvements New Topo options and improvements
include:
 Set Stage Measurements in
centimeters or inches.
 Decide what fields will be visible in
the Topo according to the Set Type.
 Each Set Type has its own unique
image; Channel, Spot, Matrix or
Media Server.
4.2. Matrix Grid Zoom We added a zoom facility which enables you
to zoom in, out or fit to screen the Matrix
grid.
5. System Settings

5.1. System settings tab layouts We re-arranged the System settings tabs and
their options in a more logical order to
improve navigation within the System
settings.

5.2. View show name and IP Show name and console IP are now seen in
the System settings dialog title bar.

|2
Version Highlights

6. Dimmer Properties

6.1. New Dimmer properties option With the new Dimmer Properties option, you
can access the Grand Master and Dimmer
Curves directly from the Editor Toolbar.
6.2. Absolute DMX Toggle display With this new option called "Absolute DMX
Display" you can decide whether to view the
Absolute Dimmer range or the short Dimmer
range with Port numbers.
6.3. DMX Port Swap A new sequence has been added to enable
DMX Port swapping.
7. Exam
7.1. Track Sheet Improvements Now you can show parameters according to
banks which can be filtered to all parameters
for that bank or a specific parameter.
7.2. Quick Dimmer patch information You are now able to quickly get valuable
Dimmer patch information about a selected
Dimmer, which will be displayed in the
Command line.

7.3. Dimmer Exam View With DMX Exam you are able to Exam a
whole Port or a specific Dimmer address,
which is done directly from the Keypad.

8. DMX Protocols
8.1. ACN Support Vector now supports ACN Protocol
9. Vector PC

9.1. Panel Skins You are now able to select a Panel skin that
represents a certain Vector console with the
actual Keys location on the Panel.
9.2. Hotkey Mapping You are now able to customize the Hotkeys
mapping on the Panel, according to your
preferences.
9.3. Other improvements Other improvements include:
 Show/Hide panel title bar
 Attach the PC Wing to the Panel

3|
Version Highlights

10. Vector Violet

10.1. New Physical Wheel Features for The Physical wheels on the new line of
Vector Violet and Ultra Violet Vector Violet and Ultra Violet can now be
pushed down, giving you a faster way of
selecting and fine tuning parameters.
10.2. Desk light On Vector Violet we added more desk light
options to control the Vector Violet 7 Inch
LCD brightness and the Gooseneck desk
light.
10.3. Playback Select Key and Q-Key A Q-Key mode is now available on Vector
Mode Functions Violet. In this mode you have direct access to
20 PB‟s and 20 Q-Keys per single page.
11. General

11.1. Grand Master 200% A new option was added to enable the Grand
Master to exceed 100% of intensity to 200%.

Limitations
 When dimming desk lights, FULL, ON, or ZR will only work after the Wheel has been
moved.
 Beat is not implemented yet.
 In Try Cue, parameter time progress is not displayed.
 Qlist and Cue cannot be set as the Numeric default in the Command line.
 Interactive Fixture selection does not work on a console designated as slave or node.
 Matrix and Topo selection does not work on a console designated as slave or node.
 Cue numbers in Qlists on time lines are not updated when re-numbering Cues.
**Work around: Renumber before teaching the time line.
 On the Matrix List ► Live view, devices with 16 Bit parameters are not presented
correctly
 Mark Cues should not be updated directly. The Update of values on it will cause the
Mark cue to not function correctly.

|4
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R03

Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R03

Graphical Users Interface – Windows
1. A new Green Hippo Hippotizer version 3.14 - devices have been added to enable you
to download thumbs.

Real Time
1. When Violet was in Master/Slave mode, values sent via the Wheels were incorrect.
This has now been corrected. Thanks to Anton, Russia

2. When replacing 8-Bit parameters with 16-Bit, values were not recalculated. Thanks to
Gdynia, Poland, - Jerry Roberto Romani, Italy and Koby, LightVision, Israel.

3. When in Master / slave and using the Wheel to change values, the values were sent to
the opposite side in system time and not in real time. This is now fixed. Thanks to
Klaus Bolte, Germany, - Anton, Russia, - Orit Freedman, BEO, Holland, - Matthias
Schoeffmann Taronic, Compulite Support Austria.
4. Exam of device specific libraries did not show the content of that library. This is now
corrected.
5. When using a chaser with chase fade-in and back to top on release options, after
releasing the PB and running it again, the chase fade in was ignored. Thanks to
Matthias Schoeffmann, Taronic, Compulite Support Austria.

Hardware
1. The Trackball on Vector Violet was too sensitive and even while pressing other keys
caused the Trackball to change values. Please make sure you update the firmware.
2. The Vector external wings (PB and Editor) had distorted images on the LCD display.
This has been corrected. Please make sure you update the firmware. Thanks to
Stephen Plotkin & Paul Grant, Canada, Klaus Bolte & Gerhard Feiner, Germany

5|
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R02

Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R02

Graphical Users Interface – Windows
1. When examining a Tracksheet in which the Fixture had the same parameters that
appeared more than once, then the Tracksheet did not show them. This has been
corrected. Thanks to Orit Freedman, BEO, Holland.

Real Time
1. In Fixture mode, after copying and then pasting a single parameter to another fixture
without pressing the Set key (Channel, Spot, etc) did not work. Thank you Orit
Freedman, BEO, Holland.
2. When you used the Sequence of RATE, Library Fade time, and then entering zero
value and moving the corresponding wheel counter clockwise, resulted in a negative
library fade time. Thanks to Matthias Scoffmann, Austria.
3. Using shared PB‟s caused the Main PB priority to be saved in Zero priority. This has
been corrected. Thanks to Matthias Scoffmann, Austria.
4. The system crashed when changing snaps in master / slave configuration. This is now
corrected. Thanks to Gerhard Feiner, Feiner – Lichttechnik, Germany
5. On the 3.18R01 and only on Vector red single core, the middle wing was not
recognized; therefore it behaved like a “Blue” Vector with one wing and 10 PB
pages. This has been corrected. Thanks to Bojan Repic, RTV Slovenia and Rob
Eunson , Epic , Canada.

|6
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R01

Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R01

Graphical Users Interface – Windows
1. After restarting the Console or PC, the Scheduler disappeared.
2. On 4D and Sabre the delay timing was not correctly converted.
3. On 4D and Sabre, Cut timings converted to vector were 0.1.
4. When pressing on a Channel short-key on the Desktop and sending FULL from the
Panel Hotkeys, the Desktop crashed.
5. When opening an already existing desktop on a smaller tab, the Desktop size changed
and caused the Icons on the Desktop to move.
6. On the Catalyst, file names showed only the number with no text. Now the File shows
the number with the Names. Thank you Klaus Bolte.
7. When loading an image, the Image preview was too small. A zoom scroll bar was
added to give you the option to zoom in or out of the Image.
8. When opening a show saved in different regional settings other than English, the
Show did not load. Thanks to the guys at MUPA, Hungary.
9. The Workspace or Desktop icons could not be renamed using the Virtual keyboard.
Thank you Jerry Roberto, Romani, Italy.
10. When examining a Tracksheet in which the Fixture had the same parameters that
appeared more than once, then the Tracksheet did not show them. This has been
corrected. Thanks to Orit Freedman, BEO, Holland.- 7136

Real Time
1. When you updated a Qlist, and released it, the next Flash did not show the Updated
values. This has been corrected. Thanks to our clients in the UK and Holland.
2. When you copied a range of Fixtures and pasted them, only the exact range was
pasted, not beyond. Thanks to Klaus Bolte, Germany.
3. When using a chaser with loop count, after the Chaser was released and then run
again, it ran the loop count with an added loop. Thanks to Gerhard Fiener, Germany.
4. When a chaser was created with a loop count using the Chase pattern of Bounce and
Random, the Loop count was totally ignored. This has been corrected.
5. When Input patch to PB is used and faders were channel mode, the Operations on the
PB were shifted by 2 PB‟s the left. This has been corrected. Thanks to Moshiko Peer,
Danor, Israel.
6. When storing effects on 8 bit parameter, it did not work on 16 bit parameters and
visa-versa. This has been fixed. Thanks to Klaus Bolte, Germany.

7|
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R01

7. When the Console is turned on and the Warm data is loaded, the last stored Cue on
the Indication bar displays 0 instead of the actual last stored Cue. This has been
corrected.
8. When using the Editor fade options of, - clear on Master GO or clear on PB GO, the
Soft key of the Editor fade is not colored in orange. This has been fixed.
9. When selecting a range of Fixtures, the system gave an error when the end of the
Range does not exist. This has been corrected.
10. When you connect in Master / Slave or Master / Node, and you flash a PB on the
Node or Slave, after a few seconds the Flash stopped working until you flash again.
This has been fixed. Thank you Matthias Kern, Switzerland.
11. When using value extraction from Cues [Fixture #, @ Cue #, Enter / Copy], CE did
not work to fix the Cue selection or the Fixture number. Thanks to Klaus Bolte,
Germany.
12. When connecting Master / Slave, the Macro LED 101-106 on the slave was off.
Thanks to RAI TV Italia & Compulite China.
13. When assigning a Qlist on the A/B or a PB with the Fader set to X-Fade when the
Faders are at the Top level, moving the Faders did not activate the Cue correctly.
Thanks RAI TV, Italy.
14. When you SOLO a PB using the Flash key, instead of flashing it once and then
releasing it, it will stay ON. This occurs when you use the SOLO once and not
SOLO, SOLO. Thanks to Jonathan Cole, Speedy and Alon Cohen, Israel.
15. Selecting libraries and then Fixtures resulted in a different library being selected
instead of the Fixture. Thank you, Richard ten Hof, Nationale Reisopera, Holland.
16. When pressing SET, the LED was on in the old position. Thanks to Agustin Arocha,
Burple, UK.
17. Exchange did not work correctly on devices with similar parameters. Thank you
Klaus Bolte, Germany.
18. When assigning a loop to a few Cue‟s in a Qlist, and assigning a link from a Cue in
the Loop range to a Cue outside the Loop range, caused the system to run the loop
incorrectly.
19. 8 Bit to 16 Bit Parameter values was not re-calculated when replacing Fixtures in the
Patch. Thanks to the Operators at Gdynia, Poland.
20. When you Clone from 8 Bit to 16 Bit, the Parameter values were not Cloned (Copied)
correctly. Thanks to Orit Freedman, BEO, Holland.
21. A Chaser that was running fast on a heavily loaded system caused a random release
on the Main PB. Thanks to David Bishop, UK.
22. When using the Snap update option “On any change”, a Submaster or Temp Cue was
not saved in the Snap. Thanks to David Bishop, BBC and House of Tradition theatre,
Hungry.

|8
Bug Fixes – Vector Software 3.18.R01

23. Macro of Master PB GO, Hold or Back did not work when changing the Master PB.
Thanks to Jonathan „Speedy‟ Cole, Yaron Shosh, Israel and Ruben De Snoo, Holland.
24. When using STEP ◄ till the last Cue, then using STEP ► to go to the first Cue, did
not work. Thanks to Matthias Scoffmann, Austria.
25. When in Compulite mode and you modify a Cue with parameter time, and finish the
sequence with STORE, the Editor did not clear as it should. Thanks to Richard ten
Hof, Holland.
26. In Master or Slave, the Master lost patch data after shutdown. Thanks to Stephen
Plotkin, CBC, Canada.
27. In Master / Slave Sync, the Slave did not show the correct SNAP number.
28. When working with MSC, the GO command ignored Follow-On Cues and Loops.
Thank you to Shoko Mishima – SEW, Japan.
29. After opening a show on an existing show the parameter header had the previous
show parameters causing confusion in the view and for the operator. Thanks to Chris
Nathan, GNR Tour 2010.
30. LOOK AHEAD did not work correctly with an effect on the Dimmer. Thanks to Orit
Freedman BEO, Holland and House of Tradition Theatre, Hungry.

9|
Operating New Features

Operating New Features

ATTENTION!

This Vector documentation contains both Action and Enter procedure syntax. Procedures that
use Action syntax are preceded by: procedures that use Enter syntax are preceded by:

| 10
User Interface Improvements

User Interface Improvements

The Vector user interface on Windows has been improved with a 3D look and feel, with larger
dialog buttons to assist with better work flow and visibility:

11 |
The SK Editor

The SK Editor
A new editor dialog box has been added which enables you to personalize the Soft keys on
Vector. All changes are saved in the System layout.
The SK Editor enables you to change the following:
 Soft key pattern
 Pattern grain and texture
 Soft key color
 Font color
 Font size
 Soft key width and height
 Soft key highlight brightness (during mouse hover on a soft key)

ATTENTION! Please Re-save your old layouts in the current version.

Accessing the SK Editor

There are 2 ways to access the SK editor:

 From the SK editor icon located in the Pane title of the Soft keys tabs:

SK Editor Icon

-OR-

 By Right clicking the Mouse anywhere in the SK view that you want to edit:

SK Editor
Icon

| 12
The SK Editor

The SK Editor Dialog box

Once you click on the SK Editor icon, the following dialog box appears:

SK Color Preview

Font Color Preview

Function Reset to
Default Buttons

Width and Height Reset buttons

Reset all functions back to default

Result Preview

SK Editor Dialog Box

13 |
The SK Editor

SK Editor Functions
The following is a list of SK editor functions and their purpose:

SK Editor Functions What they do..

Pattern From the Pattern drop down list you can choose 9 different types of SK
patterns.

SK Color With the Color palette you can choose basic colors or define custom
colors for the Soft keys.

Font Color The Font color on the SK can be changed using the Color palette.

Font Size The Font size can be increased to a max of 40 or decreased to a min of
10. Use the Bold key for bold text.

Grain The Grain slider enables you to manipulate the SK pattern, by adding a
smooth or ruff finish to the Pattern. The Maximum is 70% Grain.

Texture The Texture slider changes the amount of texture so that the Image will be
more of a 3D or flat look pattern. It has a maximum of 100%.

Highlight By using the Highlight slider, you control the Brightness of the SK when
the mouse is HOVERING over it. The Maximum is 70% highlight.

Width The Width of the SK can be adjusted to a minimum of 10 pixels to a

maximum of 180 pixels.

Height The Height of the SK can be adjusted to a minimum of 10 pixels to a

maximum of 180 pixels.

The Default button resets all the Settings to the Factory default.

On the Right hand side of every function, there is a reset button to reset
the Individual setting back to Default.

The OK button is used to apply the Settings to a particular SK tab only

and will also close the Dialog box.

The Apply to All button applies the Settings to ALL currently open SK
views in the Layout. This will then become the Default layout "look" for
any new SK tab's that is opened. Clicking on the Apply to All button will
also close the Dialog box.

Note the following:

 When you use “Apply to All”, the Size and width are not applied to the Editor
tool bar or Wheel assignment, as there sizes are different than other soft keys.

| 14
The Last Selected SK Indicator

The Last Selected SK Indicator

The last selected Soft key on each soft key view will now have a red border to indicate the last
used soft key.

The Above image shows the last used soft keys

NOTE: Each time you restart the Application or change the Window size, the Indication will be
cleared.

15 |
Hand Tool

Hand Tool
A hand tool was added to all Vector dialogs to enable you to drag the Dialogs around the
screen.
Whenever you see the Hand tool, either LEFT click the Mouse or press and hold on the screen
to move the Dialog.

| 16
Master PB Indication

Master PB Indication
The Indication bar will now display the current Master PB.
The following examples show the 3 different types of current Master PB‟s:

Example 1:

The current Master PB is PB 10 on page 1:

When a PB is the Master PB

Example 2:
The current Master PB is Q-Key 10 on page 1:

When a Q-Key is the Master

Example 3:
The current Master PB is on the A/B Cross-Fader:

When the A/B Cross-fader is

the Master PB

NOTE: On Vector Violet ONLY, by pressing and holding the PB SELECT key, will show the
Master PB on the Fader LCD. See Master PB Indication when using the Playback select
key.

17 |
Default Update Options

Default Update Options

You now have the ability to change the Default options of the Update dialog box.
The Default update options can be accessed from the following:
 The Update Items dialog box.
-OR-
 The System settings dialog box in the Editing tab.

NOTE: Any changes made to the Update Items dialog box options, which are saved as
default, will be visible in the System settings Default Update options and vice versa.

The Update Items dialog box

The Update dialog box is where you are able to update Cues and libraries. The Cues affected by
the Update are displayed in the Cue column. The Libraries affected by the Update are displayed
in the Library column. You can update all the Items that appear in the Columns or update items
selectively. Undo is valid for all update actions.

Active Cue

NOTE: The Update Items box can only be accessed once you have an active PB.

| 18
Default Update Options

The Save as Default and Factory Defaults buttons

The Save as Default button

The Save As Default button enables you to change the Default options of the Update items box.
By using this option you are guaranteed that the Item selected from the Update Items box
remains saved as the Default. The new Default will be saved in the Show and warm data.
The Save as Default button can be used with all the Update options except the Copy New Delta
option.

Example:
Let's say you always want to use the Back Track option. Then, all you need to do is
select the Back Track option, and then select Save As Default. This will save the
selected option. Every time you return to the Update Items box, the Back Track option
will still be selected.

The Factory Defaults button

The Factory Defaults button returns the Options in the Update Items dialog box to their factory
Default value which is New to Master PB and Update All Libs options selected.

NOTE: The Factory Defaults button is grayed out when the Settings are the Default.

19 |
Default Update Options

The Default Update options in the Systems settings

The Default update options can also be accessed from the System settings under the Editing tab.
Their functions work in the exact same manner as the Update Items options. See the Update
Items dialog box options.

Default Update Options in the System

Settings dialog box.

The Restore Factory Defaults button

restores all the Default Update options to
their factor default state.

Special conditions for using the Default Update Options

 Cue Only and Back Track are toggle buttons and therefore cannot be used at the same
time.
Example:
If Cue Only is selected and then you select Back Track, then Cue Only will be de-
selected.

 New to Master PB and Grab All are toggle buttons only and therefore cannot be used at
the same time.
Example:
If New to Master PB is selected and then you select Grab All, then New to Master PB
will be canceled and Grab All will become selected.

 When the Master PB Only button is chosen, the Grab All button becomes grayed out,
even if the Grab All button was previously selected.

| 20
New Qlist Store Sequences

New Qlist Store Sequences

There are new sequences to store a Qlist either on the PB or as data which can be used later on.

Using the new sequences

The new sequences can be used to do the following:
a) Store a new Qlist to an empty PB without specifying a Qlist or Cue number.
b) Store a new Qlist to an empty PB specifying the Qlist number.
c) Store a new Qlist on an existing PB.
d) Store a new Qlist without assigning to a PB.

To Store a new Qlist to an empty PB without assigning a Qlist or Cue number

Existing Sequence New Sequence

1. STORE 1. STORE
2. CUE 2. QLIST
3. SELECT PB 3. SELECT PB

NOTE: In Main Master Qlist mode,

this sequence will store a new
Cue to the Main Master Qlist.

With this sequence a Qlist is automatically created with the first available Cue on an
empty PB. Every time you use the above sequence on an existing PB, the Qlist number
will remain the same, but the Cue count will increase.

21 |
New Qlist Store Sequences

Example 1:
Creating a new Qlist to an empty PB in a show that has no Qlists:

Sequence Result

1. STORE The Console assigns Qlist 1 to PB1 with the first available
Cue which is Cue 1.
2. QLIST
3. SELECT PB 1
Qlist 1 on PB 1 with Cue 1

1. STORE The Console assigns the next available Qlist which is Qlist 2
to PB 2 with the first available Cue which is Cue 1
2. QLIST
3. SELECT PB 2
Qlist 2 on PB 2 with Cue 1

Example 2:
Adding a Cue to an existing Qlist in a show that already has Qlist 1 on PB 1 with Cue 1
setup:

Sequence Result

1. STORE The Console assigns the next available Cue which is Cue 2
to Qlist 1 on PB 1.
2. QLIST
3. SELECT PB 1
Qlist 1 on PB 1 with Cue 2

To Store a new Qlist to an empty PB specifying a Qlist number

1. STORE
2. QLIST #
3. SELECT

With this sequence a new Qlist is created with the specified Qlist number, with the
first available Cue.

NOTE: A Qlist number will be created if it does not exist. If the Qlist number exists
then the next available Cue will be created.

| 22
New Qlist Store Sequences

Example:
Let's say you have Qlist 1 on PB 1 and Qlist 2 on PB 2, each having 1 Cue and PB 3 is
empty. You now want to add Qlist 5 to PB 3 with the first available Cue:

Assigned PB's with

Qlist 1 and 2 each
with 1 Cue.

PB 3 is empty

Sequence to assign Qlist 5 to PB 3 with the first available Cue:

1. STORE
2. QLIST 5
3. SELECT PB 3
The result is the following:

The Console assigned

Qlist 5 to PB 3 and
stored the first available
Cue.

NOTE: Storing a new Qlist to an existing PB will overwrite the Qlist on that PB
with the first available Cue.

23 |
New Qlist Store Sequences

Storing a new Qlist without assigning it to a PB

You can store a new Qlist with the first available Cue without assigning it to a PB. The new
Qlist will be visible in the Show ► Qlists tab spread sheet or SK.

Note the following:

 Adding a Qlist without assigning it to a PB can only be done by using a

specific Qlist number.
 Adding a Cue to an existing Qlist will store the next available Cue on that
Qlist.

To Add a Qlist without assigning it to a PB

1. QLIST #
2. STORE
-OR-

1. STORE
2. QLIST #
3. ENTER

Example 1:
Creating a new Qlist without assigning it to a PB:

Sequence Result

1. QLIST 1 The Console adds Qlist 1 to the Show Qlist storing the
first available Cue, which in this case is Cue 1.
2. STORE

Qlist 1 is added
with the first
available Cue.

| 24
New Qlist Store Sequences

NOTE: If you repeat the above sequence with the same Qlist number, then the Console
will store the next available Cue.

Using the NEXT function key

By using the NEXT function key, you are able to see what the next available Qlist number is.
The next available Qlist number is shown in the Command line.
Using the NEXT function key is ideal if you have forgotten the last Qlist number that you used.

To Use the NEXT function key

1. STORE
2. QLIST
3. NEXT
4. SELECT PB

-OR-

1. QLIST
2. NEXT
3. STORE
-OR-

1. STORE
2. QLIST
3. NEXT
4. ENTER

25 |
New Qlist Store Sequences

Example:
If you have Qlist 1 on PB 1, Qlist 2 on PB 2 and Qlist 5 on PB 3, and no other Qlists in
the show, and you want to add an additional Qlist to PB 4, but you are not sure what the
next available Qlist number is, then you can utilize the NEXT function key as follows:
1. STORE
2. QLIST
3. NEXT
The next available Qlist number will be shown in the Command line which is
Qlist 3.
4. Then press SELECT PB 4
The available Qlist number was Qlist 3 which has now been added to PB 4:

Qlist 3 has
been added to
PB 4 storing
the first
available Cue.

NOTE: When the Option “Automatically assign to Playback” is turned ON and

you are NOT in Main Master Qlist mode, if the Master PB is free, the Sequence
above will assign the new Qlist to the Master PB.

| 26
Grid Editing

Grid Editing
The following new changes were made to the Grid editing:

 The Windows arrows can now be used to navigate left and right with the given values.
The up and down arrows will jump between fields as it does now. If there are changes, it
will apply the change and skip to the next cell. This is similar to using the Arrows,
Up/Down/Left and Right on the Ascii keyboard.

 The Next / Prev keys can now be used to navigate like the Console arrow keys do. You
can also use the Next / Prev keys to toggle between options in the Drop down list. This is
similar to using the Arrows, Up/Down/Left and Right on the Ascii keyboard.

 By pressing RESET or SHIFT RESET, will take you out of Grid editing at any point.
This is similar to ESC from the Keyboard which will also turn OFF the SCROLL WIN.

 When pressing ENTER after data has been changed, the System will apply the change
and EXIT the Grid editing and turn OFF the SCROLL WIN. This is similar to using the
ENTER key on the Keyboard.

NOTE: All the existing options for Grid editing are still the same.

27 |
Assigning Decimal Value

Assigning Decimal Value

A new option was added to assign values to a Fixture Parameter in Decimal instead of
Percentage. With this new option comes a change to @ Panel key cap:

The ability to enter a number in decimal is especially handy if you are using a media server and
you want to access a certain folder or file number. The Decimal input can also be used for
Dimmer parameter operations, such as; proportional level, test etc.

Using the Decimal value sequence

The Decimal command is a SHIFT operation of the @ key.
Decimal value assignment is from 0-255. The Decimal value is absolute and will ignore
European value input.

Example: Using a Decimal input for a Fixture dimmer value:

1. FIXTURE #
2. SHIFT

3. @ (Decimal key )

4. Press Enter.

| 28
Assigning Decimal Value

Decimal Input Rules

The following is a list of input Decimal rules for Enter and Action sequence modes:

Input Rule How it works..

3 Digit Input
If you input a 3 digit decimal value, the Output will
be immediate.
NOTE: You can also use a 3 digit
number with a “0”(Zero) at the
beginning; For example: 023 After you input a 3 digit value, press Enter.

Less than 3 digit input If you input a 2 or 1 digit decimal value, the
Output will not be immediate until you press
Enter.

This operation works in both Action and

Enter modes.

Input value over 255 or a 4 digit input value. Any input value over 255, or, a 4 digit value input
will cause the Console to select the next selection
and will ignore the Input value and will not output
a value.

Example:
[Channel , 1 , SHIFT, @, 1256]
Will cause the Console to select Channel 6

More sequence examples:

 Fixture level or Fixture parameter level:
Fixture, #, CYAN, Shift+@, #
Fixture, #, ->, #, Shift+@, 010, ->, 120 to Fan the Values
 Dimmer test level:
Dimmer, #, Shift+@, #
 Dimmer proportional level:
Dimmer, #, proportion level, Shift+@, #
 Input patch to a MACRO trigger level:
Dimmer, #, INPUT PATCH To, Macro, #, SHIFT+@, #

29 |
Main Master Qlist Mode

Main Master Qlist Mode

The Main Master Qlist mode allows you to work with 1 main Qlist which will always be
assigned to the A/B Cross fader.
Every time you store a Cue, by default it will be assigned to the Main Master Qlist even if the
A/B Cross fader is not assigned. This gives you an easier way of programming by making sure
that all Cues‟ will be stored to the same Qlist, unless you specify a different Qlist number.
Once the Main Master Qlist mode is activated, the Master PB will be locked to the A/B Cross
fader with NO option to select a different Master PB, unless you deactivate the Main Master
Qlist mode.

NOTE: The Main Master Qlist can be used in either Compulite or Tracking mode.

How to enable the Main Master Qlist mode

The Main Master Qlist mode is enabled or disabled from the System settings dialog box. [Tools
►Settings ►Editing]

The Main Master Qlist button

| 30
Main Master Qlist Mode

Special color coding for the Main Master Qlist

The Main Master Qlist has special color coding which helps you identify when the Mode is
active. The Color coding is Cyan text and/or shade when the Mode is enabled.
The new color coding can be seen in the following locations:
 Indication bar – Master PB, Qlist and the last stored Cue fields.
 Playback – A/B view
 Playback – Master View – PB Tab
 Playback – Master View – Cue sheet Tab
 Playback Wing window

Color changes to the Indication bar

When the Main Master Qlist mode is activated, the Background color on the Indication bar
[MPB: Qlist: Cue:] changes to the Cyan color, this is an indication that the Main Master Qlist
mode is now active:

The Cyan color indicates

the Main Master Qlist is
active.

Color changes in the Playback – Master View in the PB Tab

Active Main Master Qlist – Qlist 1 text is in Cyan

with A/B and Cue 1 in Cyan shade.

Color changes in the Playback – Master View in the Cue Sheet Tab

Active Main Master Qlist – Shaded Cyan color on

the Progress bar for the Active Cue.

NOTE: The Color changes in the Playback – Master View in the Cue sheet tab are the same for
the Playback A/B view as the A/B is locked as the Master PB.

31 |
Main Master Qlist Mode

Color changes in the Playback Wing window

The Qlist text is Cyan indicating the Main Master

Qlist is active and this Qlist is the Main Master Qlist.

Using the Main Master Qlist Mode

When the Main Master Qlist mode is active, any exciting Qlist on the A/B Cross fader will
become the Main Master Qlist. You can also change the Qlist on the A/B Cross fader which will
then become the New Main Master Qlist.
If you activate the Main Master Qlist with no existing Qlist in the A/B Cross fader, then Qlist 1
will automatically be assigned storing the first available Cue to the Main Master Qlist, unless
you assign a specific Qlist to the A/B Cross fader.
There is no available option to have no Main Master Qlist while the Main Master Qlist mode is
active. If you free the A/B cross fader, the Console will remember the last Main Master Qlist that
was on the A/B Cross fader, which is still the Current Qlist, until you assign a different Qlist.
The last Main Master Qlist can be seen in the Status bar:

The last Main Master

Qlist was Qlist 5

NOTE: If you are modifying or storing new Cues while working in Tracking or Compulite Mode
with "Automatically Assign to Playback" enabled, then the System will auto assign the last
Main Master Qlist to the A/B Cross fader if the A/B Cross fader is not assigned.

While the Main Master Qlist is active you can still store new Qlists on other Playback's in order
to create Chasers, Looped Cues, Effects, etc.
You can also store Temp Cues on the A/B Cross fader when in the Main Master Qlist mode. If a
Temp Cue is stored to the A/B Cross fader, then the Qlist that was on the A/B Cross fader will
still be the Main Master Qlist.

NOTE: If the "Automatically Assign to Playback" is enabled, then storing the next Cue will
override the Temp Cue.

| 32
Main Master Qlist Mode

Important notes when the Main Master Qlist is active

 If the A/B is empty, NO sequence of storing Cues will create a new Qlist on the A/B
unless you specify a Qlist to the A/B.
 The Sequence of [STORE, CUE, SELECT] on any PB will NOT create a new Qlist
as it always did when the Main Master Qlist mode was off. Instead, this sequence will
assign another Cue to the Main Master Qlist on the Selected PB with the Sequence
OFF in the Qlist Properties for fast operation as a single Cue.
 The Qlist field text in the PB View will be in Cyan color. See Special color coding for
the Main Master Qlist.
 Any [STORE+ / CUE #, STORE etc] sequence will always store the next Cue to the
Main Master Qlist.
 If you free the A/B and not assign a Qlist to it, then the next time you use the
[STORE+ / CUE # , STORE, etc ] sequences, it will add the next Cue to the Main
Master Qlist.

Example:
If your Main Master Qlist is Qlist 6 with Cue 2 and your A/B is empty.
Store a new Cue using [STORE+ / CUE #, STORE etc], Qlist 6 will be assigned to the A/B (If
"Automatically Assign to Playback" is enabled) with the next available Cue, which is Cue 3.

Sequence for creating and assigning a new Qlist to an empty PB

Due to the fact that in the Main Master Qlist mode the Sequence [STORE, CUE, SELECT PB]
or [STORE, SELECT PB], (when temp Cues are off), will always store a new Cue in the Main
Master Qlist.
The Sequence to assign and store a new Qlist is via the following sequence:

To Store a new Qlist directly to a PB

 See New Qlist Store Sequences

NOTE: If you select the A/B to store the new Qlist, then the new assigned Qlist will become
the new Main Master Qlist.

33 |
Main Master Qlist Mode

Using Cue operations while the Main Master Qlist is active

If the A/B is empty, any Cue operation without specifying the Qlist number will automatically
default to the Main Master Qlist.

Sequence Examples:

 [Cue #, Exam/ Exam, Cue #, ENTER]

 [Cue #  #, Loop]
 [Cue #, Link, Cue #...]
 [Cue #, Time…]

| 34
Fine Tuning for 8 Bit Parameters

Fine Tuning for 8 Bit Parameters

An option was added to enable you to use the SHIFT + WHEEL to fine tune the 8 Bit
parameters, in the exact same way as you can do with the 16 Bit parameters. This will help make
the Parameter changes slower, which in turn will give you better control of the Parameters.
When using the 16 Bit parameter with the extra Tilt Fine and Pan Fine wheels, the combination
of SHIFT + Tilt Fine, will give you extra fine resolution of that parameter.

35 |
Tracking General Library Renamed

Tracking General Library Renamed

The Library Tracking General was re-named to General.
The Short name for the General library has also been renamed to Gen, instead of the Old Trk.
All previous saved shows prior to the 3.18 release will automatically be converted to the new
library name.

Library Renamed to General

| 36
GO For MultiFades

GO For MultiFades
The GO For MultiFades button can now be used to enable or disable the GO for fading
between Cues while a fade is in progress. The GO time will run according to the Cue fade time
which has been entered.
The GO For MultiFades is located in the Playback tab under the GO Behavior section:

GO For MultiFades button

The Button operates in the following ways:

Button action How it works

When Activated While a Cue is in a fading progress, pressing on the GO key will
instantly fade to the next Cue that is in line, using the next Cue timing.

Example:
Cue 4 is fading at 20 seconds and next Cue is Cue 5 which has a fade
in time of 8 seconds, if the GO button is pressed during the fade, then
Cue 5 will start its fade at 8 seconds.

When Deactivated While a Cue is in a fading progress, pressing on the GO key will NOT
instantly fade to the next Cue that is in line, until the current Cue has
finished its fade.

Example:

Cue 4 is fading at 20 seconds and the next Cue is Cue 5 which has a
fade in time of 8 seconds. If the GO button is pressed during the fade,
nothing will happen until Cue 4 has completed its fade; only then a GO
press is needed to fade to Cue 5.

37 |
GO For MultiFades

SHIFT + GOTO sequence

The SHIFT + GOTO sequence enables you to instantly fade to the next available Cue when
running Cues on the Master PB. This key sequence will instantly force a fade to the next Cue in
its Cue time.
The SHIFT + GOTO option sequence is always enabled as long as you have Cues set up on the
Master PB only, and it is not affected whether the GO For Multifades option is enabled or
disabled.
Basically this is a shorter method of achieving the exact same result as using the GO For
Multifades option. The difference being in that after activating the GO For Multifades option,
uses just the GO key to jump to the next Cue, whereas the other option is to use the SHIFT +
GO key sequence together.

Example:

If Cue 2 has a Time-In of 4 seconds, and Cue 3 has a Time-In of 10 seconds and Cue 2 is
currently fading IN, if you press the key sequence SHIFT + GOTO, then Cue 3 will
instantly fade IN, in its Time-In of 10 seconds.

NOTE: In Tracking Mode, if the Values are still fading and they are in Tracking, they will
continue fading according to their own timing, Cue or parameter timing.

| 38
PB Control Operations that exclude the Master PB

PB Control Operations that exclude the Master PB

There is a new range of PB Control operations that can be used on all the PB's without affecting
the Master PB.
The new range of PB Control operations comes with a new sequence:
[PB Control Command,  (Through Command)]

Example:
To free all the PB's except the Master PB, use the Sequence [FREE,]. All the PB's will be
freed, except the Master PB.

New operation sequences

The following is a list of new PB Control operation sequences that will not affect the Master PB:

PB Controls with  Command What happens

Will Join all the PB's except the Master PB.

+
Will toggle the Trigger ON/OFF on all the PB's
TRIG (Shift Seq)
+ except the Master PB.

Will toggle the sequence ON/OFF on all the PB’s

SEQ
+ except the Master PB.

Will Free all the PB’s except the Master PB.

+
Will turn ON all the PB’s except the Master PB.
+
Will Solo all the PB’s except the Master PB. (All
+ PB’s will remain Active except the Master PB).
To Exit from the Solo mode, click on any key or
the  key.

Will turn all the PB's into STEP mode except the
+ Master PB.

Will release all the PB’s except the Master PB.

+
Will send a GO command to all the PB’s except
+ the Master PB.

39 |
PB Control Operations that exclude the Master PB

PB Controls with  Command What happens

Will send HOLD / BACK command to all the PB’s

+ except the Master PB.

Will reverse the direction of all the PB’s except

+ the Master PB.

Will select all the PB’s so that you can use the
+ RATE Wheel assignment options on all of them
except the Master PB

ATTENTION! PRIO and SUB MASTER are not supported by the above sequences and
will generate an "INVALID SEQUENCE" error!

| 40
Look-Ahead Enhancement

Look-Ahead Enhancement
Now there is a choice to filter the Look Ahead on the Master PB Only or on ALL active
playbacks.
The Look Ahead buttons are located in the System settings ► Playback tab:

The Look-Ahead options are toggle buttons in which only 1 option can be selected at a time.

The Functions of the Look-Ahead buttons

The following are the Look-Ahead buttons and there functions:

Button What it does..

Look-Ahead will work ONLY on the Active Master PB. All the other PB’s will
work normally ignoring the Look Ahead mask (as if the Look Ahead is
disabled).

Look-Ahead will work all PBs (as it was in older versions).

NOTE: The Look-Ahead rules apply to both Look-Ahead options. See Chapter 14 in the Vector
Manual.

41 |
Playback Intensity Limit

Playback Intensity Limit

A new feature has been added which enables you to adjust the Intensity limit of a PB using an
Intensity limit wheel or via the SETUP PB dialog box. This feature works with Temp Cues,
Qlists and Chasers.
The new Intensity limit wheel is simply a faster way of changing the Intensity limit of a specific
PB without changing the PB fader behavior to Intensity Master.
The Intensity limit will work on all PB types; QK‟s, PB‟s and the A/B cross-fader.

ATTENTION! The Intensity limit feature will limit any intensity from a specific PB ONLY and
ONLY if the Fader behavior is other than Intensity Master.

Example:
1. Set spot 1 intensity value to FL and Spot 2 intensity value to 50%.
2. Store as Cue 1 on PB 1.
3. Set spot 1 intensity value to 80%, and spot 2 intensity value to 20%.
4. Store as Cue 2 on the same PB.
5. Change the PB behavior to All Param (for example) and release it.
6. From the PB properties dialog box of PB 1, change the Intensity limit using Wheel 3 to
50%.
7. Go to Cue 1 on PB 1 – Spot 1 value will be 50% and spot 2 value will be 25%.
Go to Cue 2 on PB 1 – Spot 1 value will be 40%, and spot 2 value will be 10%

Viewing the Intensity limit values

The Intensity limit values can be viewed in the Wings and Qkeys PB views.
The Wing view:

Intensity Limit value

The PB Fader behavior

| 42
Playback Intensity Limit

The Qkeys view:

Intensity limit value

Tip! The “Level/Prio” field is optional in the QK Wing view and can be added from the Grid
properties.

How to access the Intensity limit wheel

There are 3 ways to access the Intensity limit wheel:
 From the RATE key via the Wheel assignment named Intensity Limit (Wheel 3).
 From the Wheel assignment of the Playback properties dialog box (Wheel 3):

 From the Qlist properties tab in the Playback properties dialog box:

How to modify the Intensity Limit

You can modify the Intensity limit for a selected PB by doing either of the following:

 Typing an intensity value into the Int. Limit field;

 Using the Arrows;

 Spinning the Intensity Limit Wheel (Wheel 3);

43 |
Playback Intensity Limit

Rules for using the Intensity Limit

 When a Selected PB fader behavior is set to Intensity Master, then the Intensity Limit
option in the PB Properties dialog will be grayed out, as the PB fader has priority in
controlling the intensity of the Selected PB.
The Intensity Limit wheel via the RATE key will not function and will not change
anything on the Selected PB.
Intensity limit option is grayed out when a selected PB fader
behavior is set to Intensity Master.

 When changing the PB fader behavior from Intensity Master to any other behavior, the
Intensity limit wheel will not be grayed out and the Value will be that of the last used
fader intensity value.
 The Intensity limit wheel value is saved in the Qlist properties.
 When assigning a Qlist to a PB, the Console will always take the Stored Intensity limit
value from the Qlist properties, unless the fader behavior is set to Intensity Master
Behavior.

Sequences for modifying the Intensity Limit

In order to use the following sequences, the behavior of the PB faders must be different than
Intensity Master.
Using the Intensity Limit can be done from either of the following:
 The PB properties dialog box
-OR-
 The Rate Wheel assignment

ATTENTION! Changing the Intensity Limit by using the following sequences will affect the PB
output immediately. If the PB is active, then the Intensity Level will change instantly!

NOTE: If the Fixture is an RGB Fixture with no “real dimmer” parameter, but it has a Virtual
Dimmer, then the Intensity limit will affect the level of the RGB values.

| 44
Playback Intensity Limit

Using the PB properties dialog box

1. Setup ► Select a PB
2. Spin wheel 3 to change the Intensity limit value.
-OR-
From the Qlist Properties tab, enter a value from 0-100 into the Int. Limit (Wheel 3)
field,
-OR-
Use the Int. Limit arrows:

The Intensity value of the Selected PB will be changed.

NOTE: With this sequence you can only select 1 PB at a time.

45 |
Playback Intensity Limit

Using the RATE wheel assignment

NOTE: The PB’s must be occupied in order to use the RATE wheel assignment
sequences.

The following are the Sequences for RATE wheel assignment:

PB’s Selected Sequence

All occupied PB’s 1. RATE

2. Spin wheel 3
The Intensity value of all the occupied PB’s will be
changed if the fader is other than Intensity Master.

1 PB selected 1. RATE ► Select PB

2. Spin wheel 3
The Intensity value of the selected occupied PB
will be changed.

Multiple PB’s 1. RATE ► Select PB► Select PB (Select multiple

faders)
-OR-
RATE ► ( To select all except the Master PB)
2. Spin wheel 3
The Intensity value of the selected occupied PB’s
will be changed.

| 46
New TOPO Options & Improvements

New TOPO Options & Improvements

A new range of options and improvements were added to the Topo. These new options are
available in the System settings.
With the new Topo options you can:
 Set Stage Measurements in centimeters or inches.
 Set the Fixture Display Set Types; Channel, Spot, Matrix or Media Server
 Decide what fields will be visible in the Fixture Set Types; Fixture Name, Fixture
Number, both Fixture Name and Number or None.

The New TOPO Options

The Stage measurements settings:

Fields / Options What They Do

Display measurements in Centimeters

( New added option )

Display measurements in Inches

( New added option )

Stage Width Values to increase or decrease Width

Stage Depth Values to increase or decrease Depth

47 |
New TOPO Options & Improvements

The newly added Fixture Display settings:

Options What They Do

In the Set Type drop down list you can choose which Set Type
you want to configure - Channel, Spot, Matrix or Media Server.

NOTE: The Default Set Type is Channel

If Fixture Name is selected then the Name of the Fixture will be

displayed on the Fixture icon in the Topo view.

If Fixture Number is selected then the Number of the Fixture will

be displayed on the Fixture icon in the Topo view.

The Apply To All Sets option will use the current Fixture display
settings on all the other Set Types.

Example:
If you have selected to display just the Fixture name and
you click on the Apply To All Sets then all the Set Types
will display only the Fixture name on the Fixture icons in
the Topo view.

| 48
New TOPO Options & Improvements

How the Fixture Display settings affect the Fixture icons

The new Display settings affect the Fixture icon in the following ways:

When the Option is selected Displayed as

Both Fixture Name and Fixture Number:
The Fixture name will be visible at the
TOP.

The Fixture number and Set Type code

will be visible at the Bottom.

NOTE: This is the Default.

Fixture Name Only:

Only the Fixture name will be visible at
the TOP.

Fixture Number Only:

Only the Fixture number with the Set
Type code will be visible at the TOP.

None Selected:
No Options will be visiable.

49 |
New TOPO Options & Improvements

New display format for the Fixture icon

There is a new display format for displaying information and Set Types on the Fixture icon. The
Set Type has a Set Type Code.

The Set Type with Set Type Code: The Fixture icon in the live view:

Fixture Name
Set Type Set Type Code

Channel Ch Fixture Intensity Value

Spot Sp
Fixture Number
Matrix Mx
The Set Type code indicating the
Media Server Ms Set Type

Note the following:

 The above settings also affect the Topo view in the Patch Manager; the only
difference is, in the Patch Manager the Address of the Fixture will be visible in
the middle of the Fixture icon instead of the Intensity Value.
 These settings also affect the PRINT of the Topo view; the Print data will be
according to the Patch manager Topo view.

New Fixture icons for the Matrix and Media server Fixtures
In addition to the Spot and Channel Fixture icons, there now is a separate icon for the Matrix and
Media server. This makes it easier to distinguish between sets that are being used in the Topo
map.
The New Fixture icons:

Matrix Icon Media Server Icon

The New Matrix Fixture The New Media Server

icon Fixture icon

| 50
New TOPO Options & Improvements

Configuring the Topo settings

Configuring the Stage Measurements and / or Fixture display type, can be done before entering
Topo view or while in the Patch manager Topo view.

Note the following:

 By default the Measurements are in Centimeters with the Default dimensions of;
1800cm x 1200cm.
 The Maximum stage size is
8000 x 5000 cm
-OR-
3150 x 1969 inch
 The Default for the Fixture display Set Type is Channel with the Fixture Name
and Fixture Number enabled for all sets.

Accessing the Topo settings tab

There are 2 ways to display the Topo settings tab:
 From the Tools menu ► Setting ► Topo Tab.
-OR-
 From the Patch manager via the Topo toolbar ► Topo Settings.

Using the Topo settings

The Topo settings can be used for changing the Stage measurements and Fixture display

To Change the Stage measurements

1. In the Topo tab under the Heading "Stage Measurements", select either Centimeters
or Inches
2. Enter the desired measurements in the available fields according to your selection (cm
/ inch).
3. Click Apply.

51 |
New TOPO Options & Improvements

To Set the Fixture Display options

1. In the Topo tab under the Heading "Fixture Display", click on the Set Type drop
down list and choose the Set Type.
2. Click on either Fixture name or Fixture number Refer to: New Display format for
the Fixture icons.
3. Click Apply.
Optional – Using Apply To All Sets
4. Click on Apply To All Sets, to apply the settings to all the Set Types.
5. Click Apply.

| 52
Matrix Grid Zoom

Matrix Grid Zoom

Three new buttons where added to the Pane Title of the Matrix grid inside the Patch manager.
Now you can zoom in, out or fit the Matrix grid to screen.
These new buttons can only be used when you are in the Patch manager Matrix list view:

Fit To Screen

Zoom Out

Zoom In

NOTE: Once you set the Zoom for a Matrix grid view, the Zoom will remain unchanged until you
navigate to the Main Matrix list view. The Zoom of the Matrix grid view will then go back to the
Default zoom size.

53 |
System Settings Tab Layouts

System Settings Tab Layouts

We re-arranged the System settings tabs and their options in a more logical order to improve
navigation within the System settings.
Changes were made to the following System settings Tabs:
 General tab
 Editing tab
 Playback tab
 DMX Protocols tab
 Topo tab
 Hardware tab

General tab
The following was added to the General tab:
 200% option for the Grand Master:

| 54
System Settings Tab Layouts

Editing tab

NOTE: This tab was originally called the Behavior tab, now it has been changed to the Editing
tab.

The following was added to the Editing tab:

 Main Master Qlist option in the Operation Mode section.
 Default Update Options

New options on the Editing tab

55 |
System Settings Tab Layouts

Playback tab
The following was added and moved to the Playback tab:
 The Look Ahead Active option name was changed to Look Ahead On ALL PB in the
Look-Ahead section.
 Look Ahead On Master PB ONLY option in the Look-Ahead section.
 GO For Multi Fades option in the GO Behavior section.
 The Default PB Definitions is located in the Playback tab instead of the Default PB
Definition tab.
 The PB keys are now the same as the PB keys in the Real SETUP dialog which makes it
easier to use on the Touch screen.
 ALL Auto Snap Update and Snap Options, were moved from the old Behavior tab to
the new Playback tab.
 The Ordered Playback Priority and Dip X-Fade were moved from the old Behavior
tab to the new Playback tab.

New and changed options

| 56
System Settings Tab Layouts

DMX Protocols tab

The following was added to the DMX Protocols tab:
 ACN option in the DMX-On-Ethernet section.
 ACN check boxes with Check All and Uncheck All options.

New options

57 |
System Settings Tab Layouts

Topo tab
The following was added to the Topo tab:
 Centimeters and Inches option in the Stage Measurements section.
 The Fixture Display section which includes:
 Set Type drop down list
 Fixture Name option
 Fixture Number option

New options

Hardware tab
Warning messages have been added to make you aware of certain actions that could cause a
malfunction to the Console.
These messages have been added to the following setting options:
 Display Settings
 Network Settings
 Touch Screen Settings

NOTE! Once OK is clicked, the Warning messages will no longer be valid until Vector is
restarted!

ATTENTION! Caution is advised when making changes to these options.

| 58
Viewing the Show Name and IP

Viewing the Show Name and IP

You are now able to view the Show name and IP address in the System settings dialog.
 Tools ► Settings

System IP

Show Name

NOTE: On Vector PC the IP will not be shown, unless the Network card is named "Vector
Network"

59 |
New Dimmer Properties Option

New Dimmer Properties Option

A new Soft key option has been added to the Dimmer options on the Editor tool bar called
Dimmer Properties. By using the Dimmer Properties, you can access the Grand Master and the
Dimmer Curves options, both of which can also be accessed, as always, from the Patch Manager
(DMX Channel Properties).

This enables faster and easier access to these options without opening the Patch manager.

The Dimmer Properties Soft key on the Editor Tool bar:

New added option – Dimmer Properties

The Grand Master and Curve options in the new Dimmer Properties tool bar:

New Grand Master and Curve options

Working with Grand Master and Curve from the Dimmer properties
The Grand Master and Curve options in the Dimmer Properties work the same way as they do in
the Patch Manager.
The Dimmer Properties tool bar contains the Grand Master and Curve Soft keys, together with
the existing Proportion level and Clear Proportion level Soft keys.
When using the Grand Master Soft key on a single or a range of Dimmers, the following colors
apply:

 Blue, when the Grand Master is OFF for the given range.

 Orange, when the Grand Master in ON for the given range.

 Light Orange, when the Grand Master has a MIX of Dimmers ON and OFF for the
given range.

NOTE: The activity of the Grand Master can also be seen in the Command line:

| 60
New Dimmer Properties Option

When you choose the Curve option from the Dimmer Properties, a new tool bar will open with
all the existing Dimmer Curves that are available in the Patch Manager.
The Current active Dimmer Curve for the given range of Dimmers will be highlighted in
Orange:

Curve Options

Active Dimmer Curve

When using the Curve Soft key on a single or a range of Dimmers, the following colors apply:

 Orange, when one of the Curve options is ON for a given range.

 Light Orange, when there is a MIX of Curve options ON and OFF for a given range.

NOTE: The Activity of the Curves can also be seen in the Command line:

How to access the Dimmer Properties

The Dimmer properties can be accessed by either of the following sequences:
 DIMMER #
-OR-
 FIXTURE #, DIMMER

61 |
New Dimmer Properties Option

Using the Grand Master option

Fixtures or Dimmers need to be selected in order to use the Grand Master ON / OFF option.

To Enable or Disable the Grand Master

1. Select a Fixture or Fixtures.(optional)

2. Press DIMMER.
The Dimmer options on the editor tool bar will appear.
3. From the Dimmer options on the Editor Tool bar, Tap Dimmer properties.
The Dimmer properties tool bar will appear:

4. Click on the Grand Master to toggle it ON or OFF.

5. Press STORE

-OR-
Press ENTER

Note the following:

 If you have a range of Dimmers that the Grand Master is ON and OFF,
then the color of the Grand Master will be light Orange.
 If you click on the Grand Master (ON/OFF) while it is light Orange, then
the console will change all the selected Dimmers to the new setting.

| 62
New Dimmer Properties Option

Using the Curve option

Fixtures or Dimmers need to be selected in order to use the Curve option.

To Change Dimmer Curve

1. Select a Fixture or Fixtures.(Optional)

2. Press DIMMER.
The Dimmer options on the editor tool bar will appear.
3. From the Dimmer options on the Editor Tool bar, Tap Dimmer properties.
4. Press Curve.
The Curve tool bar will appear:

NOTE: The Current active Dimmer Curve will be highlighted in Orange.

5. Select a different Dimmer curve setting if desired.
6. Press STORE
7. -OR-
Press ENTER

Note the following:

 There can only be 1 Curve selected.

 If you have 2 or more Dimmers with different Curve settings, then
the color of the used Curves will be light Orange.
 By selecting a new curve setting, all the selected Dimmers will
change to the new Curve setting.
 If you select a different Curve setting, it will turn OFF the active
Curve and Vector will store the new Curve setting.

63 |
Absolute DMX Toggle Display

Absolute DMX Toggle Display

A new option has been added to the Dimmer tool bar, to enables you to view Dimmer patch
information in 2 ways, which can be seen in the Command line. With the new option called
"Absolute DMX Display" you can decide to view the Absolute Dimmer range or the short
Dimmer range with Port numbers.

Accessing the Absolute DMX Display option

The Absolute DMX Display option can only be accessed after using the following sequence:

1. FIXTURE #
2. DIM

NOTE: By default this option is OFF.

The Dimmer tool bar:

The New Option; Absolute DMX Display

| 64
Absolute DMX Toggle Display

Using the Absolute DMX Display

The following example shows how you can use the Absolute DMX display:

Example:
Channel 1 is patched to 3 Dimmers;
 Dimmer 1 on Port 1
 Dimmer 1 on Port 2
 Dimmer 1 on Port 3

The Sequence;
1. Channel, 1
2. DIM
Will display the following in the Command line:

When Absolute What happens Command Line will

DMX Display display..
option is..

OFF The Command line will [Channel 1, Dimmer 1, 2/1,

display the short Dimmer 3/1]
range.

ON The Toolbar option color will [Channel 1, Dimmer 1, 513,

be orange and it will display 1025]
the full Dimmer range.

65 |
DMX Port Swap

DMX Port Swap

A new sequence has been added to enable DMX Port swapping.
The Console will swap the entire Port including external parameters and all DMX properties
related to each Dimmer. The Console will only allow one Port to be swapped at a time.
The advantages of Port swapping is that if you need to move all the Fixtures from Port 1 to Port
2, instead of clearing the Fixture patches and then re-patching them, you can simply swap the
Ports.
Once you have swapped the DMX Ports, you will need to connect the related DMX Port cables
to the new Port. If you are using Ethernet protocols (IE: VC) you will also need to modify the
DMX Protocols settings accordingly: [Tools► System settings ►DMX Protocols]

Swap With option on the Tool bar:

Using the DMX Port Swapping sequence

The SHIFT key needs to be used in order to activate the DMX key.

To Swap DMX Ports

1. SHIFT, DMX
2. Type the Port number to swap.
3. @
-OR-
From the Tool bar click on the Swap With option
Either way the Command line will display the text [Swap with DMX Port].
4. Type the Port number you want to swap with.
5. STORE
-OR-

Click ENTER

| 66
DMX Port Swap

Either way the Console will prompt you with a warning message:

6. Click OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the swap.

ATTENTION! There is NO UNDO for Port Swap.

67 |
Track Sheet Improvements

Track Sheet Improvements

The following new features have been added to the Track sheet:
 You can filter the Parameters by Bank types.
 There is an option to view all the Parameters of the Active bank or view just one
parameter.
 Every Fixture number heading is shown in a different color (Blue and Cyan), and the line
between them will also be in those colors to help you locate them quickly.
 Fixture names can be seen on the Header of the Fixture, instead of just a number.

Track Sheet Improvements

Filter by Bank Type

New grid colors

| 68
Quick Dimmer Patch Information

Quick Dimmer Patch Information

By using the Sequence of [DIM #, FIXTURE…], will allow you to quickly get valuable
Dimmer patch information about a selected Dimmer. This information will be displayed in the
Command line and will work in both Action and Enter modes. If the Dimmer has different DMX
properties other than the Default, they will also be displayed in the Command line.

The advantage of using this feature is that you can still store the Dimmer to any Fixture number
as you do now, but you will know in advance if the Dimmer is patched or not before you get the
override warning.

NOTE: This sequence will only work for SINGLE Dimmer.

How to display Dimmer patch information

Dimmer patch information can be displayed using the following sequences. These sequences will
works for ALL set types.

To display Dimmer patch information

1. DIM #
2. FIXTURE
Example:
If Channel 1 is patched to Dimmer 128, and you use the sequence DIM 128,
Channel, then the command line will display:

This shows that Dimmer 128 is patched to Channel 1.

-OR-
1. DIM #
2. SHIFT
3. SET
Example:
If Dimmer 1 is patched to Spot 1, and you use the Sequence DIM 1, SHIFT, SET,
then the Command line will display:

This shows that Dimmer 1 is patched to Spot 1, and the Parameter is Cyan.

69 |
Quick Dimmer Patch Information

Example:

Dimmer 1 is patched to Channel 1. The Default Dimmer parameter DMX

properties are: Grand master Enabled, Curve Linear and proportional patch of
100%. Dimmer 1 has GM disabled, Proportional level is set to 80% and the curve
is set to Preheat 10%.
Using the Sequence DIM 1, Channel, will display all the changes, since the
Default has been changed:

Note the following:

 If the Dimmer is not patched to any Fixture, the Command line will display;
Unpatched.
 The Command line will still display the currently patched Fixture regardless of
the Set type chosen.

| 70
Dimmer Exam View

Dimmer Exam View

You are now able to examine a full DMX Port or a specific Dimmer address. This is now done
directly from the Keypad or from the Workspace tree:

Examining a full DMX Port:

Examining a specific Dimmer or DMX Port:

The ALL DMX Ports tab

shows ALL the DMX Ports

The DMX Port Exam tab

shows a specific DMX
Port

The Dimmer Exam tab

show a specific Dimmer

71 |
Dimmer Exam View

Examining a specific Port address from the Workspace Tree:

How to Exam a DMX Port

You can Exam a DMX Port by using the new DMX key.

To Exam a DMX Port

1. Press SHIFT + DIM.

2. Enter a Port number.
-OR-
Use the NEXT or PREV keys.
3. Press Exam.

| 72
Dimmer Exam View

1. Press Exam.
2. Press SHIFT + DIM.
3. Enter a Port number. (Example 1)
-OR-
Use the NEXT / PREV keys.
4. Press Exam or ENTER.
The Default Exam view will be displayed showing the Selected Port.

Tip! While the Port Exam window is open, you can use the NEXT and PREV keys to
navigate to the Next or Previous Port. This will only work if you do not press RESET.

How to Exam a specific Address

You can Exam a specific Address by either entering a full range number or a Port / Address
number. Either way the Exam for the desired address will open.

To Exam a Port / Address number

1. Press DIM.
2. Enter a Port number.

3. Press , then enter the Address number.( Example: 3/500)

4. Press Exam.

1. Press Exam.
2. Press DIM.
3. Enter a Port number.

4. Press , then enter the Address number.( Example: 3/500)

5. Press Exam or ENTER.

73 |
Dimmer Exam View

To Exam a full number range

1. Press DIM.
2. Enter a full range number (Example: 1524).
3. Press Exam.

1. Press Exam.
2. Press DIM.
3. Enter a full range number (Example: 1524).
4. Press Exam or ENTER.

Tip! While the specific address Exam window is open, you can use the NEXT and
PREV keys to navigate to the Next or Previous address. This will only work if you do
not press RESET.

| 74
ACN Support

ACN Support
Vector now supports streaming ACN which enables you to control Fixtures over a network.
ACN is a simple protocol that offers functionality comparable to existing DMX over Ethernet
protocols.
In order to use the ACN Protocol you need to make sure that you‟re Console and Fixtures are in
the same network environment.

Example:

If Vector IP is 91.xx.xx.xx and the Subnet mask is 255.0.0.0, then the Fixture IP must
also begin with 91 and Subnet mask must be 255.0.0.0

How to use ACN

The ACN options are located in the System settings ► DMX Protocols tab:

75 |
ACN Support

To Enable ACN

1. From the Tools menu click on settings.

2. From the System settings click on the DMX Protocols tab.
3. Tick the ACN Port that you would like to enable.
Once you tick an ACN Port/s, the ACN option will become available:

4. Click on the ACN option to enable the ACN Protocol for the selected ports.
5. Click OK or Apply.
The Indication bar will show ACN, to indicate that ACN is enabled:

Tip! You can use or options to tick or untick the ACN

selections.

| 76
Vector PC Panel Skins

Vector PC Panel Skins

You are now able to select a panel skin that represents a certain Vector console. The Panel will
now look very similar to the actual console. The Panel buttons and layout will be re-ordered
according to the actual Console skin that has been chosen.

Example:
If you choose the Violet skin, then the Panel buttons will be re-ordered according to the
Panel layout of the actual Vector Violet console.

Changing panel skins enables you to work in a familiar panel environment of a certain Vector
console therefore making life much easier for you.
There are 6 Panel skins to choose from:
 Red – (Vector red console)
 Blue – (Vector blue console)
 Green – (Vector green console)
 Orange – (Vector orange console)
 Violet – (Vector Violet console)
 Editor (Remote editor wing)

NOTE: The Default skin is Blue

How to change the Panel skins

Changing panel skins is done from the Skins menu. There are 2 ways to access the Skins menu:
1. Right click the Mouse anywhere when you see the Hand curser

-OR-

2. From the PC panel menu bar

77 |
Vector PC Panel Skins

NOTE: To reveal the Panel menu bar (Which is normally hidden), place the Mouse over the
top left hand corner of the Panel.

To Change the Panel skin

1. From the PC panel, click on Skins.

-OR-
On the PC panel right click the Mouse when you see the Hand curser, and select
Skins from the Menu.
2. From the Skins menu, click on the desired skin

The Panel skin will change immediately.

NOTE: When you change the PC Panel skin, it will also affect the Remote PC editor
and vice versa.

| 78
Hotkey Mapping

Hotkey Mapping
You are now able to modify the Hotkeys mapping on the PC Panel. This enables you to
customize your Hotkey mapping according to your preferences. It is also possible to save a few
Hotkey mapping sets, so that each user can have his own Hotkey set.

NOTE: The Enable Panel Hotkeys option has been moved to the new Hotkeys Menu.

The Hotkeys menu

The Hotkeys menu contains all the Hotkey options:

The following are the Hotkey menu options and there functions:

Hotkey edit menu option What it does

Enable Panel Hotkeys Enable or Disable the Hotkeys for the Panel.

Edit Hotkeys Mode When enabled, you can edit any Hotkey by
clicking on the Panel button or Wheel.

Save Keyboard Hotkeys Mapping Saves the Current mapping of the Hotkeys, to a
file with the Extension. cvk.

Load Keyboard Hotkeys Mapping A pre-saved Hotkeys map can be loaded.

Restore System Defaults Will restore the Factory default hotkey map.

Clear Hotkeys Mapping Will clear ALL the Hotkeys, so you can start
mapping the Hotkeys from the beginning.

Current Panel Hotkeys Mapping Will open a list of current Hotkeys in a new
window.

79 |
Hotkey Mapping

The Edit Hotkeys dialog boxes

In Edit mode, pressing on any Panel Key, Wheel or Track ball will open the Edit Hotkeys dialog
box. Buttons, wheels and the Track ball each have slightly different edit Hotkeys dialog boxes:

Button Dialog box

Current Hotkey
When No Hotkey is assigned, the
Text in the Box will be [NONE]

New Assigned Hotkey

The New assigned Hotkey
will be visible in this block.

Wheel Dialog box

Up and down Parameters

Used to assign up and down
Hotkeys

| 80
Hotkey Mapping

Track ball Dialog box

Up, down, left, right

Used to assign up, down, left and right
Hotkeys

The Edit Hotkeys dialog box options

The following are the Edit Hotkey options and there functions:

Restore the Factory default Hotkey for the Selected key.

Saves the New selected Hotkey.

Clears the Hotkey for the Selected key

NOTE: If you disable a key, then [NONE] will be displayed:

Cancels any changes made to the Selected Hotkey.

Assign up, down, left and right Hotkeys on the Wheel or

Track ball.

81 |
Hotkey Mapping

The Panel Hotkeys Mapping List

The Panel Hotkeys mapping list displays the current panel hotkeys. The Hotkeys list is according
to the current Hotkeys mapping of the Panel regardless if the Hotkeys are saved or not. From the
Hotkeys mapping list, you can print and track changes of the current Hotkeys.

The Hotkeys list window header will display the Name of the Current loaded Hotkeys map;
.
If any changes have been made to the Hotkeys mapping list, the Window header will display
“Modified” next to the Hotkeys map name;
Once the Panel Hotkeys mapping list window is open, you can search for a Hotkey by using Ctrl
+ F, which brings up a search box.

How to Edit Hotkeys

Each panel button can be assigned with only 1 keyboard Hotkey. All changes to the Hotkeys are
temporary until saved.
There are 2 ways to access the Hotkeys edit menu:
3. Right click the Mouse anywhere when you see the Hand curser

-OR-

4. From the Panel menu bar

| 82
Hotkey Mapping

NOTE: To Reveal the Panel menu bar (Which is normally hidden); place the Mouse over
the top left corner of the panel.

To Edit Hotkeys

1. From the Panel top menu, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the Mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, select Edit Hotkeys Mode:

NOTE: The Command line on the PC panel will display the following:

3. Click on the Panel button or wheel to edit.

The Edit Hotkeys dialog box will appear:

4. Select the new Hotkey by pressing the Key from the PC Keyboard.
5. Click Save.

83 |
Hotkey Mapping

NOTE: If the new Hotkey already exists, then you will be prompt with a warning
message to overwrite:

NOTE: The Panel will stay in the Edit mode until you disable the Mode.

Tip: After you have assigned new Hotkeys, you can test them from the PC keyboard,
provided the Enable Panel Hotkeys is enabled;

To Disable edit Hotkeys

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the Mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, select Edit Hotkeys Mode to disable the Edit mode.

NOTE: The Command line on the Panel will return to normal.

| 84
Hotkey Mapping

To Save the Current Hotkey map

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, select Save keyboard Hotkeys Mapping.

The Save As dialog box will appear.

3. Type the Name of your Hotkeys file.
4. Click Save.

To Load a Hotkeys map

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the Mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, select Load keyboard Hotkeys Mapping.

The Open file dialog box will appear.

3. Select the Hotkeys file you want to load.
4. Click Open.

85 |
Hotkey Mapping

To Restore system defaults

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, Select Restore System Defaults.

The Restore Hotkeys warning dialog box will appear:

3. Click Yes to Restore.

The Hotkeys system defaults will be restored.

| 86
Hotkey Mapping

To Clear Hotkey mapping

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, Select Clear Hotkeys Mapping.

The Clear Hotkeys warning dialog box will appear:

3. Click Yes to clear Hotkeys.

The System Hotkeys will be cleared.

87 |
Hotkey Mapping

To View current panel Hotkeys

1. From the Panel, click on Hotkeys.

–OR-
Right click the mouse and select Hotkeys.
2. From the Hotkeys menu, select Current Panel Hotkeys Mapping.

A New window will open with a list of Current Hotkey mappings:

NOTE: When the Current Hotkey mapping list is open, the option on the Menu
will be grayed out:

--Optional--
To Print the Current Hotkey mapping

a. To print the Panel Hotkeys Mapping List the Print This Page option;

| 88
Hotkey Mapping

To Search for a Hotkey

b. To Search for a Hotkey, press Ctrl + F to bring up the search box;

NOTE: When you change the PC Panel Hotkeys mapping, it will also affect the Remote PC
editor and vice versa.

89 |
Other Improvements for Vector PC Panel

Other Improvements for Vector PC Panel

Other Vector PC Panel and Remote improvements include:
 Show or Hide the Panel title bar
 Attach the PC Wing to the Panel

Show/Hide panel title bar

It is now possible to hide the Title bar for the Panel and the Wing to save screen space.

Accessing the Option to hide the Title bar

There are 2 ways to access the Option:
1. Right click the Mouse anywhere when you see the Hand curser

-OR-

From the Panel menu bar

2. Select the Hide Panel Title option to hide the Title bar on both PC Panel and Wing

| 90
Other Improvements for Vector PC Panel

The PC Wing can attach to the PC Panel.

You are now able to attach the PC Wing to the Panel. This helps you move both the PC Wing
and Panel at the same time.
The Wing can be attached to the Panel by simply dragging the Wing close to the Panel corner
that you want it to attach to. Once they are attached, dragging the Panel only, will affect both the
Panel and Wing.
To de-attach the Wing from the Panel, simple drag the Wing away from the Panel.

Attached from
the Left

Attached from
the bottom

91 |
New Physical Wheel Features for Vector Violet and Ultra Violet

New Physical Wheel Features for Vector Violet and

Ultra Violet
The Physical wheels on the new line of Vector Violet and Ultra Violet are now pushed down
wheels, giving you a faster way of selecting parameters and fine tuning parameters.

The New "push" down feature includes:

3. Ability to select a parameter by pushing down on the Physical wheel, instead of; pressing
on the Parameter bank on the Touch screen:
4. Fine tuning of a parameter, by pushing the Physical wheel down and turning it, instead
of; pressing and holding SHIFT while turning the Physical wheel.

NOTE: The rest of the wheel functions are the same as the other consoles.

Using the Push down feature on the Wheels

The Push down feature can be used in the Following ways:

Doing the Following What happens.. Same as ..

Pressing down on the Wheel By Pressing the Wheel down Selecting the Parameter from the
only. once without turning it will select Parameter bank on the touch
the particular parameter. screen

Pressing down on the Wheel This gives you finer tuning control Holding SHIFT and turning the
and turning. of the Selected parameter. Wheel.

| 92
New Desk Light Control Functions for Vector Violet

New Desk Light Control Functions for Vector Violet

New desk light functions have been added to the Vector Violet only. The Desk light control
options can be accessed from the Editor Toolbar:

The New desk light control options:

Desk light control options

The following is a list of desk light control options and there functions:

Desk light control option What it does

LED Desk Light Controls the LED strip light on the Ultra Violet wide
screen.

External Desk Light Controls the Gooseneck external light on the Violet.

Wide Touch Screen Backlight Controls the Wide touch screen backlight on the Ultra
Violet.

7'' Touch Screen Backlight Controls the Backlight of the On-Board 7'' screen on
the Violet.

To Access the Desk light control functions

1. Press Setup.
2. From the Editor Tool bar, click Desk lights.
3. Use the Wheels to change the levels.

93 |
Vector Violet Playback Select Key and Q-Key Mode Functions

Vector Violet Playback Select Key and Q-Key Mode

Functions
The Q-Key mode has now been added to Vector Violet only which will simulate 20 Q-Keys.
This gives the ability to change the functions of the PB select key to the Q-Key control key.
Once the System is in Q-Key mode you have access to 20 PB‟s and 20 Q-Keys per page.
Two new buttons have been added to the Vector Violet Console for the Q-Key mode:
 The Q-Key mode key
 The Playback Select key

New Buttons added:

Q-KEY MODE
PLAYBACK SELECT

Q-Key Mode
The Q-Key mode can either be turned ON or OFF. When the Q-Key mode is OFF, there will be
20 PB‟s per page with NO access to the Q-Keys and the Operations are the same as on all the
other Vector Consoles.
When the Q-Key mode is ON (LED is Red), there will be 20 PB‟s and 20 Q-Keys available per
page and the SELECT keys of the PB‟s will become the Q-Keys control key. The Sequences for
using the PB‟s and Q-Keys are slightly different as there are NO select keys for the PB‟s and Q-
Keys.

| 94
Vector Violet Playback Select Key and Q-Key Mode Functions

Q-Key Mode:

Top Row LED’s are for Playbacks.

The Bottom Row LEDS are for Qkeys.

Q-Keys when Q-Key is ON

PB Keys when Qkey PB Keys when Qkey

mode is OFF mode is ON

NOTE: Access to the Q-Keys is from the Q-Key mode ONLY. There is NO Access to the Q-Key
when the Console is not in Q-Key mode.

Playback Select key

When the Console is in Q-Key mode, the PB‟s and Q-Keys do not have a physical select key,
which means that most of the PB operations are not available. For this reason a general Playback
Select key was added to the Vector Violet Console. When pressing the Playback select keys, all
PB keys become the Select keys.
The Playback Select key gives you the ability to do all the Playback operations using the same
sequences that you use on the other Vector consoles with the addition of one more key in the
Sequence.

Example:
The Console is in Q-Key mode. If you want to store a new Cue on PB 1, the Sequence of
[Store, Cue, Playback Select] (All the Playback keys function will change to the select
key function), then press on any of the Playback keys. The new Cue will be stored on the
PB 1.

95 |
Vector Violet Playback Select Key and Q-Key Mode Functions

Playback Select key mode:

When pressed, the Q-Keys control

key functionality changed to -
SELECT

When pressed, all of the PB

control key’s functionality
changed to - SELECT

Master PB indication when using the Playback select key

When you press the Playback Select key, the Faders mode LCD will indicate the current master
playback:

MPB # / ## MQK # / ## MPB A / B

When the When the Q- When A/B

PB is the Key is the the Cross-
Master Master fader is the
Master

| 96
Vector Violet Playback Select Key and Q-Key Mode Functions

How to use the Playback Select key

When the Playback Select key LED is ON, then all the Playback control keys function as a
SELECT key. The Playback Select key can be used in the following ways:
 Once only (LED is ON)
 Multiple times (LED Blinks)
 Hold down (LED is ON)

Using the Playback Select key once Only

When you want to do a single Playback operation, one press on the Playback select key (Green
LED is ON), will turn the Function of all the Playback control keys to the SELECT key function.
Once you press on a control key, the Playback Select key will turn OFF and all Playback keys
will return to their original state.

Using the Playback Select key multiple times

When you want to do a few playback operations at a time, you can double press on the Playback
Select key (Green LED Blinks), this will turn the Functions of all the Playback control keys to
the SELECT function key. The Keys of the Playback will remain in the SELECT mode until you
press on the RESET key or again on the Playback Select key.

Holding down the Playback Select key

Holding down the Playback Select key is another way of doing a few operations at a time. But
instead of double pressing on the Playback Select key, you need to press and hold down the
Playback Select key. This will turn all the Playback control keys to the SELECT function key.
The Control keys will remain in the SELECT function until you release the Playback Select key.

NOTE: The Playback select key will function outside of the Q-Key mode only for Playbacks

97 |
The Grand Master at 200%

The Grand Master at 200%

A new option was added to enable the Grand master to exceed 100% of intensity to 200%. This
is extremely useful if you are moving to a bigger venue with an elevated ceiling that requires a
higher lighting intensity.
The new option is located in the System settings ► General tab

The new 200% Grand master option.

Using the Grand Master 200% option

When switching between 100% and 200%, the System must match the new Grand Master level
only by going through zero level, either by taking the Fader down to zero level, or by pressing
the B.O. key when the “Black Out” option is enabled.

ATTENTION! If the Grand master is set to 200% and the Grand master fader is
disabled and the Grand Master will go to 100%.

When switching between options, the following happens:

 The GM will flash yellow with an astrix (*). This can be seen in the Command line;

 The B.O led will blink.

 Fade the GM fader to 0% then increase the fader to the desired level.
-OR-
 Press twice on the B.O key if the Black Out option is enabled.

| 98
The Grand Master at 200%

New Grand Master indication color

The Magenta color was added to the Grand Master indication area to show when the Grand
Master is over 100%:
 When the Grand Master is over 100% the Grand Master indication area changes to
Magenta; and the Led on the B.O. button blinks.

99 |
Vector Release Notes
Release Date: July 20, 2009

Real time version: 3.17.R03

Windows version: GC3.17.R03

RT interface version: 3.17.R03

Firmware file updates are required for:

MIDI, MSC, SMPTE
Motorized playback wings (Vector Red and Vector Blue)
Motorized external playback wings
Vector editor panel (all Vector consoles)
The firmware files are available for download on the Compulite web site

ATTENTION!
Two console panel keys have been changed.
SET shares the GROUP key and is accessed using SHIFT:

M.SERV (MEDIA SERVER) shares the MATRIX key and is accessed using SHIFT:

Note: If there is no matrix patched the MATRIX key defaults to MEDIA SERVER.
Please contact your local Compulite distributor for replacement keys.

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd.

9 Hanagar St. Neve Ne'eman B Industrial Zone Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Tel: 972 9 744 6555 ~ Fax: 972 9 746 6515 ~ www.Compulite.com
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part
of /compulite. /compulite assumes no responsibility for any printing errors that may appear in this document. No
part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any mean, for any purpose other than
personal use, without permission from Compulite.

Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are properties of their respective holders.

Vector version 3.17 May 2009

This document was set up for two sided printing. So conserve the environment and print on both sides.
Version Highlights

1 Display
1.1 Command line Blind mode and ScrollWin indications appear on an orange field.

1.2 Cue sheet The new Param Time field, displayed on the cue sheet, shows the
fade progress of the parameter with the longest fade-in time.

1.3 Desktop Create Desktop displays and populate them with short cuts for
quick operation of many console functions.

1.4 Device headers A title bar graphically separates device types in the live display.

1.5 Full screen view When switching to Full Screen view, an info message with instruc-
tions for exiting the Full Screen view, is displayed.

1.6 Grid editing These values can be edited directly in the grid format:
• QList modes and text
• Cue properties can be edited directly on the cue sheet
• Library properties
• Time line values

1.7 Menus Icons in the menus have been upgraded.

1.8 Parked dimmer display There is a dedicated display for parked dimmers.

1.9 Scrolling You can use the mouse to scroll views even if they are not active.

1.10 Touch screen brightness Control the light level on the integral touch screens.

1.11 Workspace Workspaces are additional display screens that provide additional
display areas. Workspaces are accessed via tabs in the general
window pane. Each window can contain up to 7 workspace tabs.

1.12 Workspace tree The Workspace tree opens automatically each time a new tab is
added to a pane.

2 Editing
2.1 Chasers with animated gifs The CREATE CHASER tool on the Matrix screen, automatically
programs chasers for animated gif files

2.2 Highlight/Lowlight Cycle through fixtures without exiting highlight/lowlight mode.

2.3 Updating cues during their A set of rules govern how cues updates behave during fades.
fade

2.4 Releasing parameter time The procedure used to release parameter fade times has been
for Enter syntax improved.

1
Vector
Version Highlights

3 Media Server
3.1 Arkaos Support for Arkaos.

3.2 Hippo version 3 Support for Hippotizer V3.

3.3 Catalyst Improved support for Catalyst V4.

4 MIDI
4.1 MIDI • MIDI tables have been expanded.
• MIDI functionality has been improved to include more MIDI
notes.

4.2 MSC MIDI Show Control (MSC) functionality has been improved.
Note: MSC (and SMPTE) require a hardware upgrade.

5 Patch
5.1 DMX input patch New procedure to clear the DMX input patch.

5.2 Matrix Drag and drop a range of fixture to selected matrix cells.

5.3 Parked display Park now has a dedicated display.

5.4 Playback input patch Operate Vector playback devices through an external console.

6 Playback
6.1 Flash indications • The playback device’s LED blinks while its flash is active.
• The flash level is displayed in orange in the Playback display
Fader Level field.

6.2 Goto time Specify time-in when fading to a selected cue on the master play-
back and other playback devices.

6.3 Latch flash key The flash key can be locked for continual flashing until it is
released.

6.4 Master playback indication The master playback display has green bars to differentiate it from
the other playbacks.

6.5 Playback selection Select multiple playbacks for global control.

6.6 Playback wing displays • Each playback key has its own field.
• There are three options for the QList field display: QList
number and name, Qlist number only, Qlist name only.

6.7 Step mode playback Stepping through cues now works with QLists also.

2
Release Notes
Version Highlights

7 Show file conversion

7.1 Sabre & 4D file names The names of show files that were converted from Sabre and 4D
consoles, specify the source of the converted file.

8 System Settings
8.1 Art-Net When Art-Net is enabled, the IP Subnet setting defaults to 0.

8.2 Operation mode and syntax Compulite mode and Action syntax are automatically set when
settings loading shows converted from Sabre or 4D.

8.3 System Settings tabs The Communication tab has been replaced by three new tabs: DMX
Protocol, Network, and MIDI/SMPTE.

8.4 Timing Default system time is automatically entered in the Time field if
the CUT button is disabled.

9 Topo
9.1 Topo display • The zoom and show/hide grid tools are always available on
Topo views.
• Change stage element text.
• Show/hide stage element text.
• Show/hide the fixture name for fixtures hung on stage elements.
• New icon for a stage element.

10 Vector PC
10.1 Command line indications If the panel is disconnected an indication is displayed in the
command line.

10.2 Hot keys Some laptops have a graphic card that uses ALT+CRTL+F1 to
toggle through screens when multiple screens are open. For this
hot key sequence to be available on Vector PC, disable them in the
graphic card settings.

10.3 Messages Attempting to close the panel, GcConsole, or real time generates a
warning message.

3
Vector
Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

Graphical Users Interface - Windows

1. APPLY did not work in the System Settings dialog box.

2. In the Patch Manager, the APPLY button erroneously remained active after tapping it to apply
patch changes.
3. Topo did not print correctly.
4. When adding or releasing parked fixtures, the park exam did not refresh and did not show the
new data.
5. Catalyst thumbnails did not work correctly.
6. In the PB display, the text for Submaster was Temp Cue. Now the text is: Submaster.
7. No progress bar was displayed when the console was busy opening a show.
8. Adding a channel to the patch, in a show converted from Sabre, overwrote existing channels.
Thank you to the crew at Moulin Rouge.
9. Scrolling cues on the soft key display did not work correctly. Thank you to the crew at Karkov
Opera House, Poland.
10. The park exam and the DMX Out exam in the Patch Manager, did not display channels with
four digits correctly. Thank you Christof Leuba, France,
11. The data displayed in cue sheets did not refresh. Thank you to the crew at Hed Com, Finland.
12. The digit 2 was not recognized when defining fixture range under the Every selection
command (EVERY, 2/#). Thank you to the crew at Hed Com, Finland.
13. The Matrix Grid and Programmer display set up was not saved with the layout.
14. When using certain display formats (Time, Library, PB, etc.) in the live channel display,
resizing the side header column did not work correctly.
15. In the Desktop right click menu, the option to cancel transparent was missing.
Real Time

1. If you paged the playbacks while flashing a playback, the output was stuck on stage. Only
returning to the original page allowed release. Now a flashing playback is immediately
released when paging.
2. When starting the console, the proportional patch was not loaded. Thank you Andy Stone at
Fuzion, Great Britain.
3. If fixture was parked, soft patching it did not park its dimmer.
4. Enter syntax only! On completing a playback set up, the command line was not cleared and the
editor did not return to selection mode. Thank you Stephen Plotkin, CBC, Canada
5. Enter syntax only! After pressing DELETE and then a bank key, the command line showed
Delete twice. Thank you Stephen Plotkin, CBC, Canada
6. Enter syntax only! When setting fade time, the system returned an Invalid Sequence message
when trying to type a number before pressing ENTER to validate the time.
7. Clearing events on an active time line did not generate a warning message.

4
Release Notes
Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

8. Pressing RELEASE did not stop the flash function.

9. When flashing a dimmer, pressing FL or ZR generated an Invalid Sequence message.
10. Exiting a picker by tapping CLOSE did not return the editor to idle (fixture selection mode).
Attempting to select a fixture changed the parameter value instead.
11. After running a test on a dimmer from port that has no patched fixtures at all, pressing RESET
did not release (zero) the dimmer.
12. Enter syntax only! If a group was used to select fixtures, the control parameter did not work
and an Invalid Sequence message was generated.
13. If a time line was active before shut down, it did not return after starting up the console. Note:
Make sure the time line is stored before shut down. A time line that was not stored will not
return. Thank you to Roberto (Jerry) Romani, Italy.
14. When a dimmer was parked, clearing its patched fixture also cancelled the dimmer’s park
level.
15. When patching a fixture to a dimmer that was parked, but not patched, the dimmer it kept its
parked value.
16. In blind mode, setting an absolute value for a parameter originating from the editor or stage
and then moving the parameter wheel, bumped the parameter to its original value. Thank you
to the crew at Dutch View Studios, Amsterdam, Holland.
17. The system capacity for events has been corrected for 1024 events. Thank you to the crew at
Moulin Rouge, Paris.
18. When pasting a value into a cue, a dialog box with the Overwrite All option selected was erro-
neously displayed. Thank you to Andrew Stone, Fuzion, Great Britain.
19. There were fader matching issues when using a non- motorized Playback Wing with a Vector
console equipped with motorized wings or with Vector PC. Thank you to Paul Grant, Canada.
20. Sometimes opening a new show did not clear all objects.
21. Pressing SEQ after loading a cue to a playback device (using the sequence QLIST #, CUE #,
SELECT) jumped to cue 0. Thank you Gino De-Leo, Spotlight, Italy.
22. Import did not download all the selected data. Thank you to Klaus Bolte, Germany.
23. After pressing UNDO to restore deleted macros 101-106, the LEDs for MACRO 101
MACRO 106 did not work.
24. Left and right mouse buttons did not work on the Editor Wing in mouse mode. Thank you to
Klaus Bolte, Germany.
25. Keypad equivalents did not work on the Editor Wing in ScrollWin mode. Thank you to Klaus
Bolte, Germany.
26. Updated values were ignored when updating a cue after it was flashed and then released on a
playback. Thank you to Andrew Stone and Jonathan Cole (Speedy), Fuzion, UK.
27. Flash did not work in cut time with solo.
28. When the command line was too long the head of the command line was not displayed
correctly.

5
Vector
Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

29. In blind mode, editing cues using the long editing procedure (CUE #, values, STORE or
UPDATE, ENTER for enter syntax) updated the cue immediately. Now, completing the
sequence by pressing STORE requires reloading the cue using: CUE #, GO or BACK and GO,
or GOTO. Note: The changes are output immediately when completing the sequence by
pressing UPDATE instead of STORE.
30. Active playback device output faded to zero if new fixtures were patched in the Patch
Manager.

31. Effects jumped instead of fading between cues.

32. Sometime effects stopped running while fading to the next cue.
33. Playback device priority was not saved in snaps.
34. When TEACH MACRO was active the key’s LED did not blink.
35. SHIFT, FREE was not stored in time lines.
36. If DMX input was enabled the console also listened for Art-Net, even if Art-net was not
enabled. This caused a lot of extraneous traffic on the network.
37. When editing a fixture that was also under submaster control, pressing @ and then moving the
dimmer wheel set the value calculated by the submaster level instead of capturing the stage
value.
38. Control values that are infinite did not run more then 12 hours. Thank you to Raphael, Crystal,
France.
39. Taking the grand master to zero faded RGB parameters to zero along with the dimmer param-
eter. Now this occurs only when there is no dimmer parameter on the RGB device. Thank you
Andy Stone, Fuzion, Great Britain.
40. It was impossible to release fixtures from a submaster. To release fixtures from submasters use
the sequence: Fixture # #, SUB, SELECT, and tap UPDATE or OVERWRITE in the Object
Exists dialog box.
41. If two groups were selected using the soft keys, directly after selecting a group and applying a
library, parameter values could be set for only the last group in the selection. thank you Vini,
Israel.
42. Sometimes when examining the first cue in a Qlist the parameter values color code was incor-
rect. Thank you, Vincent Criulanscy, Eclalux, France.
43. When context soft keys were set for groups, the setting was lost after using the dimmer wheel.
Thank you Matthias Kern, Switzerland.
44. The Every function was limited every ninth fixture. this prevented selections such as 18/12.
Thank you Matthias Kern, Switzerland.
45. It was impossible to release a fixture from a submaster. Thank you Andy Stone, Great Britain.
46. Highlight levels were not consistent when applying highlight to fixtures output from a
submaster where the submaster fader was not at 100%. Thanks you Vini, Israel.
47. After pressing PB RELEASE and then flashing a playback device, the playback output was
stuck on the stage. Thank you, Brian Wagg, Canada.
48. Storing a mark cue, which included a device that did not have a dimmer parameter, crashed
Vector. Thank you, David Bishop at Tin fusion, UK.

6
Release Notes
Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

49. The CUE ONLY LIST option, in the Playback Properties dialog box Assignment Properties
tab did not work.
50. The Exclude From Lib(rary) setting in the device definition, was ignored when storing libraries
manually or generating automatic libraries. Thank you Gino De-Leo at Spotlight, Italy.
51. Updating a cue during its fade out restarted the fade to the cue that was fading in. Thank you
Gerhard Feiner, Germany.
52. For VxWorks systems only! After restarting windows primitive effects and profiles did not
work unless the show was reloaded. Thank you, David, Canada.
53. If a snap contained a released playback, the playback’s LED lit when triggering the snap.
Thank you Stephen Plotkin, CBD, Canada.
54. Single cue mode (QLIST #, CUE #, Select) did not work when set through Settings Default
PB Definitions.

55. Go commands via playback sliders were ignored when teaching time lines. Thank you Sasi
Garcia, Earpro, Spain.
56. Libraries, in shows converted from Sabre or 4D consoles, contained all parameter banks in
each library. Thank you to the crew at Moulin Rouge.
57. Effects stored in blind mode did not run correctly.
58. Updating parameter values that operated under Look Ahead, caused the values to jump.
59. Opening the camera viewer while running a time line caused a crash. Thank you Roberto
Romani, Italy.
60. Effects were released in system time instead of Release Time.
61. When DMX Input was sent through an ePort, the IP address of the ePort’s was not considered,
therefore consoles that should have ignored the DMX Input did not.
62. Art-Net could not be used with DMX Input.
63. Pasting 8-bit values to a 16-bit parameter did not work correctly. Thank you to the staff at LTT.
64. The procedure DIM, #/# # did not work correctly.
65. No warning message was generated when replacing patched fixtures with another device
whose DMX requirements were larger than the original device. Thank you Roberto Romani
(Jerry), Italy.
66. Loading playbacks with non-sequential QLists did not work correctly. See “Limitations”
page 9,Item 9. Thank you Klaus Bolte, Germany.
67. Media server could not be set as the command line default.
68. Cloning 8 bit parameters to 16 bit parameters did not transfer the values correctly.
69. The display for values of 16 bit parameters that were cloned to 8 bit parameters was not always
correct.
70. BANK FILTERS OFF did not work correctly when selecting specific parameters to include in
the library. Thank you, Chris Nathan, USA.
71. In Topo view, it was impossible to remove a fixture from a selection.
72. In Topo view, there was a small refresh after each mouse click. Thank you to the crew at LTT,
Poland.

7
Vector
Bug Fixes - Vector software 3.17

73. Compulite mode only! If the playback priority was set to ORDERED PB PRIORITY pressing
Go after storing some cues to a playback did not initiate a fade from cue 0. Thank you Gino
deLeo, Spotlight, Italy.
74. When filtering the fixture selection for Every and Even, the selection begins from the first
even numbered fixture. Examples: If the command is, SPOT 1 10, EVERY, EVEN, /3, spot 4
will be the first fixture in the selection. If the command is, SPOT 1 10, EVERY, EVEN, /6,
spot 6 will be the first fixture in the selection.
75. Desklight settings were not remembered.
76. The first cell was always skipped when selecting matrix cells with the mouse.
77. Re-occurrence events did work correctly in the Scheduler. thank you Alex Li, Macostar,
China.
78. The (PB) On command when used after releasing a playback did not work. Thank you to the
crew at LTT, Poland.
Hardware

1. MIDI and SMPTE reception stopped after approximately five days of constant operation.
Thank you to Till Grab, Germany and to Shoko Mishima, SEW, Japan.
2. When MIDI and MSC were enabled, sending an MSC command stopped all MIDI and MSC
operation.

ATTENTION! Improved MSC and MIDI function require a hardware upgrade.

3. Playback faders tended to jump on a manual fade in (especially when the Intensity Behavior
was set to GO + JUMP or ALL PARAMETERS). Playback fader sensitivity from 0 - 3% has
been damped down. Thank you to Alon Cohen, Israel.

8
Release Notes
Limitations

Limitations
1. When dimming desk lights, FULL, ON, or ZR only work after the wheel has been moved.
2. Beat is not implemented yet.
3. In the TOPO view, the dimmer levels for 16-bit dimmer devices are not displayed in percent-
age format.
4. Fixture name is limited to 16 characters.
5. In Try Cue parameter time progress is not displayed.
6. QList and Cue cannot be set as the numeric default in the command line.
7. Interactive fixture selection does not work on a console designated as slave or node.
8. Cue numbers in QLists on time lines are not updated when renumbering cues. Work around:
Renumber before teaching the time line.
9. There are some limitations when loading a range of QLists to playbacks.
a. When loading a sequential range (# #), all QLists are loaded. If, within the selected range,
there are QLists that don’t exist, they are programmed now. Example: the selected range is
QLists 1 8. There is no Qlist 6 and 7. When loading the playbacks, the system automati-
cally creates QLists 6 and 7.
b. If the selected range is not sequential (# #, + #, +#) and all the selected Qlists exist, they
are loaded to the playbacks.
c. If the selected range is not sequential (# #, + #, +#) and some of the Qlist in the selected
range do not exist, nothing is loaded to the playbacks.

9
Vector
Limitations

10
Release Notes
Operating New Features

Operating New Features

ATTENTION! Starting from this version, the Vector documentation contains both Action
and Enter procedure syntax. Procedures that use Action syntax are preceded by: ;
procedures that use Enter syntax are preceded by: .

1 Display
1.1 Command line

1.1.1 Blind mode

When BLIND is active it is indicated in the command line and in the Indication bar.

Example:

1.2 Cue sheet

The new Param Time field, displayed on the cue sheet, shows the fade progress of the parameter
with the longest fade-in time.

1.3 Desktop

1.3.1 Desktop overview

Desktop is a special display area that functions just like the desktop on your pc. Populate it with
icons for one click or hot key operation.
The Desktop is populated by dragging and dropping:
Object soft keys
Menus
Menu items
Tool bar objects
Picker items

11
Vector
Operating New Features

Figure 1: Desktop Populated with icons

Desktop panes and icons populating the desktop can be customized through the Desktop and icon
right click menus.

1.3.2 Setting up Desktop views

ATTENTION! When populating the Desktop, the display must be unlocked:

(when unlocked the Desktop pane has a cyan colored frame)
When finished, be sure to lock the display: .

The Desktop icons function only if the display is locked!

View manipulation on the desktop is through the Desktop tool bar.

Figure 2: Desktop navigation tools

To set up a Desktop

1 Open the Workspace tree and expand the Desktop List node.
2 Activate a pane and right click anywhere in the pane.
The display control shortcut menu opens.

12
Release Notes
Operating New Features

Figure 3: The display shortcut menu

3 Tap Add Desktop.
In the Workspace tree, a Desktop is added to the Desktop List.
4 In the Workspace tree, tap the new Desktop.
A new tab, labeled Desktop #, is added to the active pane.

To rename a Desktop

1 In the Workspace tree, tap the Desktop List node.

The active pane shows the Desktops in grid format.

2 Double tap in the Name column of the new Desktop.

3 Type the Desktop’s name.

This name is displayed on the Desktop’s tab.

13
Vector
Operating New Features

To delete a Desktop

1 Make sure that the Desktop you are deleting is active.

2 Right click anywhere in the Desktop.
The Desktop right click menu opens.

Figure 4: Desktop right click menu

3 Choose Delete.
The Desktop is deleted.

OR
1 Open the Workspace tree and tap the Desktop List node.
The active pane shows the Desktops in grid format.
2 Right click in any column in the Desktop row.
3 Choose Delete.
4 The selected Desktop is deleted and no longer appears in the Desktop List.

To customize the Desktop appearance

Right click anywhere on the Desktop and choose an option from the right-click menu.

Figure 5: Desktop right click menu

14
Release Notes
Operating New Features

1.3.3 Populating the Desktop

ATTENTION! To populate a Desktop, the display must be unlocked. Either click the lock
icon or enable Edit mode in the Desktop right click menu.

To populate a Desktop

Example: Place a shortcut to macro 999 on the Desktop.

1 Display the macro soft keys.
2 Right click the soft key for macro 999 twice and hold down the right mouse button.
3 Drag the soft key onto the Desktop and release.
Now you can trigger macro 999 by tapping its icon.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for as many items as required.

Note: To drag a soft key, it is always necessary to right click twice in order to grab it.

Example: Place a shortcut to a picker item on the Desktop.

1 Open the picker.
2 Right click on the image required and hold down the right mouse button.
3 Drag the image onto the Desktop and release.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for as many items as required.
5 When finished, close the picker.

To add fixtures to the Desktop via topo

1 Open a topo view.

2 Select a fixture or a group of fixtures and drag them onto the Desktop.

1.3.4 Editing Desktop icons

The Desktop icon right click menu provides tools for editing icons.

Figure 6: Right click a Desktop icon to open this menu

15
Vector
Operating New Features

Change icon Automatically opens a folder in Windows Explorer where you can find
many *.ico and *.bmp files to use as icons in the Desktop.

Transparent color choose one color, used in the icon, to make transparent. Improves visi-
bility of icons.

Transparent corner Make the color in the corner of the icon transparent.

Disable transparent Remove the transparency for the selected icon(s).

Delete Delete the selected icon(s).

Copy Copy the selected icon(s).

Rename Change the text tag for the selected icon.

Add Hot Key Open the Add Hot Key dialog box to set a hot key for the selected icon(s).
Note: One letter or one number, or combinations using CRTL+ a letter or
SHIFT +a letter can be used. Symbols are not valid for use as hot keys.

Delete Hot Key Delete the hot key for the selected icon(s).

To change an object’s icon and text tag

ATTENTION! To change an icon or text, the display must be unlocked. Either click the
lock icon or enable Edit mode in the Desktop right click menu.

1 Right click the icon and, from the shortcut menu, choose Change Icon.
2 Browse to the folder where icons are stored and select an icon.
3 Click OK.
4 Right click the icon and, from the shortcut menu, choose Rename.
The text field is now selected
5 Type the new name.

To change the icon for more than one object

Example: Change the icon for all the soft key groups appearing on the Desktop.
1 Select multiple icons by holding down Ctrl and clicking each icon

Or
Hold down the left mouse button and drag a rectangle around the icons.
2 Right click one of the selected icons and, from the shortcut menu, choose Change Icon.
3 Browse to the folder where icons are stored and select an icon.
4 Click OK.
The icon is applied to the selected objects.
5 Remember to lock the display by clicking the lock icon on the tool bar or right click in the
desktop and, in the shortcut menu, click Edit Mode to remove the check and lock the
display.

16
Release Notes
Operating New Features

To use transparency for improved visibility

1 Right click an icon or select a group of icons.

The icon shortcut menu opens.

2 Choose Transparent Color.

The Color dialog box opens.
3 Tap the color.
4 Tap OK.
The selected color is now transparent on the Desktop icon.

OR
1 Right click an icon or select a group of icons.
The icon shortcut menu opens.

2 Choose Transparent Corner.

The color that appears in the corner of the icon is now transparent.

1.3.5 Setting up hot keys

You can set up hot keys that will operate the Desktop icons with one press on the keyboard. Hot key
status is saved with the show.

ATTENTION! Hot keys will not work hot keys are not enabled - .- or if the display
is not locked.

To enable or disable hot keys

On the Desktop tool bar, click . and make sure the display is locked .

To create hot keys

1 Make sure that hot keys are enabled.

2 Right click an icon.
The icon shortcut menu opens.

17
Vector
Operating New Features

3 Choose Add HotKey.

The Add HotKey dialog box opens.

Figure 7: Add HotKey dialog box

4 Enter a hot key string by typing on the keyboard.
One letter or one number, or combinations using CRTL+ a letter or SHIFT +a letter can be
used. Symbols are not valid for use as hot keys.
5 Tap SAVE.
The dialog box closes. The hotkey is displayed, in parentheses, as a prefix to the icon’s
name. Example: The palm leaves gobo hot key is (p).

To delete a hot key

1 Right click an icon.

The icon shortcut menu opens.
2 Choose Delete HotKey.
The hot key is deleted and is no longer displayed. with the icon

ATTENTION! Hot keys are global; they are valid for all Desktops.

To use the hot keys

Type the hot key on the keyboard.

OR
You can operate more than one hotkey at the same time.
1 Press and hold the left house button.
2 Drag a rectangle around a group of icons on the Desktop.
3 Release the mouse button.
All hot keys within the rectangle are triggered.

18
Release Notes
Operating New Features

1.4 Device headers

In the live display, a device title bar (header) separates groups of devices by type. Example: There
are 24 patched VL 3000Spot fixtures (spots 1 24) and 12 patched VL3000Wash (spots 25 36).
A device header is placed between spots 24 and 25.

Grid columns are common to the entire display. If a particular type of device does not contain
certain parameters, the column for that parameter is left blank. Example: Varilite 3000Spot and
Varilite 3000Wash are used in the show. Of course, the VL 3000Spot has gobo parameters and the
VL3000Wash does not, so the gobo parameter column shows no values in the VL3000Wash section
of the live display. Scrolling is also common to the entire display.

Figure 8: Live spot display with headers separating types of devices

To show device headers

Open the View menu and choose Headers Per Device.

1.5 Full screen view

When switching to Full Screen view, an info message with instructions for exiting the Full Screen
view, is displayed.

1.6 Grid editing

Edit text and some values directly in grids (spread sheets).

Grid display What can be edited

QList exam • QList mode (toggle Normal or Chaser)

• QList name

Cue sheet • Cue name

• Fade times

19
Vector
Operating New Features

Grid display What can be edited

Libraries • Library name

• Mode (Device Specific, Fixture Specific, Pattern)
• Parameters (included in the library)

Groups Group name

Macros Macro name

Snaps Snap name

Time Line • Time code

• Fade times

When SCROLLWIN is active, you can use console keys or the equivalent keys on an external
keyboard to navigate the grid and for editing

Console key External keyboard What is does

ENTER Enter Applies the changes and moves to focus to the

cell below.

Tab Moves one cell right.

SHIFT Shift + Tab Moves one cell left.

Arrows Arrows Navigate cells up and down or right and left.

NEXT and PREV Page up /Page down Cycle through options in a drop down list.
DELETE Delete Delete text.
CE Backspace Backspace. Deletes one character.

To edit cell information

Example: Edit a cue sheet.

1 Double click the cue name cell.
2 Type the new text.
3 Press ENTER to apply the change.

1.7 Menus
Icons in the menus have been upgraded. functionality has not changed.

1.8 Parked dimmer display

Park now has a dedicated display.

1.9 Scrolling
You can use the mouse to scroll in panes even if they are not active.

20
Release Notes
Operating New Features

To scroll panes

Make sure mouse is active (LED on), hover on any pane and scroll as usual.

1.10 Touch screen brightness

To control the light level on the integral touch screens

1 Press SETUP.
The tool bar is now in setup mode.
2 Tap DESK LIGHT.
3 Use wheel 4 (Vector Touch Screen Backlight) to adjust the light level.

1.11 Workspaces
Workspaces are additional display screens that provide more work areas. You can create a dedi-
cated workspace for playback information, live displays, etc.

Each main window can contain more than one workspace. Workspaces are accessed by tabs located
above the command line, so switching is very simple.

Workspaces are saved as part of the layout or they can be saved separately and loaded for re-use.

Note: Up to 7 Workspace tabs are allowed per window.

The default workspace is called Main and is the first workspace tab. Workspace tabs can be
renamed and their order can be changed.

Figure 9: Workspace tabs and their navigation controls

To add and configure workspaces

1 Right click anywhere in a window and, choose Add Workspace from the right click menu.

21
Vector
Operating New Features

Figure 10: View controls - right click menu

Or
Go to the Window menu Window Options and choose Workspace.
A workspace is added to the window. Its tab appears to the right of the last tab.
2 Right click the new tab.
The display control, right click menu opens.
3 Choose Rename View.
4 Type a new name for the workspace and press ENTER.
5 Using the tools in the Window menu divide the workspace into panes and add tabs, as
necessary
6 Open the Workspace tree .and set up the view as is suitable.
Example: If you have created a Live workspace, you will probably want to show the live
fixture displays, the master playback display, and the playback wing display.
7 Optional - Save this as a display layout.

To change the order of the Workspace tabs

1 Make sure the display is not locked.

2 Drag the tab to a new position.

To save a Workspace

The Workspace file extension is: csl.

1 Go to the Window menu Layout chose Save Workspace.
The Save As dialog box opens to the default folder.
2 Optional - browse to a different folder
3 Type a name in the File Name field.
4 Tap SAVE.
The workspace is saved.

22
Release Notes
Operating New Features

To load a Workspace

1 Tap Window Layout chose Load Workspace.

The Open dialog box opens.
2 Select a Workspace from the list of *.csl files.
3 Tap OPEN.
The Workspace is loaded.

1.12 Workspace tree

The Workspace tree opens automatically each time a new tab is added to a pane.

2 Editing
2.1 Chasers with animated gifs
The CREATE CHASER tool in the matrix programmer automatically programs chasers for
animated gif files. Save each chaser in a new QList.

Figure 11: Matrix programming controls

To automatically program chasers

1 Display the matrix programmer.

2 Tap LOAD FILE.
The Open dialog box opens.
3 Browse to the animation and double click to open.
4 The first animation frame is displayed.
5 Optional - tap AUTORUN to preview the animation.
6 Tap CREATE CHASER.
The Create Chaser dialog box opens.
7 Fill in the fields.

23
Vector
Operating New Features

Figure 12: Create Chaser dialog box

8 Tap CREATE.
One cue is automatically stored for each frame in the selected range. While cues are stored,
a progress bar is displayed in the Create Chaser dialog box.

2.2 Highlight/Lowlight
It is no longer necessary to select fixtures before activating the highlight/lowlight mode.

While in highlight or lowlight mode, most programming operations (such as storing and updating
cues, storing and updating libraries, and applying fans) are available.

Note: Storing or updating a cue when in HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT mode, stores all the
values originating in the HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT palette that are active in the
editor.

Selecting unavailable features (such as, Rem Dim, flash, and all parameters except dimmer and
position) generates the error message Not available in Highlight mode.

Highlight or Lowlight appears in the command line as long as the mode is active.

To apply highlight or lowlight

1 Press HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT.

Highlight or Lowlight appear in the command line.
2 Select a fixture, or a range of fixtures, or a group.
3 Move the pan/tilt wheel or trackball to initiate the highlight feature.
4 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to move to the next or previous fixture.

24
Release Notes
Operating New Features

5 To jump to another fixture, select a new fixture and again move the pan/tilt wheel or track-
ball to initiate the highlight feature.

To exit highlight or lowlight mode

1 Clear the command line by pressing SHIFT + or SHIFT+ CE.

2 Press the active mode -HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT.
The mode is no longer indicated in the command line.

ATTENTION! Pressing HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT without clearing the command line,

clears the HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT values. Pan/tilt and dimmer changes are retained in the
editor and the system is still in HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT mode.

To switch between highlight and lowlight modes

Press SHIFT + HI.LIGHT or LO.LIGHT

2.3 Updating cues during their fade

What happens when updating cues while they are fading in or out?

Example 1 What happens after pressing UPDATE?

The parameters have values in both cue
1 (fading out) and cue 2 (fading in).
Update cue 1.

Cue 1 Chan 1 @ FL Editor: The editor is released, in default system time,

(outgoing) Chan 2 @ FL Chan 1 @ 80 to the parameters’ current values and, if neces-
sary, the values complete their fade in the
Cue 2 Chan 1 @ 50 Chan 2 @ 80
remaining cue time.
(incoming) Chan 2 @ 50

Example 2
The parameters do not have values in cue 2 (fading in).
Update cue 1.

Cue 1 Chan 1 @ FL Compulite mode - The editor is released and

(outgoing) Chan 2 @ FL Editor: parameters fade to their released (or home)
value in system default time.
Cue 2 Chan 3 @ 80
Tracking mode - The editor is released and
(incoming)
parameters fade to their tracked value in
system default time.

Example 3
Update cue 2 (is fading in)

25
Vector
Operating New Features

What happens when updating cues while they are fading in or out?

Cue 1 Chan 1 @ FL
(outgoing) Chan 2 @ FL Editor: The editor is released in system time, but the
Chan 3 @ 80 updated value stays where it is until the fade is
Cue 2 Chan 1 @ 50
complete.
(incoming) Chan 2 @ 50

Updating fade times (Action syntax: CUE #, TIME #, UPDATE) (Enter syntax: CUE #, UPDATE,
ENTER) during a fade does not change the time for the fade in progress. The new fade time is
used the next time.

To edit cues during fades

Select fixtures and edit values, CUE #, UPDATE.

OR
CUE #, Select fixtures and edit values, STORE.

Select fixtures and edit values, CUE #, UPDATE, ENTER.

2.4 Releasing parameter time for Enter syntax

The procedure used to release parameter fade times has been improved.

To release parameter fade time (Enter syntax)

1 Select the cue.

2 Select the fixtures.
3 Select a parameter.
More than one parameter can be selected and entire parameter banks can be selected via
INTENS, POS, COLOR, BEAM, IMAGE, SHAPE.
4 Press TIME.
5 Tap TIME IN or DELAY IN or both.
6 Press DELETE.
7 Press UPDATE.
8 Press ENTER.
The fade times, for the selected parameters, are deleted.

3 Media Server
3.1 Arkaos

To connect Arkaos to Vector

1 Change the Arkaos media server subnet to match Vector's subnet.

26
Release Notes
Operating New Features

If Vector IP is 91.xx.xx.xx, then the Arkaos IP must also begin with 91.

To configure Arkaos

These instructions are for Arkaos version 3.6.5.

1 Change the Arkaos computer workgroup to COMPULITE.
Go to Control Panel double click System Select the Computer Name tab Click
Change Type COMPULITE in the Workgroup Name field. Click OK twice and close the
Control Panel.

2 Restart the Arkaos computer if the workgroup name or IP address was changed.
3 Run the Arkaos application - .
4 On Arkaos open the Edit menu, select Preferences, then select DMX Setup.Choose
Preferences.

ATTENTION! If DMX Setup does not appear in Preferences (on Arkaos), Arkaos is
either in demo mode or you do not have a DMX Key registration.

5 From the shortcut menu, choose DMX Setup.

6 Configure according to Figure 13.

Figure 13: Arkaos DMX setup

27
Vector
Operating New Features

Figure 14: Arkaos Art-Net setup

To patch Arkaos devices on Vector

1 Open the Vector Patch Manager.

2 Import the Arkaos devices according to the Arkaos configuration (Maxi, Full, or Tiny).
3 Create and patch Arkaos devices according to the number of layers configured in the
Arkaos media server.

ATTENTION! To download thumbnails media server devices require exact names!

IF ARKAOS IS RUNNING ON WINDOWS! Make sure that the Arkaos device names
are identical to the Arkaos computer name. Example: If the Arkaos computer name is
Arkaos-00123, the devices must be named Arkaos-00123_1, Arkaos-00123_2, etc.

IF ARKAOS IS RUNNING ON MACINTOSH! The name of the Arkaos device must be

identical to the IP address of the Arkaos computer. If Arkaos computer IP is 90.2.6.8
the devices names must be 90.2.6.8_1, 90.2.6.8_2, 90.2.6.8_3, etc.

4 Save and exit the Patch Manager.

3.2 Hippotizer Version 3

To connect Hippotizer V3 to Vector

1 Change the Hippotizer V3 subnet to match Vector's subnet.

If Vector IP is 91.xx.xx.xx, then the Hippotizer V3 IP must also begin with 91.

To configure Hippotizer V3

These instructions are for Hippotizer version 3.0.12

1 Change the workgroup for the Hippotizer media server to COMPULITE. Go to Control Panel
double click System Select the Computer Name tab Click Change Type COMPU-
LITE in the Workgroup Name field. Click OK twice and close the Control Panel.

2 Restart the Hippotizer computer if the workgroup name or IP address was changed.
3 On HippoNet Overview, open the Engine Settings to select the mode.
4 Run the Hippotizer Engine - and then the Zookeeper - .

28
Release Notes
Operating New Features

Figure 15: Hippo V3 Setup (see the Hippotizer user’s guide)

5 On HippoNet Overview, open DMX Component Settings to set DMX and Art-Net
configuration.
6 Check DMX On.
7 Uncheck Update.
8 Double click an Art-net universe to change the Art-Net configuration.

Figure 16: Hippotizer V3 DMX setup (see the Hippotizer user’s guide)

ATTENTION! To connect with Vector, the Hippotizer media server must have a DMX
component and an Hmap2 Server Component. In HippoNet Overview, check if these
components are present. If they do not appear, add them to Hippotizer.

29
Vector
Operating New Features

To patch Hippotizer V3

1 Open the Vector Patch Manager.

2 Import, create, and patch Hippotizer devices.

Device Mode Number of devices to create and patch

Single 1 x Hippotizer Master V3

8 x Hippotizer Layer V3
1 x HippoTimeLineControl V3

Dual 1 x Hippotizer Master V3

4 x Hippotizer Layer V3
1 x Hippotizer Master V3
4 x Hippotizer Layer V3
1 x HippoTimeLineControl V3

Pan 1 x Hippotizer Master V3

1 x Hippo Pan Master V3
8 x Hippotizer Layer V3

IMPORTANT! The DMX address for the Master must always be before the
DMX address of the layers. Example: Master is DMX 1 and the layers start at
DMX 46.
In each mode, set DMX addresses according to the order that the devices
appear in this table.

3 Save and exit the Patch Manager.

ATTENTION!
To download thumbnails media server devices require exact names! Example: If the
Hippotizer name is Hippov3-00123, the fixture layers must be named Hippov3-00123_1,
Hippov3-00123_2, etc.
If media files have been added to Hippotizer V3, it is necessary to restart the Hippotizer
software to download the new thumbnails.

3.3 Catalyst
Vector supports Catalyst media servers from Catalyst version 4.0.

To connect Catalyst to Vector

1 Change the Catalyst media server subnet to match Vector's subnet.

If Vector IP is 91.xx.xx.xx, then the Catalyst IP must also begin with 91.

30
Release Notes
Operating New Features

Figure 17: Catalyst Mac Network Settings dialog box (see the Catalyst user’s guide)

To verify the connection between Vector and Catalyst

1 Make sure the Catalyst computer is running.

2 On Vector, browse to http://[Catalyst_IP]:8080/catws/files.html.
Example: browse to http://91.0.0.5:8080/catws/files.html - where 91.0.0.5 is the Catalyst
computer IP.
You should see an HTML page with all the installed media thumbnails.
3 Then browse to http://[Catalyst_IP]:8080/catws/Images/000_002.jpg.
You should see the thumbnail for file 2 in folder 0. This verifies that the connection is OK
and the thumbnails are accessible.
Now the media picker for the file and the folder parameters are available.

To patch Catalyst

1 Patch the Catalyst layers in the Catalyst computer.

Consult the Catalyst user’s guide for details.
2 Open the Vector Patch Manager.
3 Import the Catalyst v4.cvd device files located in the High End folder.
4 Create and patch Catalyst fixtures.
5 In the Name field enter the Catalyst computer IP address.

ATTENTION!
To download thumbnails media server devices require exact names! Example: If Catalyst
computer IP address is 2.0.0.5, the layer names must be 2.0.0.5_1, 2.0.0.5_2, 2.0.0.5_3,
etc. Note that Vector automatically appends _* to the layers.

6 Save and exit the Patch Manager.

31
Vector
Operating New Features

4 MIDI

4.1 MIDI tables

MIDI tables have been expanded. Of special interest are MIDI commands that trigger Vector
console macros. Triggering Vector macros with one MIDI note allows you to operate a long and
complex command strings without complicated and time-consuming MIDI programming.

Example: Trigger a macro that loads a QList to a playback device and operate the playback.

MIDI notes for triggering console macros

Command Note On # Command Note Off #

MACRO 101 96 Macro 911 21

MACRO 102 97 Macro 912 22
MACRO 103 98 Macro 913 23
MACRO 104 99 Macro 914 24
MACRO 105 100 Macro 915 25
MACRO 106 101 Macro 916 26

Macro 901 115 Macro 917 27

Macro 902 116 Macro 918 28

Macro 903 117 Macro 919 29

Macro 904 118 Macro 911 21

Macro 905 119 Macro 920 33

Macro 906 120

Macro 907 121

Macro 908 122

Macro 909 123

Macro 910 124

For the complete MIDI tables, consult the Vector Reference Guide, Appendix 2 Automated
Playback.

4.2 MSC
MIDI Show Control functionality has been improved and now it is fully functionally.
Between Vector consoles macros 1 through 255 are available.
Between a Vector console and a 4D or Sabre console 1 through 128 are available.
Basic master playback control: Go, Hold, Timed Go, Resume.

32
Release Notes
Operating New Features

5 Patch
5.1 DMX input patch
New procedure to clear the DMX input patch.

To clear the DMX input patch

1 Press DIM.
2 Select the dimmer number on the keypad.
Range selections are also valid.

Or
To clear the entire DMX input patch, skip this step and continue with step 3.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH.
4 Tap CLEAR SELECTED/ALL.
The selection is cleared from the patch.
If there was no selection the entire DMX input patch is cleared.
5 For Enter syntax - Press ENTER.

5.2 Matrix
You can select cells on the matrix and drag and drop fixtures to map them to the selected cells.

Note: The cells are populated from left to right and from row 1 down.

To map fixtures to selected matrix cells.

1 Tap N to put the Workspace tree in navigation mode;

2 Select the matrix from the Matrix List.
The matrix is displayed in the main patch pane.
3 Tap S to switch to selection mode.
4 Select fixtures from Matrix in the Sets node and drop them in the matrix cells.

Figure 18: Mapping fixtures to selected cells

33
Vector
Operating New Features

5.3 Playback input patch

Operate Vector playback devices through an external console. Allows access to all playback pages,
including pages that are not currently active on the main console.

If your main Vector console has motorized faders, we recommend not working on the same page
both on the main console and on the external console as you may encounter resistance on the
motorized faders.

ATTENTION! If your console does not have the correct key (QLIST / PLAYBACK),
please contact your local distributor.

To patch playback input

1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX address.
A range can also be selected.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press PLAYBACK and specify the page and playback device number (#/#).
A range can also be selected.

Or
Press PLAYBACK and specify the playback device number (#).
The playback device(s) on the active page is selected.
5 Press STORE.

OR
1 Press DIM.
2 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
3 Press the Select key for a playback device.
4 Press STORE.

To release playback input patch

1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX address.
A range can also be selected.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press PLAYBACK and specify the page and playback device number (#/#).
5 Press RELEASE.

34
Release Notes
Operating New Features

On the Editor tool bar, tap CLEAR ALL.

OR
1 Press DIM.
2 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
3 Press the Select key for a playback device.
4 Press RELEASE.

Or
On the Editor tool bar, tap CLEAR ALL.

To patch playback input

1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX address.
A range can be selected.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press PB and specify the page and playback device number (#/#).
A range can also be selected.

Or
Press PLAYBACK and specify the playback device number (#).
The playback device(s) on the active page is selected.
5 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX address.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press the Select key for a playback device.
5 Press ENTER.

To release playback input patch

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Press DIM.
3 Select the DMX address.
A range can be selected.
4 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
5 Press PB and specify the page and playback device number (#/#).

35
Vector
Operating New Features

Press PLAYBACK and specify the playback device number (#).

The playback device(s) on the active page is selected.
6 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Press RELEASE.
2 Press DIM.
3 Select the DMX address.
4 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
5 Press the Select key for a playback device.
6 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX input address.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press PB and specify the page and playback device number (#/#).
5 On the Editor tool bar, tap CLEAR ALL.
6 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Press DIM.
2 Select the DMX input address.
3 Tap INPUT PATCH TO.
4 Press the select key for a playback device.
5 Press RELEASE.

Or
On the Editor tool bar, tap CLEAR ALL.
6 Press ENTER.

36
Release Notes
Operating New Features

6 Playback
6.1 Flash indications

The flash level is shown in orange in the Fader Level field.

6.2 Latch flash key

A latched flash key toggles the values in the current cue on or off. Flash keys always work in cut
time.

The bottom key row, in the Playback Wing display, shows the latched flash keys’ indication.

Figure 19: Bottom key indication on the Playback Wing display

To latch flash keys

1 Press SETUP.
2 Press the select key for a playback.
The Playback Properties dialog box opens.
3 On the Playback Definitions tab, click the arrow to view the flash behavior options.

37
Vector
Operating New Features

Figure 20: Flash behavior options

4 Click LATCH.
5 Click CLOSE.

To operate latched flash keys

1 Press the flash key to output all parameter values in the current cue.
This turns on the dimmer also, regardless of the fader position.
2 Press again to turn off.
Values bump out.

6.3 Master playback indication

The master playback display has green highlight and progress bars to differentiate it from the other
playbacks.

6.4 Playback wing displays

Each playback key has its own field. The playback key fields appear in the same order as the keys
on the console.

Figure 21: Playback wing display

There are three options for the QList header display:
QList number and name
Qlist number only
Qlist name only.

Set headers in the Grid Properties dialog box.

38
Release Notes
Operating New Features

6.5 Playback selection

Select playback devices and QKeys for global response to a control function. Selections can include
AB, playback faders and QKeys.
Examples:
Select all the playback devices on page 1 and free them.
Select all the playback devices on page 2 and give them a go command., even if the current
page is on page 1.
Apply Goto commands to the selected playback devices.
Load a range of cues to the selected playback devices.
Load a range of QLists to the selected playback devices.

There are three ways to select playback devices:

Directly using the Select keys, when selecting from the current page
The console keys, where the first number is the page and the second number is the playback
device.
The Editor tool bar in playback selection mode.

Figure 22: Editor tool bar in playback selection mode

The Editor tool bar buttons in playback selection mode are:

Button What it does

PLAYBACK Sets the keypad for playback device selection.

QKEY Sets the keypad for Qkey selection.

ALL PLAYBACKS Selects all playback devices (except AB).

ALL QKEYS Selects all QKeys.
AB Selects AB.

LAST SELECTION ( ) Recalls last playback selection.

Note: Another way to recall the last selection is pressing PB, .

The applicable playback control functions are:

JOIN
FREE
ON
.GO
HOLD/BACK

SOLO
STEP

39
Vector
Operating New Features

PB RELEASE
TRIGGER is toggled on or off according to the state of the first playback device in the selec-
tion. Example: The selection is playbacks 2, 5, 7. TRIGGER is off for playbacks 2 and 7;
playback 5 has trigger on. Pressing TRIGGER turns it on for the entire selection.
SEQ is toggled on or off according to the state of the first playback device in the selection.
Example: The selection is playbacks 2, 5, 7. SEQ is off for playbacks 2 and 7; playback 5 has
trigger on. Pressing SEQ turns it on for the entire selection
PRIO affects only the first playback device in the selection.

The selection remains available until manually cleared by:

Selecting a fixture
Pressing SHIFT + CE
Pressing SHIFT+ RESET

To select and operate playbacks

1 Tap PLAYBACK on the Editor tool bar or press PB.

The Editor tool bar switches to playback selection mode.
PB is displayed in the command line.
2 All selection sequences (# #, # + #, # - #) can be used for the current page. Use the #/#
syntax to select playback devices on other pages.

Or
Use the selection options on the Editor tool bar.

Or
Press the Select key for playback devices. Pressing and holding Ctrl (on the external
keyboard) allows you select multiple playback devices.

Or
Select playback devices by page number and playback number. Example: (page) 2 / 5
(playback device).
3 Press a playback control.

6.6 Goto time

Specify time-in when fading to a selected cue on the master playback and other playback devices.

To specify a fade time on the master playback

1 Press GOTO.
2 Select a cue number.
Important! Do NOT press CUE, just enter the cue number.
3 Press TIME.
4 Specify the fade time.
5 Press ENTER.

40
Release Notes
Operating New Features

The fade to the selected cue begins.

To specify a fade time on the playback devices

1 Press GOTO.
2 Select a cue number.
Important! Do NOT press CUE, just enter the cue number.
3 Press TIME.
4 Specify the fade time.
5 Press the Select key for the playback device.
The fade to the selected cue begins.

7 Show file conversion

7.1 Sabre & 4D file names
The names of show files that were converted from Sabre and 4D consoles, specify the source of the
converted file.

For Sabre shows, the show file number is preceded by the letter ’C’. Example: Tosca_C0010.

For 4D shows, the show file number is preceded by the letter ’V’. Example: Tosca_V0010.

8 System Settings
8.1 Art-Net
When Art-Net is enabled, the Subnet setting defaults to 0.

8.2 Operation mode and syntax settings

Compulite mode and Action syntax are automatically set in the Behavior tab when loading shows
converted from Sabre or 4D.

8.3 System Settings tabs

The Communication tab has been replaced by three new tabs:
DMX Protocol

MIDI/SMPTE.
Network

41
Vector
Operating New Features

DMX Protocols tab

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Accurate configuration of the VC and Art-Net output of the console helps to reduce network traffic and uses
less system resources.
DMX-over- Virtual Connectors VC’s • On - Virtual connector transmission (DMX over On
Ethernet Ethernet) is enabled.
• Off - Virtual connector transmission (DMX over
Ethernet) is disabled.

VC Compression • On - VC compression is enabled. Off

• Off - VC compression is disabled.

Art-Net Communication over Art-Net protocol enabled

Art-Net Subnet Set the Art-Net IP subnet.

Note: Generally the Art-Net IP subnet on Art-Net
devices, such as media servers, is set to the same
IP subnet as Vector.

DMX Input • On - The console responds to DMX512 input.

• Off - The console does not respond to DMX512
input.

Max Transmission Rate Regulate the rate at which DMX over Ethernet is
(Hz) transmitted. The available range is 25 - 40 Hz.

42
Release Notes
Operating New Features

Network tab

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Console Network ID The network ID number appears in this field.

Identifiers
Console ID The console ID number appears in this field.
Multi User Node • On - The console or Vector Node operates as a Off
Mode node.
• Off - The console is not designated as a node.

Slave • On - The console or Vector Node operates as a Off

slave console.
• Off - The console is not a slave console.

Master Console ID The master console through its ID number.

43
Vector
Operating New Features

MIDI/SMPTE tab

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

MIDI MIDI • On - MIDI over Ethernet is enabled. On

• Off - MIDI over Ethernet is disabled.

MIDI Keys • On - Vector can receive MIDI notes transmitted

by an outside source.
• Off - Vector does not receive MIDI notes
transmitted by an outside source.

MIDI Macro • On - Storing MIDI macros is permitted.

• Off - Storing MIDI macros is not permitted.

MIDI Channel Set the MIDI channel

MIDI Code Offset

MSC Enable/disable MSC (over Ethernet) On

MSC Device ID Set the MSC device ID. This is the (device)
console receiving the MIDI commands.

MSC Group ID Set the MSC group ID.

MSC Peer ID Set the MSC peer ID. This is the (device) console
sending the MIDI commands.

Frames per Second Set the frames per second value for SMPTE opera-
(SMPTE) tion.

44
Release Notes
Operating New Features

8.4 Timing
Default system time is automatically entered in the Time field if the CUT button is disabled.

9 Topo
9.1 Topo
The zoom and show/hide grid tools are always available on Topo views.

There is now an icon for stage element: .

To change stage element text

1 Tap a stage element.

The stage element is now selected and displayed within a rectangle.
2 Right click inside the selection rectangle and, from the shortcut menu, choose Properties.
The Topo Element dialog box opens.

Figure 23: A stage element and the Topo Element dialog box
3 Type a name in the Name field.
4 Tap OK.
The dialog box closes. The stage element’s name appears above it on the Topo display.

To show/hide stage element and fixture names

1 Tap a stage element.

The stage element is now selected and displayed within a rectangle.
2 Right click inside the selection rectangle and, from the shortcut menu, choose Properties.
The Topo Element dialog box opens.
3 Check Show Element Name or Show Fixture Names check boxes to show the names on the
Topo display.
To hide the names remove the check.

45
Vector
Operating New Features

10 Vector PC
10.11 Command line indications
If the panel is disconnected an indication is displayed in the command line.

11.1 Hot keys

Some laptops have a graphic card that uses ALT+CRTL+F1 to toggle through screens when
multiple screens are open. For this hotkey sequence to be available on Vector PC, disable them in
the graphic card settings.

11.2 Messages
Attempting to close the editor simulator panel or real time generates a warning message.

Figure 24: Disconnect warning message

46
Keyboard map for console keys
t

Editor section Editor section

Console key Keyboard Console key Keyboard

+ + (Plus) JOIN J
- - (Minus) LIBRARY Ctrl + L
(through) * (asterisk) LOWLIGHT Shift + H
Ctrl + R M(acros) 101 106 Alt + Ctrl + F1 F6
(dot) (dot) MACRO M
SHIFT + Shift + MATRIX Alt + S
@ @ MEDIA SERVER Ctrl + M
/ (slash) / (slash) NEXT Page up
0 through 9 0 through 9 ON (param value) Shift + O
ACTIVE A PARK Shift + K
ACTIVE ALL Shift + A PASTE Ctrl + V
BLIND Shift + B PB Shift + L
SHIFT + BLIND Shift + Alt + B PREV(ious) Page down
CE Backspace QLIST L
SHIFT + CE Shift + Backspace REDO Ctrl + Y
CHANNEL C RELEASE END
COPY Ctrl + C SHIFT + RELEASE Shift + End
CUE Q RESET ESC
CUT Ctrl + X SHIFT + RESET Shift + ESC
DELETE Del / Delete SET Shift + S
DIM (mer) D SETUP Shift + U
Dimmer Wheel Ctrl + < > SHIFT SHIFT
EDITORS Ctrl + E SHIFT +TIME (time line) Shift + T
EFFECT E SNEAK K
ENTER ENTER SPOT S
EXAM X STAGE Ctrl + T
FAN Ctrl + F STORE R
FULL F STORE+ Alt + R
GROUP G TEACH MACRO Shift + M
HIGHLIGHT H TEXT Shift + T
Keyboard map for console keys

Editor section Playback keys and controls

Console key Keyboard Console key Keyboard

TIME T SNAP Shift + N

UNDO Control + Z SHIFT + SNAP GO Shift + PageDown
UPDATE U SNAP GO Shift + PageUp
SCROLLWIN Scroll lock Playback (fader and AB) controls
ZERO Z PB (Fader Mode) Window key + P
Rate (Fader Mode) Window key + ~
Channel (Fader Mode) Window key + C
Playback keys and controls
Param (Fader Mode) Window key + R
Console key Keyboard
Select PB's 1 10 Alt + F1 F10
B.O. Alt + Ctrl + Esc
GO PB's 1 10 Ctrl + F1 F10
FREE F12
HOLD/BACK PB 1 10 Ctrl + 1 10
SHIFT + FREE Shift + F12
Flash PB keys 1 10 Alt + 1 0
ON O
GOTO WinKey + Space
PB's 1 10 Alt + Ctrl + F1 F10
Select QKeys Alt +Shift + F1 F10
PB PAGE DOWN Alt + Page Down
Qkeys playback control Shift + F1 F10
PB PAGE UP Alt + Page Up
Select AB Alt + Ctrl + F11
PB RELEASE Ctrl + P
Go AB Ctrl + F11
SHIFT + PB RELEASE Shift + Ctrl + P
Hold/Back AB Alt + F11
PB/QK DISPLAY Alt + Scroll Lock
Master Playback controls
PRIORITY Insert
GO (master playback) Space
RATE ~ (tilda)
HOLD (master pb) Alt + Space
SHIFT + RATE Shift + ~ (tilda)
BACK (master pb) Ctrl + Space
SEQUENCE Ctrl + Q
Select A/B Alt + F11
SOLO Ctrl + O
GO A/B F7
STEP Shift + P
HOLD/BACK (A/B) F8
SUB MASTER Ctrl + B
TRIGGER Shift + G
||/ Pause
SHIFT +||/ Shift + Pause
(change direction) Ctrl + D
Keyboard map for console keys

Parameter control Display navigation

Console key Keyboard Console key Keyboard

BEAM B Arrow left Shift +

COLOR O Arrow right Shift +
HOME Home Arrow up Shift +
IMAGE V Arrow down Shift +
INTENSITY I
Lock X Alt + X
Lock Y Alt + Y
PAN

Parameter key 1 Ctrl + Shift + 1

Parameter key 2 Ctrl + Shift + 2
Parameter key 3 Ctrl + Shift + 3
Parameter key 4 Ctrl + Shift + 4
Parameter key 5 Ctrl + Shift + 5
Parameter wheel 1 Window key + 1
Window key + Q
Parameter wheel 2 Window key + 2
Window key + W
Parameter wheel 3 Window key + 3
Window key + E
Parameter wheel 4 Window key + 4
Window key + R
Parameter wheel 5 Window key + 5
Window key + T
POSITION P
SHAPE N
TILT
MIDI tables
These MIDI tables are arranged according to MIDI note numbers.
MIDI Note On table (continued)
MIDI Note On table
Command Note On #
Command Note On #
FL 27
(not used) 0 7 28
DELAY (tool bar) 1 4 29
RELEASE 2 1 30
TIME 3 0 31
Macro 913 4 STORE 32
(not used) 5 FAN 33
SUB(MASTER) 6 TIME LINE 34
FREE 7 TEXT 35
CLEAR 8 DELETE 36
REM DIM (tool bar) 9 LOOP (tool bar) 37
(thru) 10 EDITOR 38
EDITOR FADE (tool bar) 11 STORE+ 39
and NEXT 12 CUE 40
and PREV 13 SPOT 41
FLASH (Fixture Test /tool bar) 14 EFFECT 42
ENTER 15 UNDO 43
16 REDO 44
2 17 PASTE 45
5 18 DIMMER 46
8 19 RESET 47
9 20 CHANNEL 48
6 21 LINK (tool bar) 49
3 22 EXAM 50
CE 23 STAGE 51
(not used) 24 BLIND 52
ZR 25 COPY 53
ON 26 SNAP GO (protect - pb faders) 54
MIDI Note On table (continued) MIDI Note On table (continued)

Command Note On # Command Note On #

@ 55 SHAPE 83

PB RELEASE 56 P key 4 84
(see, Figure 1 p.53)
MACRO 106 57
P key 5 85
MACRO 105 58 (see, Figure 1 p.53)

MACRO 104 59 P key 6 86

(see, Figure 1 p.53)
MACRO 103 60
P key 7 87
MACRO 102 61
(see, Figure 1 p.53)
MACRO 101 62
TEACH MACRO 88
SETUP 63
SHIFT + / (slash) 89
PB/QKEY 64
SHIFT+ RESET 90
(master pb) GO 65
/ (slash) 91
(master pb) HOLD 66
SHIFT + II (Back/Hold All) 92
(master pb) BACK 67
P key 9 93
GOTO 68 (see, Figure 1 p.53)

SEQ (PB control) 69 PARK (SHIFT + SNEAK) 94

SELECT AB 70 P key 10 95
(see, Figure 1 p.53)
(not used) 71
MATRIX 96

Macro 901 97
P key 1 73
(see, Figure 1 p.53) Macro 902 98

P key 2 74 Macro 903 99

(see, Figure 1 p.53)
Macro 904 100
P key 3 75
Macro 905 101
(see, Figure 1 p.53)
Macro 906 102
AB (right key) 76
LOCK X 103
AB (left key) 77
LOCK Y 104
(not used) 78
Macro 907 105
P key 4 79
Macro 908 106
PB (fader mode) 80
Macro 909 107
PB RATE (fader mode) 81
Macro 910 108
CHANNEL (pb mode) 82
MIDI Note On table (continued)

Command Note On #

+@ (tool bar button) 109

SET 110

Macro 911 111

Macro 912 112

PB (SHIFT + QLIST) 113

B.O. 114

SHIFT+ ACTIVE 115

Deselect (SHIFT + ) 116

COLOR 117

Macro 914 118

Macro 915 119

+ 120

Macro 916 121

Macro 917 122

Macro 918 123

Macro 919 124

Macro 920 125

RATE 126

CONTROL (tool bar) 127

Figure 1: P keys (Vector Red, Vector Blue, and Vector PC) and their MIDI Notes

Figure 2: Playback device keys and QKeys are described in the MIDI tables by their location (Top, Middle, Bottom)
MIDI Note Off table MIDI Note Off table (continued)

Command Note Off# Command Note Off#

(not used) 0 SCROLL WIN 29

CUT (SHIFT + COPY) 1 (PB page up) 30

UPDATE 2 (PB page down) 31

SHIFT + FREE (Free All) 3 HIGHLIGHT 32

SHIFT + PB RELEAS 4 LOWLIGHT 33

(PB Release All)
GROUP 34
HOME 5
QLIST 35
INTENSITY 6
ACTIVE 36
BEAM 7
Top key PB 4 37
Bottom key PB 10 off 8
Top key PB 5 38
SELECT (playback 1) 9
Top key PB 6 39
SELECT (playback 2) 10
Top key PB 7 40
SELECT (playback 3) 11
Top key PB 8 41
SELECT (playback 4) 12
Top key PB 9 42
SELECT (playback 5) 13
MOUSE 43
SELECT (playback 6) 14
(not used) 44
SELECT (playback 7) 15
Bottom QKey 2 45
SELECT (playback 8) 16
Bottom QKey 3 46
SELECT (playback 9) 17
Bottom QKey 4 47
SELECT (playback 10) 18
Bottom QKey 5 48
SELECT QKey 1 19
Bottom Q key 6 49
SELECT QKey 2 20
(STEP UP) (tool bar) 50
SELECT QKey 3 21
(STEP DOWN) (tool bar) 51
SELECT QKey 4 22
Top key PB10 52
SELECT QKey 5 23
Bottom QKey 7 52
SELECT QKey 6) 24
Bottom QKey 8 54
SELECT (QKey 7) 25
IMAGE 55
SELECT (QKey 8) 26
(not used) 56
SELECT (QKey 9) 27
Bottom QKey 1 57
SELECT (QKey 10) 28
MIDI Note Off table (continued) MIDI Note Off table (continued)

Command Note Off# Command Note Off#

Bottom QKey 9 58 Bottom key PB 5 off 87

Bottom QKey 10 59 Bottom key PB 6 off 88

Top key PB1 60 Bottom key PB 7 off 89

Top key PB2 61 MACRO 90

Top key PB3 62 Bottom key PB 8 off 91

Middle key PB1 63 Bottom key PB 9 off 92

Middle key PB2 64 SELECT PB 1off 93

Middle key PB3 65 SELECT PB 2 off 94

Middle key PB4 66 SELECT PB 3 off 95

Middle key PB5 67 SELECT PB 4 off 96

Middle key PB6 68 SELECT PB 5 off 97

Middle key PB7 69 - @ (tool bar button) 98

Middle key PB8 70 SELECT PB 6 off 99

Middle key PB 9 71 SELECT PB 7 off 100

Middle key PB 10 72 SELECT PB 8 off 101

Bottom key PB 1 73 SELECT PB 9 off 102

Bottom key PB 2 74 SNAP GO 103

Bottom key PB 3 75 SELECT PB 10 off 104

Bottom key PB 4 76 SELECT QKey 1 off 105

Bottom key PB5 77 SELECT QKey 2 off 106

Bottom key PB 6 78 SELECT QKey 3 off 107

Bottom key PB 7 79 SELECT QKey 4 off 108

Bottom key PB 8 80 SELECT QKey 5 off 109

Bottom key PB 9 81 SELECT QKey 6 off 110

Bottom key PB 10 82 SELECT QKey 7 off 111

Bottom key PB 1off 83 (not used) 112

Bottom key PB 2 off 84 SOLO 113

Bottom key PB 3 off 85 LIB 114

Bottom key PB 4 off 86 POSITION 115

MIDI Note Off table (continued) MIDI Control Change table

Command Note Off# Control

Command
change
LIB (tool bar) or 116
SHIFT +LIB (not used) 0

PB PARAM (fader mode) 117 Bottom QKey 1 off 1

SELECT QKey 8 off 118 Bottom QKey 2 off 2

SELECT QKey 9 off 119 Bottom QKey 3 off 3

SELECT QKey 10 off 120 Bottom QKey 4 off 4

SNEAK 121 Bottom QKey 5 off 5

(not used) 122 Bottom QKey 6 off 6

SNAP 123 Bottom QKey 7 off 7

- (minus) 124 Bottom QKey 8 off 8

(not used) 125 Bottom QKey 9 off 9

SHIFT + SNAP GO 126 Bottom QKey 10 off 10

(not used) 127 Top key PB1 off 11

Top key PB2 off 12

Top key PB3 off 13

Top key PB4 off 14

Top key PB5 off 15

Top key PB6 off 16

Top key PB7 off 17

Top key PB8 off 18

Top key PB9off 19

Top key PB10 off 20

Middle key PB1 off 21

Middle key PB2 off 22

Middle key PB3 off 23

Middle key PB4 off 24

Middle key PB5 off 25

Middle key PB6 off 26

Middle key PB7 off 27

Middle key PB8 off 28

MIDI Control Change table (continued) MIDI Note ON for triggering CONSOLE MACROS

Control Command Control change

Command
change
MACRO 101 62
Middle key PB9 off 29
MACRO 102 61
Middle key PB10 off 30
MACRO 103 60
MOVE 31
MACRO 104 59
SHIFT + GO (PB 32
control) MACRO 105 58

GO (PB control) 33 MACRO 106 57

ON (PB control) 34 Macro 901 97

PB RELEASE off 35 Macro 902 98

PB controls OFF (except 36 Macro 903 99

PB RELEASE)
Macro 904 100
PRIO 37
Macro 905 101
JOIN 38
Macro 906 102
STEP 39
Macro 907 105
(PB control) 40
Macro 908 106
II (PB control) 41
Macro 909 107
SHIFT + BLIND 42
Macro 910 108
MEDIA SERVER 43
Macro 911 111

Macro 912 112

Macro 913 4

Macro 914 118

Macro 915 119

Macro 916 121

Macro 917 122

Macro 918 123

Macro 919 124

Macro 920 125

For more information about.

MIDI Notes for triggering
PLAYBACK CONTROLS

Command

FREE MIDI On 7

SUB(MASTER) MIDI On 6

PB RELEASE MIDI On 56

SEQ MIDI On 69

TRIGGER MIDI On 72

AB (right key) MIDI On 76

AB (left key) MIDI On 77

SHIFT + II (Hold All) MIDI On 92

SHIFT + FREE MIDI Off 3

SHIFT + PB RELEAS MIDI Off 4

SHIFT + GO Control Change 22

GO Control Change 33

ON Control Change 34

SHIFT + PB RELEAS off Control Change 35

PB controls OFF (except Control Change 36

PB RELEASE)

PRIO Control Change 37

JOIN Control Change 38

STEP Control Change 39

Control Change 40

II Control Change 41

For more information about.

MIDI Notes for triggering

MASTER PLAYBACK CONTROLS

Command

GO MIDI On 65

HOLD MIDI On 66

BACK MIDI On 67

For more information about.

Oscp
No ratings yet
Oscp
3 pages
EB Tester Software User Manual V1.8.5
100% (1)
EB Tester Software User Manual V1.8.5
16 pages
Omnicast 4 0 Installation Guide
No ratings yet
Omnicast 4 0 Installation Guide
32 pages
OpenWells 5000.1.13.0 Release RlsNotes
75% (4)
OpenWells 5000.1.13.0 Release RlsNotes
283 pages
TestOut LabSim1.2.3
No ratings yet
TestOut LabSim1.2.3
2 pages
Tanner Tools v13.0 Release Notes
No ratings yet
Tanner Tools v13.0 Release Notes
9 pages
RobotComms Fanuc v1
0% (1)
RobotComms Fanuc v1
19 pages
EB Manual
No ratings yet
EB Manual
16 pages
Tanner Tools Release Notes
No ratings yet
Tanner Tools Release Notes
17 pages
Branch Repeater Family Release Notes Release 5.7.0/3.0.0
No ratings yet
Branch Repeater Family Release Notes Release 5.7.0/3.0.0
16 pages
ControlSpace Designer 4v3-1 ReleaseNotes
No ratings yet
ControlSpace Designer 4v3-1 ReleaseNotes
7 pages
EntraPass SE 4.03 Release Notes EN DN1525-1003
No ratings yet
EntraPass SE 4.03 Release Notes EN DN1525-1003
26 pages
Cinematic Rooms Professional Manual
No ratings yet
Cinematic Rooms Professional Manual
19 pages
AN03 Getting Started With Quartus
No ratings yet
AN03 Getting Started With Quartus
10 pages
NetWorker - UpdatingNetWorker.s - 1
No ratings yet
NetWorker - UpdatingNetWorker.s - 1
12 pages
Pulse Connect Secure: Release Notes PCS 9.1R6 Build 5801 PDC 9.1R6 Build 2223 Default ESAP Version: ESAP 3.4.8
No ratings yet
Pulse Connect Secure: Release Notes PCS 9.1R6 Build 5801 PDC 9.1R6 Build 2223 Default ESAP Version: ESAP 3.4.8
22 pages
Onyx Ethernet Release Notes For HPE PDF
No ratings yet
Onyx Ethernet Release Notes For HPE PDF
66 pages
VeriFire Tools 10.00 - Release Notes - 180904
No ratings yet
VeriFire Tools 10.00 - Release Notes - 180904
2 pages
Unit - Iii 8086 Interrupts
No ratings yet
Unit - Iii 8086 Interrupts
22 pages
OpenText_TeamSite_LiveSite_OpenDeploy_21.4.2_Release_Notes
No ratings yet
OpenText_TeamSite_LiveSite_OpenDeploy_21.4.2_Release_Notes
24 pages
Orchestrator_Release_Notes_Version_9.4.3_RevC
No ratings yet
Orchestrator_Release_Notes_Version_9.4.3_RevC
67 pages
HP Network Simulator - Irf Lab Guide
No ratings yet
HP Network Simulator - Irf Lab Guide
16 pages
Enterprise Provisioner Release Notes v1.05.00.0136
No ratings yet
Enterprise Provisioner Release Notes v1.05.00.0136
6 pages
VeriFire Tools 10.00 - Release Notes - 180904
100% (1)
VeriFire Tools 10.00 - Release Notes - 180904
2 pages
WIZ VSP User Manual English
0% (1)
WIZ VSP User Manual English
36 pages
16 Switching
No ratings yet
16 Switching
72 pages
EC-Net4 Installation_UG
No ratings yet
EC-Net4 Installation_UG
32 pages
Arubaos-Cx Ova Network Setup in Esxi: Requirements
No ratings yet
Arubaos-Cx Ova Network Setup in Esxi: Requirements
26 pages
PV Elite: System Requirements
No ratings yet
PV Elite: System Requirements
10 pages
PV2018 Readme PDF
No ratings yet
PV2018 Readme PDF
10 pages
Docu88653 EMC Storage Monitoring and Reporting 4.2.1 Support Matrix
No ratings yet
Docu88653 EMC Storage Monitoring and Reporting 4.2.1 Support Matrix
12 pages
3102312-EN R013 4-CU V7.0 Release Notes
No ratings yet
3102312-EN R013 4-CU V7.0 Release Notes
26 pages
PI Release 4.0 SR1 e
No ratings yet
PI Release 4.0 SR1 e
7 pages
What S New - PV Elite 2018
No ratings yet
What S New - PV Elite 2018
5 pages
Zettler Speak TroubleShooting
No ratings yet
Zettler Speak TroubleShooting
15 pages
PV2017 README DownLoadLy - Ir PDF
No ratings yet
PV2017 README DownLoadLy - Ir PDF
9 pages
EtherNetIP Settings - DX200 Scanner to Beckhoff Adapter
No ratings yet
EtherNetIP Settings - DX200 Scanner to Beckhoff Adapter
11 pages
EBI R310 1 Compatibility
No ratings yet
EBI R310 1 Compatibility
8 pages
VRD2009 Release Notes en
No ratings yet
VRD2009 Release Notes en
8 pages
Migrating To H3C Lab Guide Lab01 Basic Config v2.8
No ratings yet
Migrating To H3C Lab Guide Lab01 Basic Config v2.8
32 pages
DM08 FTHS ProcessBook For Analytics
No ratings yet
DM08 FTHS ProcessBook For Analytics
43 pages
Release Notes 250-441
No ratings yet
Release Notes 250-441
35 pages
VXR E560 Ts
No ratings yet
VXR E560 Ts
12 pages
Lab - Establishing A Console Session With Tera Term
No ratings yet
Lab - Establishing A Console Session With Tera Term
5 pages
Verifire® Tools (V.8.00, 9.00, and Higher) Product Installation Document
No ratings yet
Verifire® Tools (V.8.00, 9.00, and Higher) Product Installation Document
3 pages
402207-063 Prog-History PowerSuite Config-Prog 3v0
No ratings yet
402207-063 Prog-History PowerSuite Config-Prog 3v0
10 pages
LogExportTool Use Guide For BeneVision
No ratings yet
LogExportTool Use Guide For BeneVision
23 pages
Cisco HX Data Platform Preinstallation Checklist Form
No ratings yet
Cisco HX Data Platform Preinstallation Checklist Form
15 pages
EtherNetIP Settings - Beckhoff Scanner to DX200 Adapter
No ratings yet
EtherNetIP Settings - Beckhoff Scanner to DX200 Adapter
9 pages
EDT Installation Guide 17.2.00
No ratings yet
EDT Installation Guide 17.2.00
23 pages
1430-Opera Cluster Solution - Installation
100% (2)
1430-Opera Cluster Solution - Installation
60 pages
IVR Portal Deployment and Installation Guide Ver 1.0.0
No ratings yet
IVR Portal Deployment and Installation Guide Ver 1.0.0
31 pages
JT Bi-Directional Translator For CATIA V5 v13: Siemens Siemens Siemens
No ratings yet
JT Bi-Directional Translator For CATIA V5 v13: Siemens Siemens Siemens
30 pages
User Interfaces and Naming Conventions
No ratings yet
User Interfaces and Naming Conventions
7 pages
232-002287-00 Rev B Analyzer 7.2 Virtual Appliance Getting Started Guide
No ratings yet
232-002287-00 Rev B Analyzer 7.2 Virtual Appliance Getting Started Guide
45 pages
QuantelRio Release Notes V4.4.1
No ratings yet
QuantelRio Release Notes V4.4.1
17 pages
Basics of Riverbed Modeler Academic Edition: Laboratory
No ratings yet
Basics of Riverbed Modeler Academic Edition: Laboratory
10 pages
Cii2017 Readme PDF
No ratings yet
Cii2017 Readme PDF
13 pages
Sofeware Manual DDS
No ratings yet
Sofeware Manual DDS
23 pages
WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay Networks
From Everand
WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay Networks
Mamta Devi
No ratings yet
Raspberry Pi :The Ultimate Step by Step Raspberry Pi User Guide (The Updated Version )
From Everand
Raspberry Pi :The Ultimate Step by Step Raspberry Pi User Guide (The Updated Version )
Jason Scotts
4/5 (4)
Neo Geo Architecture: Architecture of Consoles: A Practical Analysis, #23
From Everand
Neo Geo Architecture: Architecture of Consoles: A Practical Analysis, #23
Rodrigo Copetti
No ratings yet
ChartCo Passage Manegament UserGuide
100% (4)
ChartCo Passage Manegament UserGuide
44 pages
M365 Offline Installation with Extended offline access policy
No ratings yet
M365 Offline Installation with Extended offline access policy
2 pages
x86 Stderr
No ratings yet
x86 Stderr
3 pages
iOSRequestGoogle (2)
No ratings yet
iOSRequestGoogle (2)
75 pages
LogMeIn Ignition: User Guide
No ratings yet
LogMeIn Ignition: User Guide
19 pages
Yuzu Installer
No ratings yet
Yuzu Installer
2 pages
Literature Survey Microsoft Surface
No ratings yet
Literature Survey Microsoft Surface
4 pages
My Command PDF
No ratings yet
My Command PDF
3 pages
Snap Art 2 Manual
No ratings yet
Snap Art 2 Manual
41 pages
Proxifier
No ratings yet
Proxifier
39 pages
Windows ATT&CK - Logging Cheat Sheet - Ver - Sept - 2018
No ratings yet
Windows ATT&CK - Logging Cheat Sheet - Ver - Sept - 2018
15 pages
Dynamics365for Financials PDF
100% (1)
Dynamics365for Financials PDF
813 pages
Synopsis
No ratings yet
Synopsis
10 pages
Forensics FJ
No ratings yet
Forensics FJ
28 pages
Verathon ScanPoint Local Client - User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Verathon ScanPoint Local Client - User Manual PDF
54 pages
3D Maya-4
No ratings yet
3D Maya-4
25 pages
Speed Up Your PC
100% (1)
Speed Up Your PC
8 pages
UM9100 Guide
No ratings yet
UM9100 Guide
14 pages
Vpecker User Manual V9.7
100% (2)
Vpecker User Manual V9.7
58 pages
Cisco UCS C240 M4 Server Installation and Service Guide - RAID Considerations (Cisco UCS C-Series Rack Servers) - Cisco
No ratings yet
Cisco UCS C240 M4 Server Installation and Service Guide - RAID Considerations (Cisco UCS C-Series Rack Servers) - Cisco
28 pages
VIZ07+ +FactoryTalk+View+SE+Lab+Manual
No ratings yet
VIZ07+ +FactoryTalk+View+SE+Lab+Manual
162 pages
Simulate ONTAP 8.2 Step-by-Step Installation - 28nau-Final-29
No ratings yet
Simulate ONTAP 8.2 Step-by-Step Installation - 28nau-Final-29
53 pages
Lastcrash 63848397339
No ratings yet
Lastcrash 63848397339
12 pages
Cascade - Level 1 - Cascade Introduction2
No ratings yet
Cascade - Level 1 - Cascade Introduction2
3 pages
Syed Habeeb Ullah Quadri: Page 1 of 9
No ratings yet
Syed Habeeb Ullah Quadri: Page 1 of 9
9 pages
Universal Shortcuts
No ratings yet
Universal Shortcuts
2 pages
Dell Latitude E5470 Laptop Owner's Manual (En-Us)
No ratings yet
Dell Latitude E5470 Laptop Owner's Manual (En-Us)
56 pages
Using Docker On Windows: What Are Machines?
No ratings yet
Using Docker On Windows: What Are Machines?
9 pages